SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electron-
ic products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cau-
tions indicated on this page and those indicated on the
safety instruction section.
SEE BOTTOM OF ENCLOSURE OR LOWER FRONT
PANEL FOR GRAPHIC SYMBOL MARKINGS
The exclamation point within the equi-
lateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operat-
ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-
tions in the literature accompanying the
product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol within the equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the pres-
ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-
age” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod-
ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that
when it is properly installed and used in its normal and
customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been elimi-
nated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others
to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Prod-
uct performance and/or safety standards may be dimin-
ished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be
denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warran-
ties may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha re-
serves the right to change or modify any of the specifica-
tions without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmental-
ly friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and
the production methods used to produce them, meet
these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit
of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-
proximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-
cessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is con-
sidered to be at an end, please observe all local, state,
and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of
knowledge relating to how a function or effect works
(when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered
by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully
and consult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
Model _________________________________________
Serial No. ______________________________________
Purchase Date __________________________________
92-469
YAMAHA CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
PATENTS
HS
1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING — When using any electrical or electronic
product, basic precautions should always be followed. These
precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in ac-
cordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-
tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (in-
cluding amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro-
vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for re-
placement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta-
cles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the appa-
ratus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus com-
bination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
This product shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids,
such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the
apparatus.
Do not place this product or any other objects on
the power cord or place it in a position where any-
one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over
power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of
an extension cord is not recommended! If you must
use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a
25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller
the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local
electrician.
WARNING — To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or mois-
ture.
Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liq-
uids are not spilled into the enclosure through any
openings that may exist.
This product, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be ca-
pable of producing sound levels that could cause
permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long
period of time at a high volume level or at a level
that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hear-
ing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound,
the shorter the time period before damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or
accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied
as a part or the product or as optional accessories.
Some of these items are designed to be dealer as-
sembled or installed. Please make sure that benches
are stable and any optional fixtures (where applica-
ble) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches sup-
plied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No
other uses are recommended.
This product shall be connected to a MAINS socket
outlet with a protective earthing connection.
This product has a power switch for shutting off all
system. The switch is located on the Power Supply
Unit nearby the entrance of the AC cord. Note that
the switch on the Controller does not shutdown all
system.
Make sure that the plug of the Power Supply Unit’s
power cable can easily be disconnected from the
AC outlet as a measure of precaution.
Battery
– Danger of explosion if battery incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same type.
Outlets for Speakers
– Connect speakers of 2A/1A (confirm the indication
to the outlets) or less of totals. Do not connect other
products except speakers.
– Consult Yamaha service technician when using the
outlets outside the purchased area.
92-469-DK
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
2
The control unit is classified as a Class 1 laser product. One of the
labels below is located on the inside of the CD drive unit.
La unidad de control está clasificada como producto láser de Clase 1.
Una de las etiquetas siguientes o similar está situada en el interior de la
unidad de disco CD.
Управляющий модуль классифицируется как лазерное изделие
класса 1. Одна из приведенных ниже этикеток или подобная
расположена на внутренней стороне привода CD.
控制器分类为第 1 类激光产品。下列标签中的一种位于 CD 驱动
装置的内侧。
控制器分類為第 1 類激光產品。下列標簽中的一種位于 CD 驅動
裝置的內側。
컨트롤 유닛은 1 등급 레이저 제품으로 분류됩니다 . 다음의 라벨
중의 하나가 CD 드라이브 유닛의 안쪽에 붙어 있습니다 .
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT: The wires in mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter
E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and
YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
CAUTION—Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
PRECAUCIÓN—El emplo de controles o ajustes o la realización
de procedimientos distintos a los especificados en este manual
podrá resultar en una peligrosa exposición a la radiación.
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ—Использование управления,
регулировок или выполнение процедур, отличающихся от
описанных в этом руководстве, может привести к опасному
радиоактивному облучению.
注意 — 本操作说明书指定之外的控制器的使用、调整或操作
可能会导致危险的放射性照射。
注意 — 本操作說明書指定之外的控制器的使用、調整或操作
可能會導致危險的放射性照射。
주의 — 여기에 지정된 것 이외로 컨트롤을 사용하는 것 , 혹은
지정된 것 이외로 조정을 행하
거나 , 절차를 실행하는 것은 위
험한 방사선에 노출되는 결과를 초래할 수도 있습니다 .
Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun
pistorasiaan.
Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.
Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag.
이 기기는 가정용 (B 급 ) 전자파적 합기기로서
주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적
으로 하며 , 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 .
Laser Diode Properties
* Material: GaAIAs
* Wavelength: 790 nm
* Laser Output Power at the lens of the Laser Pick Up Unit: max.
0.2 mW
Propiedades del diodo láser
* Material: GaAIAs
* Longitud de onda: 790 nm
* Potencia de salida láser en el objetivo de la unidad Laser Pick
Up: máx. 0.2 mW
Свойства лазерного диода
* Материал: GaAlAs
* Длина волны: 790 нм
* Мощность лазерного излучения на линзах звукоснимателя:
макс. 0.2 мВт
激光二极管的性能
* 材料∶ GaAlAs
* 波长∶ 790 nm
* 激光拾波器透镜部的激光输出功率∶最大 0.2 mW
激光二極管的性能
* 材料：GaAlAs
* 波長：790 nm
* 激光拾波器透鏡部的激光輸出功率：最大 0.2 mW
레이저 다이오드 속성
* 재료 : GaAlAs
* 파장 : 790 nm
* 레이저 픽업 유닛 렌즈에서의 레이저 출력 : 최대 0.2 mW
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
APAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
EN60825
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable
collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local
municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further
information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set
by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo y Baterías usadas
Estos símbolos en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe significan que los productos
electrónicos y eléctricos usados y las baterías usadas no deben ser mezclados con desechos hogareños corrientes.
Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos y las baterías usadas, por favor
llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional y las directivas 2002/96/EC y 2006/
66/EC.
Al disponer de estos productos y baterías correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y a prevenir cualquier
potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo
de los desechos.
Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos y baterías, por favor contacte a su
municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta en el cual usted adquirió los artículos.
[Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea]
Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte a su vendedor o proveedor para
mayor información.
[Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea]
Estos símbolos sólo son válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos artículos, por favor contacte a sus
autoridades locales y pregunte por el método correcto de disposición.
Nota sobre el símbolo de la batería (ejemplos de dos símbolos de la parte inferior)
Este símbolo podría ser utilizado en combinación con un símbolo químico. En este caso el mismo obedece a un
requerimiento dispuesto por la Directiva para el elemento químico involucrado.
Для инструментов с заземленным кабелем питания
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
Электропитание/кабель питания
• Подключайте только к электросети с
соответствующим напряжением и защитным
заземлением. Неправильное заземление может
вызвать поражение электрическим током.
Беречь от воды
• Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть
под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и
влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости
с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в
отверстия.
Беречь от огня
• Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и
другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет
может упасть и вызвать пожар.
ВНИМАНИЕ!
Место установки
• При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что
используемая электрическая розетка
легкодоступна. При возникновении какого-либо
сбоя или неисправности немедленно отключите
питание инструмента и отсоедините кабель
питания от электросети.
Даже если питание устройства отключено,
инструмент продолжает в минимальном
количестве потреблять электроэнергию.
Если инструмент не используется в течение
длительного времени, отсоедините кабель питания
от э
лектросети.
Для инструментов с незаземленным кабелем питания
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
Беречь от воды
• Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть
под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и
влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости
с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в
отверстия.
Беречь от огня
• Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и
другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет
может упасть и вызвать пожар.
ВНИМАНИЕ!
Место установки
• При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что
используемая электрическая розетка
легкодоступна.
При возникновении какого-либо сбоя или
неисправности немедленно отключите питание
инструмента и отсоедините кабель питания от
электросети.
Даже если питание устройства отключено,
инструмент продолжает в минимальном
количестве потреблять электроэнергию.
Если устройство не используется в течение
длительного времени, отсоедините кабель питания
от э
лектросети.
Для инструментов с блоком питания
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
Беречь от воды
• Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть
под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и
влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости
с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в
отверстия.
Беречь от огня
• Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и
другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет
может упасть и вызвать пожар.
ВНИМАНИЕ!
Место установки
• При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что
используемая электрическая розетка
легкодоступна. При возникновении какого-либо
сбоя или неисправности немедленно отключите
питание инструмента и отсоедините кабель
питания от электросети.
Даже если кнопка питания находится в положении
STANDBY, устройство продолжает в
минимальном количестве потреблять
электроэнергию. Если устройство не используется
в течение длительного времени, о
тсоедините
кабель питания от электросети.
ቂ߾ܕනृภቂȃ
ቂࣴճ2000mᇵݓฏภቂȃ
ጝᄎ࠲खၤֶׁܿؠডݒؠȃ
Важное примечание: Информация об условиях Гарантии для Клиентов в Российской Федерации [Русский]
Для получения подробной информации об условиях Гарантии на продукцию Yamaha в России, условиях гарантийного
обслуживания, пожалуйста, посетите веб-сайт по адресу ниже (на сайте доступен файл с условиями для скачивания и
печати) или обратитесь в офис представительства Yamaha в России.
http://ru.yamaha.com/ru/support/
Mounting the Control Unit to the Grand Piano
Montaje de la Unidad de control en el Gran Piano
Установка блока управления на Disklavier модели «рояль»
将控制器安装在大钢琴上
將控制器安裝在大鋼琴上
그랜드피아노에 컨트롤 유닛 장착하기
Remove the four screws from the sides of the control unit.
Quite los cuatro tornillos laterales de la unidad de control.
Удалите четыре винта с боковых панелей блока управления.
从控制器左右侧面取下 4 个螺丝。
從控制器左右側面取下 4 個螺絲。
컨트롤 유닛의 측면에 있는 나사 네 개를 제거해 주십시오 .
Place the metal suspension bracket, supplied with the Disklavier grand
model, over the control unit, then secure the metal suspension bracket to
the control unit using the four screws (4 10) supplied with the
Disklavier.
Coloque el soporte metálico de suspensión suministrado con el modelo
de gran piano Disklavier en la unidad de control, luego fije el soporte
metálico de suspensión utilizando los cuatro tornillos (4 10)
suministrados con el Disklavier.
Поместите металлический кронштейн подвески, поставляемый с
Disklavier, над блоком управления. Прикрепите кронштейн
подвески к блоку управления при помощи четырех винтов (4 10),
входящих в комплект Disklavier.
将 Disklavier 大钢琴机型配备的金属配件放在控制器上，然后用
Disklavier 配备的 4 个螺丝 （4×10）将金属配件固定在控制器上。
將 Disklavier 大鋼琴機型配備的金屬配件放在控制器上，然後用
Disklavier 配備的 4 個螺絲 （4×10）將金屬配件固定在控制器上。
Disklavier 그랜드 모델과 함께 제공되는 고정용 금속 브래킷을 컨트
롤 유닛 위에 장착한 후 , Disklavier 와 함께 제공되는 네 개의 나사
(4 10) 를 사용하여 고정용 금속 브래킷을 컨트롤 유닛에 단단히
고정시켜주십시오 .
(1)
(2)
Insert the three restraining screws (5 12) into the marked nuts
underneath the bass side key bed, then tighten the screws, leaving a gap
of about 5 mm between head of the screw and piano body.
Coloque los tres tornillos de retención (5 12) en las tuercas marcadas
debajo del asiento del teclado del lado de bajo, luego apriete los tornillos
dejando un espacio de unos 5 mm entre la cabeza del tornillo y el cuerpo
del piano.
Вставьте три удерживающих винта (5 12) в указанные гайки в
штульраме со стороны басовых клавиш. Затяните винты, оставляя
зазор около 5 мм между головкой винта и корпусом Disklavier.
将 3 个安装螺丝 （5×12）插入位于低音侧键盘下面的螺孔中，然
后拧紧螺丝，在螺丝头和钢琴主体之间要留下约 5mm 间隙。
將 3 個安裝螺絲 （5×12）插入位於低音側鍵盤下面的螺孔中，然
後擰緊螺絲，在螺絲頭和鋼琴主體之間要留下約 5mm 間隙。
세 개의 고정나사 (5 12) 를 키보드의 베이스 쪽 받침대 하부에 설
치되어 있는 너트에 삽입한 후 , 나사머리와 피아노 본체 사이가
5mm 정도의 틈이 남도록 나사를 조여주십시오 .
Fit the “slots” of the metal suspension bracket containing the control unit
to the screws mentioned in step (3).
After mounting the control unit, push the control unit back as far as it
will go and then tighten the three screws to secure the bracket.
Fije las “ranuras” del soporte metálico de suspensión que contiene la
unidad de control a los tornillos mencionados en el paso (3).
Después de montar la unidad de control, empújela hacia atrás hasta el
tope y luego fíjela con los tres tornillos para bloquear el soporte.
Через отверстия кронштейна подвески, удерживающего блок
управления, пропустите винты, описанные в пункте (3).
До упора подтолкните блок управления от себя и закрепите винт на
кронштейне.
使固定在控制器上的金属配件的 “ 槽 ” 穿过步骤 （3）所述的螺
丝。
装好控制器后，推入控制器到尽头位置，然后紧固 3 个螺丝来固定
金属配件。
使固定在控制器上的金屬配件的 “ 槽 ” 穿過步驟 （3）所述的螺
絲。
裝好控制器後，推入控制器到儘頭位置，然後緊固 3 個螺絲來固定
金屬配件。
컨트롤 유닛이 장착되어있는 고정용 금속 브래킷의 “ 슬롯 ” 을 순
서 (3) 에서 언급한 나사에 끼워 넣어 주십시오 .
컨트롤 유닛을 장착한 후 , 그 유닛을 뒤쪽으로 끝까지 밀어 준 다음
에 세 개의 나사를 조여서 브래킷을 단단히 고정시켜 주십시오 .
5 mm
(3)
(4)
Connect the cables extending from the piano to the appropriate
connectors/jacks on the rear panel of the control unit.
• Coaxial cable: to the TO PIANO connectors
• Speaker cord*: to the OUTPUT jacks
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
Conecte los cables que salen del piano a los conectores/tomas apropiados
del panel trasero de la unidad de control.
• Cable coaxial: al los conectores TO PIANO
• Cable de los altavoces*: a las tomas OUTPUT
* Solamente para los modelos suministrados con los altavoces monitores.
Подключите кабельные шнуры Disklavier к соответствующим
разъемам на задней панели блока управления.
• Коаксиальный кабель к разъемам TO PIANO
• Кабель для подключения мониторов*: к гнездам OUTPUT
* Только для моделей, поставляемых с мониторами.
将从钢琴伸出的电缆连接到控制器背面板上相应的端子。
• 同轴电缆∶连接到 TO PIANO 端子
• 扬声器软线 * ∶连接到 OUTPUT 端子
*
仅适用于带监听扬声器的机型。
將從鋼琴伸出的電纜連接到控制器背面板上相應的端子。
• 同軸電纜：連接到 TO PIANO 端子
• 揚聲器軟線 *：連接到 OUTPUT 端子
*
僅適用於帶監聽揚聲器的機型。
피아노에 연결되어 있는 케이블을 컨트롤 유닛의 뒷면에 있는 적당
한 커넥터 / 잭에 연결해 주십시오 .
• 동축 케이블 : TO PIANO 커넥터에
• 스피커 코드 *: OUTPUT 잭에
*
모니터
스피커가
함께
제공되는
모델에만
한정됨
.
(5)
Notes:
1)Handle the metal suspension bracket and the control unit carefully to avoid scratches.
2)Screws;
For suspension bracket installation: Flat head (4
10)
4
For control unit suspension: Bind head (5
12)
3
3)When mounted correctly, the control unit is angled approximately 18° above horizontal.
Notas:
1)Manipule con cuidado el soporte metálico de suspensión y la unidad de control para evitar ralladuras.
2)Tornillos;
Para la instalación del soporte de suspensión: Cabeza plana (4
10)
4
Para la suspensión de la unidad de control: Cabeza fijadora (5
12)
3
3)Cuando está montada correctamente, la unidad de control queda angulada aproximadamente unos 18º respecto a la posición
horizontal.
Примечания:
1)При установке кронштейна подвески и блока управления соблюдайте осторожность во избежание появления
царапин.
2)Винты:
Для установки кронштейна подвески: Потайная головка (4
10)
4
Для подвески блока управления: Обвязывающая головка (5
12)
3
3)При правильной установке блок управления должен располагаться приблизительно под углом 18° к горизонту.
注∶
1)
小心操作金属配件和控制器，以免造成划伤。
2)
螺丝；
金属配件安装用∶平头螺丝 （
4×10
）
×4
控制器安装用∶连结头螺丝 （
5×12
）
×3
3)
当安装正确时，控制器应处于从水平仰起约
18°
左右的状态。
注：
1)
小心操作金屬配件和控制器，以免造成劃傷。
2)
螺絲；
金屬配件安裝用：平頭螺絲 （
4×10
）
×4
控制器安裝用：連結頭螺絲 （
5×12
）
×3
3)
當安裝正確時，控制器應處於從水平仰起約
18°
左右的狀態。
주목
:
1)
고정용
금속
브래킷과
컨트롤
유닛에
상처가
나지
않도록
조심해서
다루어
주십시오
.
2)
나사
;
고정용
브래킷
설치용
:
플랫
헤드
(4
10)
4
컨트롤
유닛
고정용
:
바인드
헤드
(5
12)
3
3)
컨트롤
유닛이
정확하게
장착되어있다면
,
그
각도가
수평면
위로
약
18
˚를
유지합니다
.
Mounting an Optional USB Floppy Disk Drive to the Grand Piano
Montaje de una unidad de disco floppy USB opcional en el gran piano
Установка на Disklavier модели «рояль» дисковода для USB
носителей, поставляемого по дополнительному заказу
将任选 USB 软磁盘驱动器安装在大钢琴上
將任選 USB 軟磁盤驅動器安裝在大鋼琴上
그랜드피아노에 옵션사양의 USB 플로피 디스크 드라이브 장착하기
Remove the backing papers from the adhesive tape inside the case, and
fit the floppy disk drive into the case.
Quite el papel trasero de la cinta adhesiva dentro de la caja y coloque la
unidad de disco floppy en la caja.
Удалите бумажную подложку с клейкой ленты, покрывающей дно
корпуса, установите дисковод.
取下盒内的两面胶带覆纸，将软磁盘驱动器固定在盒中。
取下盒內的兩面膠帶覆紙，將軟磁盤驅動器固定在盒中。
케이스 내부에 있는 점착테이프로부터 보호지를 제거하고 , 플로피
디스크 드라이브를 케이스에 끼워 넣어주십시오 .
Attach the drive and case assembly to the bottom of the control unit,
using the four screws (3 6) supplied with the Disklavier.
Fije el conjunto de la unidad y la caja en la parte inferior de la unidad de
control por medio de los cuatro tornillos (3 6) suministrados con el
Disklavier.
Прикрепите корпус, с находящимся в нем дисководом, к нижней
панели блока управления с помощью четырех винтов (3 6),
поставляемых с Disklavier.
使用 Disklavier 配备的 4 个螺丝 （3×6）将软磁盘驱动器与盒一起
固定到控制器底面上。
使用 Disklavier 配備的 4 個螺絲 （3×6）將軟磁盤驅動器與盒一起
固定到控制器底面上。
Disklavier 와 함께 제공되는 네 개의 나사 (3 6) 를 사용하여 드라이
브와 케이스 조립부를 컨트롤 유닛의 하부에 부착시켜 주십시오 .
Adhesive tape
Cinta adhesiva
Клейкой лента
ਥܕ
ጳழ
닖뛯밒눺뿊
(1)
(2)
Connect the USB cable extending from the drive to the USB port on the
rear panel of the control unit.
Conecte el cable USB que sale de la unidad al puerto USB del panel
trasero de la unidad de control.
Подключите кабельные шнуры USB дисковода к соответствующим
разъемам на задней панели блока управления.
将从驱动器伸出的 USB 电缆连接到控制器的背面板上。
將從驅動器伸出的 USB 電纜連接到控制器的背面板上。
드라이브에 연결되어 있는 USB 케이블을 컨트롤 유닛의 뒷면에 있
는 USB 포트에 연결해 주십시오 .
Notes:
1)The case is supplied with the USB floppy disk drive.
2)Use the screws (3
6) supplied with the Disklavier when attaching.
Notas:
1)La caja se suministra con la unidad de disco floppy USB.
2)Utilice los tornillos (3
6) suministrados con el Disklavier para su fijación.
Примечания:
1)Корпус поставляется с USB-дисководом гибких дисков.
2)При закреплении корпуса используйте винты (3
6), поставляемые с Disklavier.
注∶
1)
盒为
USB
软磁盘驱动器的附件。
2)
安装时，要使用
Disklavier
配备的螺丝 （
3×6
）
注：
1)
盒為
USB
軟磁盤驅動器的附件。
2)
安裝時，要使用
Disklavier
配備的螺絲 （
3×6
）。
주목
:
1)
케이스는
USB
플로피
디스크
드라이브와
함께
제공됩니다
.
2)
부착
시에는
Disklavier
와
함께
제공되는
나사
(3
6)
를
사용하여
주십시오
.
USB cable
Cable USB
Кабель USB
USBݢେ
USBႬᢠ
USB 맆눺
(3)
English
Operation manual
English
i
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Disklavier piano!
The Disklavier is a fascinating instrument that integrates a classic Yamaha acoustic piano with innovative
electronics to suit your entertainment, educational, and creative needs, while retaining the tone, touch and
long-term value that have long made Yamaha pianos the world’s finest.
Before using your Disklavier piano, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
■ Notes on Source Code Distribution
For three years after the factory shipment, you may request from Yamaha the source code for any portions
of the product which are licensed under the GNU General Public License by writing to the following address:
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka, 430-8650, JAPAN
Piano Development Department, Yamaha Corporation
The source code will be provided at no charge; however, we may require you to reimburse Yamaha for the
cost of delivering the source code to you.
The source code download is also available on the following website:
http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/disklavier_e3/
• Note that we shall bear no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising from changes (additions/
deletions) made to the software for this product by a third party other than Yamaha (or party authorized by
Yamaha).
• Note that re-use of source code released to the public domain by Yamaha is unguaranteed, and Yamaha
shall not bear any responsibility whatsoever for the source code.
■ Trademarks & Copyrights
• The contents of this operation manual and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by
Yamaha Corporation.
• Yamaha, Disklavier, DisklavierRadio, Silent, PianoSoft, PianoSoft·Plus, and PianoSoft·PlusAudio are
trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• SmartKey, CueTIME, and You Are The Artist are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation or Yamaha
Corporation of America.
• Disklavier E3 software, Copyright © 2008 Yamaha Corporation.
• This contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License, GNU Lesser General Public
License, the BSD Copyright, the Artistic License, and the others.
• This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this operation manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Welcome to the Yamaha Disklavier
TM
!
ii
Read the following before operating the Disklavier.
■ Warnings
• Do not locate the Disklavier in a place subject to
excessive heat, low temperatures, or direct
sunlight. This could be a fire hazard and may
damage the finish and internal parts.
• Excessive humidity or dust can lead to fire or
electric shock.
• Connect the plug on the Disklavier power cable
to a compatible AC outlet. Failure to do so will
present a fire and electric shock hazard. If the
power cable plug is not compatible with your AC
outlet, consult your dealer.
• Do not plug several devices into the same AC
outlet. This can overload the AC outlet, and lead
to fire and electric shock hazard. It may also
affect the performance of some devices.
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cable.
A damaged power cable is a potential fire and
electric shock hazard. If the power cable runs
under a carpet, make sure heavy objects,
including the Disklavier, are not placed on top of
the cable.
• If the power cable is damaged (i.e. cut or a bare
wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the Disklavier in this
condition is a fire and shock hazard.
• When disconnecting the power cable from an
AC outlet, always pull from the plug. Never pull
the cable. Damaging the cable in this way is a
potential fire and electric shock hazard.
• The cover of the unit should be removed only by
qualified service technicians.
• Do not place liquid containers such as vases,
potted plants, glasses, cosmetic bottles,
medicines, etc., on top of the Disklavier.
• Do not try to modify the Disklavier, as this could
lead to fire or electric shock hazard.
• When moving the Disklavier to another location,
turn off the power, remove the power plug from
the AC outlet, and remove all cables connected
to external devices.
■ Cautions
• Turn off all audio devices when connecting to
the Disklavier. Refer to the user’s guide for each
device. Use the correct cables and connect as
specified.
• Set the volume level on all the devices to
minimum before applying power.
• Do not play the Disklavier at a high volume for
extended periods; you may damage your
hearing. This is especially important when using
headphones. If you think your hearing ability is
impaired, consult your doctor.
• If the Disklavier is worked extremely hard —that
is, prolonged playback of very “busy” songs —
the Disklavier’s thermal relay may trip. The
thermal relay will automatically reset when the
Disklavier has cooled down.
• If you notice any abnormality — such as smoke,
odor, or noise — turn off the Disklavier
immediately, and remove the power plug from
the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair.
• If a foreign object or water gets inside the
Disklavier turn it off immediately, and remove
the power plug from the AC outlet. Consult your
dealer.
• If you plan not to use the Disklavier for a long
period of time (such as when you are on
vacation), disconnect the electrical mains.
• Always remove the power plug from the AC
outlet before cleaning the Disklavier. Leaving the
power plug connected presents a risk of electric
shock.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning
detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the
Disklavier.
• Do not place metal objects with rubber feet on
top of the Disklavier. The color and finish of the
Disklavier can be damaged.
• Do not place heavy objects on the Disklavier.
Doing so can damage the Disklavier.
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the Disklavier.
However, if you discover a stain, carefully use a
soft damp cloth to remove it.
Important Precautions
English
iii
■ Interference
• The Disklavier uses high-frequency digital
circuits that may cause interference to radios
and TVs placed close to it. If interference does
occur, relocate the affected equipment.
■ Handling Batteries
The remote control of this unit is powered by dry
batteries. Improper use or misuse of the dry
batteries can cause the dry batteries to heat up,
leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
a fire, damage to equipment and/or nearby objects
or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. Read
through and familiarize yourself with the following
safety precautions prior to use to ensure correct
usage.
• Do not directly touch the chemicals (electrolyte)
which have leaked from dry batteries.
1. If electrolyte from dry batteries has made
contact with your eyes, rinse your eyes
thoroughly with clean water and seek medical
treatment from a physician immediately.
2. If electrolyte from dry batteries has touched
your skin or clothing, rinse it off immediately
with clean water.
3. If electrolyte from dry batteries has found its
way inside your mouth, gargle immediately
and consult a physician.
• Do not install the dry batteries with the “+” and
“–” poles reversed. Misaligning the poles of dry
batteries can lead the dry batteries to be
charged or shorted or it can cause them to heat
up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may
result in a fire, damage to nearby objects or in
burns, injury or other bodily harm.
• Use only the designated batteries. Do not use
used batteries with unused batteries or different
types of batteries together. This can cause them
to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn
may result in a fire or in burns, injury or other
bodily harm. Replace all the dry batteries at the
same time. Do not use new and old dry batteries
together. Do not use different types of batteries
(alkaline and manganese batteries, batteries
made by different manufacturers or different
battery products made by the same
manufacturer) together: this can cause them to
heat up, ignite or leak electrolyte.
• When the battery-powered unit is not going to be
used for a prolonged period of time, remove the
dry batteries from the unit. Otherwise the
batteries will run down and their electrolyte may
leak, resulting in damage to the unit.
• Remove spent batteries immediately from
equipment. Otherwise, batteries will
overdischarge, causing them to heat up, leak
electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or
other bodily harm.
• Dispose of batteries in accordance with the
applicable regulations and ordinances.
• The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Features .................................................................1
Items Supplied with the Disklavier .........................1
Names of Parts and Their Functions......................2
Basic Disklavier Terminology .................................8
Chapter 2 Getting Started
Connecting the Control Unit...................................9
Connecting the AC Power Cable ...........................9
Using the Remote Control....................................10
Turning On the Disklavier.....................................11
Setting the Internal Calendar ...............................12
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode) ..........15
Shutting Down the Disklavier ...............................15
Compatible Media Format for the Removable
Media ...................................................................15
Compatible File Format........................................16
Basic Precautions for Using CDs .........................16
Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback
Types of Playable Software .................................17
Selecting Medium and Their Contents.................18
Using the Number Keypad...................................20
Starting Playback .................................................20
Stopping Playback ...............................................22
Pausing Playback.................................................22
Fast Preview & Review ........................................23
Fast Forward & Reverse ......................................24
Searching a Specific Section of a Song ...............25
Listening to the DisklavierRadio™ .......................26
Adjusting the Volume ...........................................27
Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback
Changing the Playback Tempo ............................28
Playing Back Songs in a Different Key
(Transposition) .....................................................28
Repeating Song Playback....................................29
Repeating a Specific Section of a Song
(A-B Repeat) ........................................................30
Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part...........31
Adjusting the Volume Balance among the
Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback ...............................................32
Adjusting the Pitch of Audio .................................34
Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio......................35
Using the Timer Play ........................................... 36
Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a
Song .................................................................... 39
Video Synchronized Playback............................. 40
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial
CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)................... 41
SmartKey™ Playback ......................................... 41
Chapter 5 Advanced Piano Playing
Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal
Metronome .......................................................... 43
Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice... 44
Chapter 6 The Silent Piano™ Function
What is the Silent Piano™ Function?.................. 46
Quiet Mode and Headphone Mode ..................... 46
Playing the Digital Piano (Quiet Mode) ............... 47
Using the Headphones (Headphone Mode)........ 48
Adjusting the Volume in the Quiet Mode ............. 49
Adjusting the Volume in the Headphone Mode... 49
Selecting the Voice in the Quiet/Headphone
Mode ................................................................... 50
Applying the Reverb Effect to the Digital
Piano ................................................................... 51
Inactivating the Key Movement during
Playback.............................................................. 52
Chapter 7 Basic Recording
Recording a New Song ....................................... 53
Titling a Song at the Start of Recording .............. 54
Chapter 8 Advanced Recording
Recording with the Internal Metronome .............. 56
Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately ... 58
Recording the Left and Right Parts Together
(Setting a Split Point)........................................... 60
Re-Recording One Part....................................... 62
Changing the Default Tempo .............................. 63
Video Synchronized Recording ........................... 65
CD Synchronized Recording ............................... 69
Chapter 9 Media Management
Managing Albums................................................ 70
Making Copies of Albums.................................... 70
Deleting Albums .................................................. 72
English
v
Creating a New Album .........................................73
Renaming an Album ............................................74
Rearranging the Order of Albums ........................75
Managing Songs ..................................................76
Making Copies of Songs ......................................77
Deleting Songs.....................................................78
Renaming a Song ................................................79
Rearranging the Order of Songs..........................80
Converting Song Format......................................81
Changing the Counter Display .............................82
Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form
(Strip XP) .............................................................83
Managing Playlists ...............................................84
Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist ...................85
Deleting a Playlist ................................................86
Creating a New Playlist........................................87
Renaming a Playlist .............................................88
Managing Media ..................................................89
Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a
Medium ................................................................90
Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium ...........91
Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to
the Disklavier .......................................................92
Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]..............96
Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional) .................97
Making Backups of Songs ...................................98
Restoring the Backups.........................................99
Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection
(IDC)
What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?.........101
Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration) ..............................................101
Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet ...........101
Accessing the Internet .......................................103
Checking Your Account Information ..................104
Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet.........105
Setting the Disklavier for the Internet
Connection.........................................................107
Initializing Internet Settings ................................108
Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by
Hooking Up Other Devices
Hooking Up Audio Equipment............................109
Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data
Reception/Transmission ....................................110
Hooking Up MIDI Devices ................................. 112
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data
Reception .......................................................... 113
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data
Transmission ..................................................... 115
Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing
Data Transmission ............................................ 116
Chapter 12 Other Settings
Tuning the Tone Generator
(TG Master Tune).............................................. 118
Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the
Number Keypad on the Remote Control ........... 119
Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized
Access............................................................... 122
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display............. 124
Switching the Languages for the Screen .......... 125
Resetting the Disklavier .................................... 126
Diagnosing the Disklavier
(Maintenance Mode) ......................................... 128
Updating the Disklavier ..................................... 129
Chapter 13 Internal Tone Generator
Voices
Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice
List..................................................................... 131
Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice
List..................................................................... 134
Chapter 14 Troubleshooting .................. 136
Chapter 15 Error Messages ................... 139
Chapter 16 Glossary................................. 140
Chapter 17 Specifications
General Specifications ...................................... 143
Function & Controls........................................... 144
Appendix Software License Notice....A-1
MIDI Data Format..............A-21
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
1
English
1
Chapter
Introduction
The Disklavier E3 offers the valuable features that open up your musical possibility to explore. Here are brief
explanations of such features:
Advanced Features for Your Listening Pleasure
• Special music CDs, contain over 17 hours of fantastic music, let you start listening on the day the
Disklavier E3 arrives at your home.
• DisklavierRadio™; you can listen to over 11 music channel by streaming broadcasts over the Internet.
• Yamaha’s innovative Silent Piano™ function lets you listen to songs or play the piano more quietly than
on the acoustic piano, or privately at any time*.
Convenient Recording Features to Preserve Your Musical Memories
• Total 128 megabytes of internal memory comes with the Disklavier E3 to preserve your valuable data.
• Connecting external USB devices to the Disklavier E3 allows you to record your performance directly onto
them, or even make backups of your valuable data in the internal memory.
• Video synchronization features offer great listening experience with sights. You can see as well as hear
performances with perfectly synchronized audio and video.
• Your valuable music data on the floppy disk can be played back with the optional floppy disk drive (UD-
FD01).
Simple and Easy-to-use Features Enhancing Your Performance
• The remote control, with clear and logical layout of buttons, lets you quickly enjoy the features of the
Disklavier E3.
• The display on the front panel employs an organic electro-luminescent display which makes it brighter
and more easily readable than ever.
* Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function.
Check that the following items are supplied with your Disklavier:
• 1 Control unit
• 1 Control unit suspension bracket*
1
• 4 Screws for control unit suspension bracket
installation (4 10)*
1
• 3 Screws for control unit suspension (5 12)*
1
• 4 Screws for optional USB floppy disk drive
installation (3 6)*
1
• 2 Monitor speakers*
2
• 1 Monitor speaker installation kit*
2
• 2 Speaker cords*
2
• 1 Remote control
• 2 Batteries for remote control
• 1 Stereo headphones*
3
• 2 Sample PianoSoft CD software
• 1 Operation manual
• 1 PianoSoft CD song list
• 1 Music book “50 greats for the Piano”
*
1
Only for grand pianos
*
2
Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers
*
3
Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function
Features
Items Supplied with the Disklavier
Introduction
1
Chapter
2
[ON/OFF] button
Turns on or shuts down the Disklavier. Press once
to turn it on, and once again to shut it down.
USB port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, etc.
Remote control sensor
When using the remote control, point it toward this
sensor.
CD drive
Insert a PianoSoft·PlusAudio or other audio or
audio/MIDI CD here.
CD eject button
Used to open the CD drive.
[PLAY/PAUSE] button
(
pages 20 and 22)
Used to start and pause playback.
[STOP] button (
page 22)
Used to stop playback and recording.
[RECORD] button (
page 53)
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.
Cursor/[ENTER] buttons
Cursor: Used to select options and parameters.
[ENTER]: Used to execute the selection.
Display
Shows various information.
Dial
Used to adjust the volume, and to set parameter
values.
Names of Parts and Their Functions
■ Control Unit — Front Panel
12 63
45
78 910 11 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Press this button inclining
slightly upward/downward/left/
right.
Press straight the center of
this button.
11
12
Introduction
English
1
Chapter
3
USB TO DEVICE port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, an optional
USB floppy disk drive, etc.
LAN port
Used to connect to the Internet.
OUTPUT jacks
Used to connect the speaker cord from the monitor
speakers.*
ANALOG MIDI IN jacks
Used to connect the audio equipment such as an
external CD changer.
OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks
Used to connect the microphone/line input of a
camcorder.
OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks
Used to connect the audio output of a camcorder.
TO PIANO connectors
Used to connect the piano.
DC-IN 12V connector
Used to connect to the power supply unit.
USB TO HOST port
Used to connect the USB cable from a computer.
MIDI OUT terminal
Used to connect external MIDI equipment for
outputting MIDI data.
MIDI IN terminal
Used to connect external MIDI equipment for
inputting MIDI data.
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
■ Control Unit — Rear Panel
789 1011
12 4356
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Introduction
1
Chapter
4
[ON/STANDBY] button
Turns on the Disklavier or puts it in the standby
mode.
Number keypad
Used for direct album/song selection and to enter a
start time for song playback.
[SYSTEM] button
Used to access the system menu.
[VOICE] button (
page 44)
Used to access the voice function.
[RECORD] button (
page 53)
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.
[PLAY] button (
page 20)
Used to start playback.
[REVERSE]/[FORWARD] buttons
In the play mode: used to fast preview and review.
In the pause mode: used to fast forward and
reverse.
Cursor buttons
Used to select options and parameters.
■ Remote Control
1 13
14
18
19
21
22
23
25
26
27
15
16
20
24
17
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Introduction
English
1
Chapter
5
[BACK] button
Used to cancel the selection, and return to the
previous screen.
[VOLUME] buttons (
page 27)
Used to adjust the volume.
[–] lowers the volume, [+] raises the volume.
[TEMPO] buttons
Used to change the playback tempo.
[–] decreases the tempo, [+] increases the tempo,
and [0] resets the tempo to 00.
[TRANSPOSE] buttons
Used to transpose song playback.
[–] transposes down, [+] transposes up, and [0]
resets the transposition value to 00.
[INTERNET] button
Used to access the Internet menu.
[SEARCH] button
Used to access the search function.
[SETUP] button
Used to access the setup menu.
[METRONOME] button
Used to access the metronome function.
[REPEAT] button
Used to select one of the repeat modes: ALL, RPT,
RND, or OFF.
[A-B] button
Used to enter A and B points for the A-B repeat
mode.
[PART SELECT] buttons
For L/R and ensemble songs, these buttons are
used to choose which part will play: left-hand part,
right-hand part, or both parts.
They are also used to select a part for recording.
[PAUSE] button (
page 22)
Used to pause playback.
[STOP] button (
page 22)
Used to stop playback and recording.
[ENTER] button
Used to execute the selection.
[FUNC.] button
Used to access the function menu.
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.
[+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons
Used to select parameters, adjust setting values,
and execute or cancel the selected functions.
[BALANCE] button
Used to adjust the TG, audio and voice balance.
Color buttons
Green: Used to execute the shortcut assigned to
the number keypad.
Yellow: Used to switch character types when titling
albums and songs.
Red: Used to switch the Disklavier to the
acoustic mode*.
Blue: Used to switch the Disklavier to the quiet
mode*.
* Only for grand pianos equipped with the Silent Piano™
function.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Introduction
1
Chapter
6
LOW/HIGH volume controls
Adjust the base/treble sound volume.
Power indicator
Lights up while the speaker is turned on.
LINE1/2 volume controls
Adjust the sound volume for each line input.
Note: For normal use, turn down the LINE2 volume completely,
and turn up the LINE1 volume at the three o’clock
position.
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
■ Monitor Speaker*
LOW HIGH LINE
1 2
132
1
2
3
Introduction
English
1
Chapter
7
[VOLUME] knob / [QUIET] switch
Used to adjust the volume of the headphones while
in the headphone mode. Pushing this switch
activates the quiet mode.
[QUIET] indicator
Lights up while the quiet mode is activated.
PHONES jacks
Used to connect the headphones. You can use two
headphones simultaneously.
[REVERB] knob
Used to adjust the amount of reverb.
[REVERB] knob
Used to adjust the amount of reverb.
PHONES jacks
Used to connect the headphones. You can use two
headphones simultaneously.
[VOLUME] knob
Used to adjust the volume of the headphones while
in the headphone mode.
* Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function
■ Silent Piano™ Control Box*
(Grand piano)
12 3 4
1
2
3
4
(Upright piano)
123
1
2
3
Introduction
1
Chapter
8
The following is a list of several basic Disklavier
words that you may need to know before
proceeding with operational procedures in this
manual. For additional Disklavier terminology, see
the glossary provided in Chapter 16.
Ensemble Song
An ensemble song contains the same left- and
right-hand parts as an L/R song, and extra tracks
that are played by the internal XG tone generator.
Accompanying tracks can include acoustic bass,
drums, strings, vibes, etc.
Internal Flash Memory
The Disklavier has a total of 128 megabytes of
internal flash memory that allow you to store song
data without a floppy disk.
L/R Song
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and practice that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.
MIDI
An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.
PianoSoft
The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a
library of prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
for use with the Disklavier series. Many titles are
available, and among the many musical styles
included are classical, jazz, and popular. The disk
includes songs for listening enjoyment, piano study
disks for the piano student, and accompaniment
disks for vocal and instrumental practice. PianoSoft
is sometimes used as a generic term for PianoSoft
and PianoSoft·Plus.
PianoSoft·Plus
PianoSoft·Plus software contains
prerecorded ensemble songs featuring
instrumental accompaniment that can be played
back on the Disklavier. See your Disklavier dealer
for a PianoSoft catalog.
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
CD software made by Yamaha
containing audio and MIDI
signals for playing back on the Disklavier.
SmartPianoSoft
Software made by Yamaha
containing MIDI signals for
playing back along with standard audio CDs.
Song
A “song” usually means a short piece of music with
lyrics. However, in the Disklavier manuals the term
“song” is used to refer to any piece of music.
Tone Generator
An electronic device that generates instrument
voices. The Disklavier has an internal XG tone
generator that can produce nearly 700 instrumental
and percussion voices.
Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.
XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM
(General MIDI) format. With greater polyphony,
more voice, and effects, it improves song
compatibility between MIDI devices. When a song
in the Yamaha XG format is played on another XG
compatible tone generator or synthesizer, it will
play and sound as the original composer/creator
intended.
Basic Disklavier Terminology
9
English
2
Chapter
Getting Started
Note:
The cables should be connected to
the control unit when the Disklavier
is installed. If, however, it is not,
carefully connect them to the
appropriate connectors or jacks on
the rear panel of the control unit.
Make sure that the cables extending from the piano is connected to the
appropriate connectors or jacks on the rear panel of the control unit.
Note:
For grand piano models, be sure to
mount the control unit to the
underside of the bass side key bed.
*1
Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
*2
Only for models equipped with
the Silent Piano™ function.
Connect the power cord extending from the power supply unit
of the piano to the DC-IN 12V connector of the control unit.
Important:
Make sure that the voltage of the AC
wall outlet matches that marked on
the Disklavier’s Serial No. plate.
Connect the AC power cable extending from the piano to
the AC wall outlet.
Connecting the Control Unit
*2
*1
Connecting the AC Power Cable
1
2
Getting Started
2
Chapter
10
The Disklavier is equipped with a remote control which allows convenient
control from almost anywhere in the room. This chapter provides notes on
handling the remote control.
■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Before the remote control can be used, the two batteries supplied with the
Disklavier must be installed.
Remove the battery cover from the rear of the remote control, install the
batteries, and then replace the cover.
A diagram inside the battery compartment shows which way the batteries
should be installed. Make sure you insert them correctly.
■ Battery Replacement
Important:
Be sure to read the section on
“Handling Batteries” on page iii for
details on the safe handling of dry
batteries.
When the remote control fails to work from a distance, replace the
batteries.
• Replacement batteries should be UM-3, AA, R6P, or LR6 type.
• Do not use new and old dry batteries together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (alkaline and manganese
batteries, batteries made by different manufacturers or different battery
products made by the same manufacturer) together.
• Remove spent batteries immediately from the remote control.
Otherwise, batteries will overdischarge, causing them to leak electrolyte
or burst which in turn may result in damage to nearby objects or in
burns, injury or other bodily harm.
• Dispose of batteries in accordance with the applicable regulations and
ordinances.
• If the remote control is not to be used for a prolonged period of time,
remove the batteries to prevent possible damage by battery leakage.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked electrolyte or letting it come into contact with skin or
clothing. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
Using the Remote Control
Getting Started
English
2
Chapter
11
■ Using the Remote Control
To use the remote control, point it at the remote control sensor on the
control unit.
Make sure that the main switch on the power supply unit is
turned on.
Approx. 5 m
30°
30°
30°30°
30°30°
30°
30°
Turning On the Disklavier
1
ON OFF
MAINS
Power supply unit
(located on the bottom)
(Grand piano)
Power supply unit
(located on the rear)
(Upright piano)
Getting Started
2
Chapter
12
Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit.
See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby
Mode)” on page 15.
While the control unit is in the standby mode, you can also turn on
the Disklavier by pressing [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control.
The following message appears on the display, and [ON/OFF] on
the control unit lights green.
After several seconds, the loading screen will appear, and last
selected song will be loaded.
Your Disklavier is now ready for use.
Setting the correct time is also
important for engaging timer-
controlled programs. See Chapter 4
“Advanced Song Playback – Using
the Timer Play” on page 36.
The Disklavier has an internal calendar that can be set from 1/1/1985
00:00:00 to 12/31/2084 23:59:59. Set the calendar accurately so that the
Disklavier displays the correct current time during the stop mode.
Time is displayed in 24-hour format.
■ Time Zone
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
2
PLEASE WAIT
Setting the Internal Calendar
[SYSTEM] “TimeZone” and “Clock Adj.”
1
Getting Started
English
2
Chapter
13
Select “TimeZone” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The time zone setup screen appears.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the time zone.
Note:
The time zone listed here should be
used only as a guide. For more
details, contact your local
observatories.
Examples of Time Zone
The chart below shows the correspondence between the time zone
setting on the Disklavier and actual time zone used in each area.
Press [ENTER].
The time zone is set, and the display returns to the system menu.
Proceed to the calendar setting.
2
3
Setting Actual Time Zone
GMT-6 Mexico (Mexico City)
GMT-5 Panama, Peru
GMT-4 Chile
GMT-3 Argentina, Brazil (Rio de Janeiro)
GMT+0 U.K.
GMT+1 Central Europe (Paris, Berlin)
GMT+2 Eastern Europe (Athens)
GMT+3 Russia (Moscow)
GMT+4 U.A.E.
GMT+7 Indonesia (Jakarta), Thailand (Bangkok)
GMT+8 China (Beijing, Shanghai, Hong Kong), Singapore
GMT+9 South Korea (Seoul)
GMT+10 Australia (Canberra, Sydney)
4
Getting Started
2
Chapter
14
■ Calendar
Select “Clock Adj.” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The current date and time appear.
Press [ENTER].
The time setup screen appears with the cursor flashing on the
hours display.
Select year, month, date, hours, minutes, and seconds
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and
[–/NO] to set a value.
Press [ENTER].
The date and time are stored in the internal calendar, and the
display returns to the current time screen.
Press [BACK] on the remote control.
The display returns to the system menu screen.
1
2
3
4
5
Getting Started
English
2
Chapter
15
Note:
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the
remote control to turn the Disklavier
back on.
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit lights
red.
Note:
Be sure to wait 5 seconds before
turning the Disklavier back on.
Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit turns
off.
Note:
If the external medium contains a
number of albums or songs, it may
take some time for the Disklavier to
recognize them.
Compact Disc
The Disklavier can play songs on commercial audio CDs and data CDs
(such as PianoSoft·PlusAudio).
• The audio CDs should be formatted in CD-DA.
Note:
Do not insert or remove the USB
media while reading or writing data.
Make sure that reading or writing
has finished before doing so.
• The data CDs should be formatted in ISO 9660 Level 1.
USB Flash Memory
You can use commercially available USB flash memories to store song
data. The USB flash memory should be formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 file
system.
USB Hard Disk
You can use commercially available USB hard disk drives to store song
data or make a backup of song data. The USB hard disk drive should be
formatted in FAT32 file system.
Floppy Disk (Optional)
With the optional USB floppy disk drive, you can use 3.5” 2DD or 2HD
floppy disks to store song data. The floppy disk should be formatted in MS-
DOS.
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode)
See you again
Shutting Down the Disklavier
See you again
Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media
Getting Started
2
Chapter
16
The Disklavier can handle these three types of file format:
SMF0
Standard MIDI File format 0 for playback and recording. The name of the
file should have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”
SMF1
Standard MIDI File format 1 for playback only. The name of the file should
have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”
E-SEQ
Format developed by Yamaha, for playback only. The name of the file
should have an extension as “.FIL” or “.fil.”
■ Handling CDs
In order to protect data stored on compact discs from damage or loss,
handle them with care, and observe the following precautions.
• Do not touch the surface of a CD.
• Do not expose CDs to extreme temperatures or humidity. The working
temperature range is between 4°C and 52°C (40°F and 125°F).
• Wipe CDs with a clean, dry cloth before playback.
• Remove the CD from the CD drive before turning off the Disklavier.
■ Loading a CD
Press the CD eject button on the control unit to open the
CD tray.
Place a CD on the tray, and then close the tray.
Compatible File Format
Basic Precautions for Using CDs
1
CD eject button
CD
2
17
English
3
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus
When piano songs such as those contained in
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus software are played back
on the Disklavier, the piano parts are actually played by the Disklavier
keyboard, and the keys move up and down as though they were being
played by an invisible performer. The ensemble parts (contained in
PianoSoft·Plus software) are played by the internal tone generator and are
heard from the monitor speakers*.
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
PianoSoft·PlusAudio songs are recorded using two
channels, an analog MIDI channel for the piano parts
and an audio channel for instrumentals and vocals. When they are played
back on the Disklavier, the piano parts area played by the Disklavier
keyboard as with PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs, and all other
instrumental and vocal parts are heard from the monitor speakers* just like
a normal stereo system.
SmartPianoSoft
SmartPianoSoft contains a recorded piano
accompaniment to the commercial CDs, and the acoustic
accompaniment will play back matching with the commercial CD. You can
also record your own accompaniment for your favorite commercial CDs at
home; play your Disklavier as you listen to a CD, and SmartPianoSoft will
match the music together during playback, essentially adding you to
famous performances.
Standard Audio CDs
Standard audio CDs contain two audio channels (L and R), and are both
heard from the monitor speakers* just like a normal stereo system. In other
words, the Disklavier can be used to play CDs in place of a stereo system.
Types of Playable Software
Basic Song Playback
3
Chapter
18
Insert a desired medium.
Press [SELECT].
The media selection screen appears with the current selected
medium highlighted.
Select a desired medium with the cursor buttons ([ ]
[ ]).
The following media are available:
See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the
DisklavierRadio™” on page 26.
See Chapter 9 “Media Management
– Copying Song File from a
Personal Computer to the
Disklavier” on page 92.
Selecting Medium and Their Contents
[SELECT]
1
CD eject button
CD
USB flash memory
USB port
2
Control unit Remote control
or
Memory CD
=MEDIA SELECT=
3
Medium Description
Memory
Internal flash memory
CD
Audio CD or data CD
USB1,
USB2
USB flash memory or USB HDD (USB1 indicates the
first inserted one, and USB2 indicates the second.)
Playlist
Playlist in the internal flash memory
D-Radio
DisklavierRadio™
FromToPC
Network folder in the internal flash memory
Basic Song Playback
English
3
Chapter
19
Press [ENTER] or [ ].
The album selection screen appears.
Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable albums in a medium is 99.
Select a desired album with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]).
Note:
You can also select albums directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 20.
To return to the media selection screen, press [ ].
Press [ENTER] or [ ].
The song selection screen appears.
Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable songs in an album is 999.
Select a desired song with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]).
Note:
You can also select songs directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 20.
To return to the album selection screen, press [ ].
Press [ENTER].
The selected song is loaded.
4
or
01:50 Greats for t
=ALBUM SELECT=
5
01:50 Greats for t
=ALBUM SELECT=
?=]
Album number Album title
6
or
001:Invention 1
=SONG SELECT=
7
001:Invention 1
=SONG SELECT=
Song number Song title
?=]
8
Basic Song Playback
3
Chapter
20
You can also select albums or songs directly with the number keypad on
the remote control.
Note:
If you enter a number higher than
the existed, the last album or song
appears.
Press the corresponding number button, then press
[ENTER].
For example, to select album number 5, first press [0], then [5],
then [ENTER].
To select song number 36, first press [0], then [3], then [6], then
[ENTER].
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the
remote control.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit lights green, and the numerical
value of the counter advances.
At the end of the song, the Disklavier selects the next song
automatically and continues playback.
After playback the last song in the album, playback stops.
Using the Number Keypad
Album or song selection screen Number button
05:
=ALBUM SELECT=
0-9/ENT
Starting Playback
[PLAY]
Control unit Remote control
or
Piano Sonate
=Memory=
<00:01>
LR SO V+00
A02-001
Basic Song Playback
English
3
Chapter
21
■ Song Playback Screen
Here are a few things that you will often see during playback.
Media
The selected medium is displayed here.
Album/Song Number
The number of the selected album and song is
displayed here.
Counter
Playing time is indicated in one of two formats.
Song Type
The type of the selected songs is displayed here.
Song Format
The format of the selected song is displayed here.
Volume
The current volume setting is displayed here.
Song Title
The title of the selected song is displayed here. If
the title is long, it scrolls across the display.
7
2
3
1 4 5 6
Display Description
Axx-yyy
xx: album number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)
Pxx-yyy
xx: playlist number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)
Display Description
xx:yy
Minutes (xx) and seconds (yy)
xxx-y
Measures (xxx) and beats (y)
Display Description
LR
PianoSoft
XP
PianoSoft recorded on the PRO model
PS
SmartPianoSoft
SK
SmartKey
YM
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
AU
Stereo audio
1
2
3
4
Display Description
S0
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0
S1
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1
ES
E-SEQ format
5
6
7
Basic Song Playback
3
Chapter
22
Press [STOP].
Playback stops, and the song returns to the beginning.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit turns off, and the counter is reset
to “00:00” or “001-1.”
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, or [PAUSE] on
the remote control.
Playback pauses.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes, and the counter stops
counting.
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the
remote control to continue playback.
Stopping Playback
During playback [STOP]
Control unit Remote control
or
Pausing Playback
[PAUSE]During playback
1
Control unit Remote control
or
2
Control unit Remote control
or
Basic Song Playback
English
3
Chapter
23
Note:
No sound is produced by the piano
when fast-previewing or reviewing
PianoSoft·PlusAudio CDs.
During playback, fast preview and review allow you to quickly search
through a song while listening to the sound. This is useful for locating a
desired position within a song.
■ Fast Preview
To preview, hold [ ] on the control unit or press
[FORWARD] on the remote control.
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is previewed all the way to the end, it will be paused at the
end of the song.
■ Fast Review
To review, hold [ ] on the control unit or press
[REVERSE] on the remote control.
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is reviewed all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.
Fast Preview & Review
[FORWARD] or [REVERSE]During playback
1
Control unit Remote control
or
2
1
Control unit Remote control
or
2
Basic Song Playback
3
Chapter
24
In the stop or pause mode, fast forward and reverse allow you to quickly
locate a desired position in a song.
Reverse can also be used to return a song to the beginning, ready to play
again.
■ Fast Forward
In the stop or pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or
press [FORWARD] on the remote control.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you fast forward a song all the way to the end, it will be paused at
the end of the song.
■ Fast Reverse
In the pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or press
[REVERSE] on the remote control.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you reverse a song all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.
Fast Forward & Reverse
Stop or pause mode [FORWARD] or [REVERSE]
1
Control unit Remote control
or
<00:15> FORWARD
=Memory=
LR SO V+00
2
1
Control unit Remote control
or
<02:22> REWIND
=Memory=
LR SO V+00
2
Basic Song Playback
English
3
Chapter
25
Playback can be started from a specified point in a song. Instead of using
fast forward or preview, you can use this function to go directly to a desired
point within a song.
If the current song uses the minutes and seconds time format, you specify
the point in minutes and seconds. If it uses the measures and beats time
format, you specify the point in measures and beats.
Press [SEARCH] on the remote control.
The song search screen appears with the counter flashing.
The song will be paused at the exact point as you press [SEARCH].
Note:
If you enter a value higher than the
entire song time, the search goes to
the end of the song.
Enter the time that you want to search for with the number
keypad.
For example, to search for 2:56 (minutes and seconds), first press
[0], then [2], [5], and [6].
For example, to search for 52-3 (measures and beats), first press
[0], then [5], [2], and [3].
Press [SEARCH] again.
The position of the song goes to the specified point.
Searching a Specific Section of a Song
During playback or stop/pause mode [SEARCH]
1
Flashes
2
3
Basic Song Playback
3
Chapter
26
To enjoy the DisklavierRadio™,
first you need to connect to the
Internet. See Chapter 10 “Internet
Direct Connection (IDC) –
Connecting the Disklavier to the
Internet” on page 101.
You can listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels of
music contents.
Select “D-Radio” in the media selection screen.
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
The channel selection screen appears.
Press [ ] or [ ] or [+/YES] or [–/NO] to select a channel.
Press [ENTER] or [ ] to begin the broadcast of the
selected channel.
The DisklavierRadio™ screen appears.
Press [ ] twice to stop the broadcast and return to the
media selection screen.
Listening to the DisklavierRadio™
Media selection screen “D-Radio”
1
01:Complimentary C
=RADIO SELECT=
2
or
02:Classical and S
=RADIO SELECT=
3
or
My Funny Val
=D-Radio=
Jazz
V+00
CH-08:
Channel Title
Volume
Medium
Channel
Number
Song Title
4
×2
Basic Song Playback
English
3
Chapter
27
■ Muting the Sound
Note:
Streaming broadcasts continue
during muting. Therefore, the song
broadcasted when releasing muting
may differ from the one when
muting.
Press [PAUSE] or [STOP].
“MUTE” appears on the upper right of the screen.
Press [PAUSE] or [STOP] again to release muting.
Note:
This setting does not affect manual
playing.
You can adjust volume with the control unit or with the remote control as
described below. Since all piano songs are recorded at the maximum
volume level of 0, volume can be decreased down to –10, the softest
volume at which the piano can play.
See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 32.
For ensemble songs, the volume of the piano and internal XG tone
generator are adjusted simultaneously, so it is a good idea to first balance
the volume of the piano and XG tone generator.
For songs on PianoSoft·PlusAudio, you should first balance the volume of
the MIDI piano and audio parts.
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control.
The main volume setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume.
Note:
When the volume is set to –10, there
may be a slight delay in sound
production following key strokes,
and the Disklavier may skip some
notes. Furthermore, at this volume
setting, touch strength does not
affect note dynamics.
Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0.
1
or
My Funny Val
=D-Radio=
Jazz
MUTE
CH-08:
2
or
Adjusting the Volume
[VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –]
1
MAIN VOLUME -01
=BALANCE=
VOLUME-/+
2
28
4
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
Note:
You cannot change the playback
tempo of songs on audio CDs.
You can speed up or slow down the playback tempo. Slowing down the
playback tempo can be useful when practicing a difficult piano part.
Tempo changes to songs that you
have recorded yourself can be made
permanent. See Chapter 8
“Advanced Recording – Changing
the Default Tempo” on page 63.
These tempo settings remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off.
Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] on the remote control.
The tempo setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the tempo.
Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] to adjust the tempo.
Playback tempo can be adjusted from –50% to +50% in 1%
increments.
Press [TEMPO 0] to set to the original tempo.
Note:
This function cannot be used to
transpose songs from external
devices connected to the OMNI IN
jacks, or on audio CDs.
Playback can be transposed up or down by up to two octaves. This is
useful, for example, when you want to sing along (karaoke) in a different
key from the original recording.
Transposition changes remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off.
Changing the Playback Tempo
[TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +]
1
TEMPO +01%
=Memory=
TEMPO-/0/+
2
Playing Back Songs in a Different Key (Transposition)
[TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +]
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
29
Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] on the remote
control.
The transposition setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the key.
Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] to change the
key.
Playback can be transposed in half-step increments up or down
two octaves (–24 key to +24 key).
Press [TRANSPOSE 0] to set to the original key.
There are three repeat modes (ALL, RPT, RND) as described below. You
can use these functions for entertainment or study purpose.
Repeat mode settings remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is tuned off.
Press [REPEAT] on the remote control.
The repeat setting screen appears.
Press [REPEAT] to select repeat modes.
The following options are available:
1
TRANS +01key
=Memory=
TRANS-/0/+
2
Repeating Song Playback
[REPEAT]
Option Description
ALL
Repeats all songs on the selected album.
RPT
Repeats selected song.
RND
Shuffles the order of songs on the selected album and
repeats the cycle.
OFF
Plays back songs normally.
1
REPEAT ALL
=Memory=
REPEAT
2
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
30
Press [PLAY] to start repeat playback.
To cancel the repeat mode, press [REPEAT] until “OFF”
appears on the screen.
In the A-B repeat, playback is repeated between two specified points in a
song: point A and point B. This function is useful when practicing or
memorizing a difficult section of a song.
Once specified, points A and B are saved until another song is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
To set point A, play back a song and press [A-B] on the
remote control when the desired point is reached.
Point A is set.
The A-B repeat setting screen appears with the “B” flashing.
Note:
You cannot set point B that is
beyond the selected song.
To set point B, press [A-B] again.
Point B is set.
Playback starts from point A, continues up to point B and, returns to
point A and playback starts repeatedly.
3
4
Repeating a Specific Section of a Song (A-B Repeat)
During playback [A-B]
1
Flashes
2
<02:22> A-B
=Memory=
A-B
Point B
SONG 1 SONG 2 SONG 3
Point A
Start
Cycle
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
31
Note:
The A-B repeat is cancelled if you
escape from the A-B repeat setting
screen by other operations.
To cancel the A-B repeat, press [A-B] so that “OFF”
flashes on the screen.
Pressing [BACK] also cancels the point setting, and returns to the
song playback screen.
This could be useful, for example, when listening carefully to one part, and
also when you practice only the left- or right-hand part while the Disklavier
plays the other.
■ Cancelling the Piano Part
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
Select the desired song.
Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] on the
remote control to cancel a part.
The part cancellation screen appears with the corresponding part
canceled.
Note:
For the SmartKey song, “ON”,
“OFF” and “G” appear sequentially
each time you press [PART
SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R].
Notes of displays:
To replay the cancelled part, press [PART SELECT L] or
[PART SELECT R] again so that “ON” appears on the screen.
Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.
3
Flashes
Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part
[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]
1
2
L=ON R=OFF P=ON
=Piano Part=
L/R
Display Description
L Left hand part
R Right hand part
P Pedal part
ON Plays part
OFF Cancels part
G Plays part with guide (only for SmartKey song)
--- No plays on part
3
L=ON R=ON P=ON
=Piano Part=
L/R
4
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
32
■ Cancelling the Pedal Part
On the part cancellation screen, press [ ] to select “P=.”
Press [–/NO] to cancel a pedal part.
To replay the pedal part, press [+/YES] with the cursor is
on “P=.”
Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.
Note:
You cannot adjust the volume
balance during the
DisklavierRadio
™ playback.
Besides adjusting the overall volume, the volume balance among the
different sound sources as described below can be adjustable.
TG: Adjusts the volume of the ensemble sound reproduced by the
tone generator (TG) of the Disklavier.
Audio: Adjusts the volume of the accompaniment or standard audio
sound pre-recorded in the software (CDs).
See Chapter 5 “Advanced Piano
Playing – Playing the Disklavier
with an Ensemble Voice” on
page 44.
Voice: Adjusts the volume of the ensemble voice when you play using
the voice function.
1
L=ON R=OFF P=ON
=Piano Part=
L/R
2
L=ON R=OFF P=OFF
=Piano Part=
L/R
3
4
Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing,
Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback
[BALANCE]
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
33
■ Adjusting the TG Balance
Press [BALANCE] on the remote control.
The TG balance setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the tone
generator.
Tone generator volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.
■ Adjusting the Audio Balance
Press [BALANCE] twice on the remote control.
The audio balance setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the
audio.
Audio volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.
1
TG BALANCE 100
=BALANCE=
-/+
2
1
×2
AUDIO BALANCE 100
=BALANCE=
-/+
2
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
34
■ Adjusting the Voice Balance
Press [BALANCE] three times on the remote control.
The voice balance setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the voice.
Voice volume can be adjusted in a range of 0 to 127.
Note:
This function cannot be used to
adjust the pitch of external audio
CDs connected to the OMNI IN
jacks.
You can temporarily adjust the pitch of the song contains audio
(PianoSoft·PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft) or an audio CD for your listening
pleasure.
Pitch adjustments are effective until another medium or album is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
During the song playback, press [FUNC.] on the remote
control.
The audio pitch setting screen appears.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pitch.
Audio pitch can be adjusted in a range of –50 cent to +50 cent (one
semitone as 100 cents).
1
×3
VOICE BALANCE 100
=BALANCE=
-/+
2
Adjusting the Pitch of Audio
During playback [FUNC.]
1
AudioPitch=+00cent
=CD=
-+ENT
2
AudioPitch=+01cent
=CD=
-+ENT
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
35
You can temporarily adjust the L/R balance of an audio CD.
Balance adjustments are effective until another song is selected, recording
is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
During the song playback, press [FUNC.] several times.
The audio pan setting screen appears.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pan.
The following pan settings are available:
Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio
During playback [FUNC.]
Option Description
Left
Audio of the L channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.
Center
Audio of the L channel is output to the L channel, and the
R channel is output to the R channel.
Right
Audio of the R channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.
1
AudioPan=Center
=CD=
-+ENT
2
AudioPan=Left
=CD=
-+ENT
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
36
Note:
The internal calendar must be set in
advance in order for the timer play
to function. See Chapter 2 “Getting
Started – Setting the Internal
Calendar” on page 12.
You can program your Disklavier to start or stop playback of a song at
various specified times. All you need to do is register up to a maximum of
99 timer settings, and your Disklavier will perform them unattended. This
function is called “timer play.”
Note:
The control unit must be turned on
in advance in order for the timer
play to function. The timer play
cannot turn on/off the control unit.
The following describes how to play back the first album in the internal
flash memory at 8:15 AM.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “TimerPlay” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The timer play setting screen appears.
Confirm that the cursor is on the timer switch, then press
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to switch the timer play on and off.
Using the Timer Play
“TimerPlay”[SETUP]
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
>TimerPlay=OFF
01[### ##:## ---- ]
=TimerPlay=
-+
_?]
Program
number
Timer switch
FunctionTimeDay Album
selection
3
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## ---- ]
=TimerPlay=
-+
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
37
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the desired program number.
The cursor moves to the function parameter.
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the function
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired function.
The following functions are available:
When “PLAY” or “RND” is selected, the album selection parameter
appears.
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album selection
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired album.
Note:
You cannot select “Radio” if you
select “RND” in step 5.
The following selections are available:
Note:
When “Radio” is selected, the
Disklavier will connect to the
Internet one minute prior to the time
you have set, and the channel
selection screen appears.
DisklavierRadio™ will begin to
play at the designated time.
PLAY
Starts playback of songs.
STOP
Stops playback of songs.
RND
Starts playback of songs at random.
OFF
Turns off the Disklavier (standby mode).
4
5
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## PLAY -----]
=TimerPlay=
-+
6
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## PLAY Mem01]
=TimerPlay=
-+
Mem01 -
Mem99
Albums (01 - 99) in the internal flash memory.
Lst01 -
Lst99
Playlists (01 - 99) created in the internal flash memory.
Radio
The last DisklavierRadio™ channel you have listened to.
-----
Current selected song.
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
38
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the day parameter, then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired day.
The following day settings are available:
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the hour parameter, then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set hours.
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the minute parameter,
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set minutes.
Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen.
ALL
The timer play functions on every day of the week.
MON
The timer play functions only on Monday.
TUE
The timer play functions only on Tuesday.
WED
The timer play functions only on Wednesday.
THU
The timer play functions only on Thursday.
FRI
The timer play functions only on Friday.
SAT
The timer play functions only on Saturday.
SUN
The timer play functions only on Sunday.
M-F
The timer play functions on Monday thru Friday.
M-S
The timer play functions on Monday thru Saturday.
7
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F ##:## PLAY Mem01]
=TimerPlay=
-+
_?=]
8
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F 08:00 PLAY Mem01]
=TimerPlay=
-+
9
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F 08:15 PLAY Mem01]
=TimerPlay=
-+
10
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
39
■ About Song Playback Screen
When the song playback is stopped — with the timer play function is set to
ON and the current time is displayed — “T” flashes to the right side of the
current time.
When there is a blank part created at the beginning of the recorded song,
turning on this function automatically skips the unwanted part and starts
playback from the actual beginning of the song.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “Playback” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
Note:
The “Reverb” option appears only
on models equipped with the Silent
Piano™ function.
The playback setting screen appears with the cursor flashing.
Note:
The “KeyMotion” option appears
only on models equipped with the
Silent Piano™ function.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
Indicates that the timer play is on.
Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a Song
“Playback”[SETUP]
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*Network *Playback
*Shortcut
=SETUP MENU=
(2/3)
*Reverb
>SkipSpace=OFF
>KeyMotion=ON
=Playback=
-+
3
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
40
Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen.
For details on video synchronized
recording, see Chapter 8 “Advanced
Recording – Video Synchronized
Recording” on page 65.
You can enjoy piano playback with the video recorded on the DVD
recorder.
Perform the video synchronized recording in advance.
Note:
Be sure to rewind the video cassette
to locate the beginning of the
recording. It may take some time
before piano playback starts if you
start playback halfway through the
video.
Make sure that the OMNI IN setting is set to “AutoDetect”.
Turn down the volume completely on the TV if you
connect the audio output of the DVD recorder to the TV.
Note:
When using the song copied to the
USB flash memory, it may take
some time until the Disklavier
recognizes the information for
synchronization.
Turn down the volume completely on the camcorder if you use the
camcorder only.
See “Setting for Video
Synchronized Recording” on
page 65.
Start playback on the DVD recorder.
Start playback on the camcorder if you use the camcorder only.
Note:
When searching for songs for video
synchronized playback from a USB
flash memory, you can search from
a maximum of 150 songs per USB
flash memory. It is therefore
recommended that you copy songs
for video synchronized playback
onto the internal memory. When
saving onto a USB flash memory, it
is recommended that you do not
exceed a total of 150 saved songs
per memory.
The Disklavier automatically searches and selects the song paired
with the video, and then starts playback as well.
If the piano playing is not synchronized with the video
Adjust the offset time for synchronization. See Chapter 11 “Enhancing the
Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier for Audio
Data Reception/Transmission” on page 110.
Note:
You cannot operate the Disklavier
using the control unit or remote
control during video synchronized
playback. If you want to stop
playback of the song, stop playback
on the DVD recorder (or the
camcorder).
If noises (synchronized signal) are heard during playback
Turn down the signal level and re-record. See Chapter 11 “Enhancing the
Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier for Audio
Data Reception/Transmission” on page 110.
4
Video Synchronized Playback
1
2
3
4
Advanced Song Playback
English
4
Chapter
41
To record the piano performance to
add, see Chapter 8 “Advanced
Recording – CD Synchronized
Recording” on page 69.
You can add a Disklavier piano performance you recorded or on
commercially available SmartPianoSoft software to the playback of songs
on your favorite CDs.
Insert a desired CD that you want to synchronize with the
SmartPianoSoft song.
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
Select a desired SmartPianoSoft song.
Press [PLAY].
Playback begins with the CD playback.
To cancel the SmartKey playback,
see Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Playing Back Only the
Desired Piano Part” on page 31.
Special SmartKey software uses all the “SmartKey” features to create an
exciting way in which non-players can learn to play simple melodies, one
note at a time, without the need for written music. SmartKey software does
this by partially depressing the piano key to signal which note should be
played. The Disklavier then waits for you to press this key before it
continues to the next note in the melody (If you miss the movement of the
key, the Disklavier will repeat the movement until you press the key).
When you press the key, the Disklavier will reward you with ear tickling
phrases, incredible harmonies, and lush arpeggios to give you the aural
and visual image of a complete high-quality performance. In short, it
SHOWS you which key to play, WAITS for you to play that key before it
continues, and REWARDS you with music. It is like having an eternally
patient music teacher showing your fingers which notes to play.
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
Select a desired SmartKey song.
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs
(PianoSmart™ Playback)
Insert a CD [PLAY]Select a SmartPianoSoft song
1
2
3
SmartKey™ Playback
Select a SmartKey song [PLAY]
1
Advanced Song Playback
4
Chapter
42
Press [PLAY].
Playback stops, and the key to play next moves slightly.
The key to play flashes in the counter.
Play the key that the keyboard indicates.
This will continue until the song is finished. Notice that the
Disklavier patiently waits for you to play the right key before
proceeding to the next key. Also, notice that if you happen to miss
the cue, it will gently remind you what the key is every few seconds
until you play the right key.
■ Key Notation
As a reference, “C3” is middle “C”, which means “C4” is an octave above
middle “C” and so on.
2
Key moves slightly
Flashes
3
C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4
C
2D2F2G 2A 2C3D3F3G 3A 3C4
Middle C
43
English
5
Chapter
Advanced Piano Playing
Note:
The tempo parameter displayed on
the metronome setting screen
indicates the number of beats in a
minute, and one beat represents a
quarter. When you play a song
written in different measure unit
from quarter note, change the setting
(e.g.When playing a song in 3/2, set
beat to 6/4).
The internal metronome helps you playing along the meter (beat) and the
tempo you set. Also the volume of the metronome can be adjusted.
Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
The metronome setting screen appears and the metronome starts
to click.
To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo
parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.
To change the beat, move the cursor to the beat parameter
(“”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The following beat settings are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4,
7/4, 8/4, 9/4.
Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME]
1
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
=METRONOME=
-+
2
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
*
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
3
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
*
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
Advanced Piano Playing
5
Chapter
44
To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume
parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.
Note:
The sound parameter does not
appear when the quiet or headphone
mode is activated on models
equipped with the Silent Piano™
function. The metronome sound is
fixed to “TG.”
To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound
parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG
To cancel this function, press [METRONOME] again.
For details on voice groups and
voices, see Chapter 13 “Internal
Tone Generator Voices” on
page 131.
The Disklavier’s [VOICE] lets you assign a voice from the internal XG tone
generator to accompany the piano while you play. You will hear in unison
the piano sound coming from the Disklavier and an ensemble voice
produced by the internal XG tone generator. This is sometimes referred to
as voice layering or unison.
The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11
drum kits for playing the keyboard.
Press [VOICE] on the remote control.
The voice selection screen appears, and the voice function is
activated.
4
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
5
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=TG
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
6
Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice
[VOICE]
1
Advanced Piano Playing
English
5
Chapter
45
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group.
Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the
voice parameters.
To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
voice parameter (“Voice”), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 32.
If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance
setting screen.
To inactivate this function, press [VOICE] again.
Note:
The voice function is inactivated if
you escape from the voice selection
screen by other operations.
2
3
4
46
6
Chapter
The Silent Piano™ Function
This chapter describes useful functions for piano playing, silencing the acoustic piano.
(Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function)
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
The Disklavier incorporates Yamaha’s innovative Silent Piano™ function
that keeps the hammers from striking the strings, effectively silencing the
acoustic piano. Sound information is sent to the digital piano tone
generator, and output through the monitor speakers* or stereo
headphones. Additionally, the optical sensor system registers every
nuance of a player’s performance with no interference whatsoever to the
player’s touch of the keys.
When you play back songs in normal mode, the acoustic piano plays the
piano parts, providing live piano performance, and the accompanying
sounds are output through the monitor speakers*. When you engage the
Silent Piano™ function, the acoustic piano is silenced and the piano parts
are played by the digital piano tone generator. This enables you to adjust
the volume of not only the accompanying sounds but of the piano as well
as that you can enjoy listening to songs quietly through the monitor
speakers* or silently through stereo headphones.
There are two modes to the Silent Piano™ function; quiet mode and
headphone mode. You can select either mode to suit your surroundings.
Quiet Mode
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
In the quiet mode, sound is output through the monitor speakers*. By
adjusting the volume, you can listen to songs or play the keyboard more
quietly than on the acoustic piano.
Headphone Mode
Note:
For grand pianos, connecting
headphones to the Silent Piano™
control box activates the headphone
mode. For upright pianos,
connecting headphones in the quiet
mode activates the headphone mode.
In the headphone mode, sound is output through the stereo headphones.
Using headphones allows you to listen to songs or play the piano privately
at any time, day or night.
What is the Silent Piano™ Function?
Quiet Mode and Headphone Mode
The Silent Piano™ Function
English
6
Chapter
47
Note:
Even though the quiet mode is
activated, the keying sound of the
keyboard remains.
Put the Disklavier in the quiet mode when you listen to songs or play the
piano more quietly than on the acoustic piano. When the quiet mode is
activated, you are essentially playing the digital piano.
■ For Grand Pianos
Push the [QUIET] switch on the Silent Piano™ control box,
or press the blue button on the remote control to play the
digital piano.
The [QUIET] indicator on the Silent Piano™ control box lights
green and the quiet mode is activated.
To disengage the quiet mode, push the [QUIET] switch on the
Silent Piano™ control box again, or press the red button on the
remote control.
■ For Upright Pianos
Press the center pedal and slide it to the left.
To disengage the quiet mode, set the center pedal to the original
position.
Playing the Digital Piano (Quiet Mode)
For grand piano:
For upright piano:
[QUIET] or blue button
Slide the center pedal
[QUIET] indicator
The Silent Piano™ Function
6
Chapter
48
Caution:
To prevent damage to your hearing,
refrain from raising the volume to
excessive levels, and do not use the
headphones for extended periods of
time.
Put the Disklavier in the headphone mode when you listen to songs or play
the piano privately at any time, day and night.
■ For Grand Pianos
Note:
Even though the headphone mode is
activated, the keying sound of the
keyboard remains.
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack on the Silent
Piano™ control box.
The [QUIET] indicator on the Silent Piano™ control box lights
green and the headphone mode is activated.
■ For Upright Pianos
Press the center pedal and slide it to the left.
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack on the Silent
Piano™ control box.
Using the Headphones (Headphone Mode)
For grand piano:
For upright piano:
Connect the headphones
Connect the headphonesSlide the center pedal
1
2
The Silent Piano™ Function
English
6
Chapter
49
In the quiet mode, volume can be adjusted with the remote control.
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control.
The main volume setting screen appears.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume.
Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0.
Note:
Turning the knob fully
counterclockwise mutes the sound
of the digital piano.
In the headphone mode, volume can be adjusted with the [VOLUME] knob
on the Silent Piano™ control box. Turn the knob clockwise to increase and
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
■ For Grand Pianos
■ For Upright Pianos
Adjusting the Volume in the Quiet Mode
[VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –]
1
MAIN VOLUME -01
=BALANCE=
VOLUME-/+
2
Adjusting the Volume in the Headphone Mode
[VOLUME]
[VOLUME] knob
[VOLUME] knob
The Silent Piano™ Function
6
Chapter
50
For details on voice groups and
voices, see Chapter 13 “Internal
Tone Generator Voices” on
page 131.
In the quiet or headphone mode, you can select the digital piano sound
(voice) that expresses various instruments to your preference.
The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11
drum kits for playing the keyboard.
Press [VOICE] on the remote control.
The voice selection screen appears, and the voice function is
activated.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group.
Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the
voice parameters.
See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 32.
To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
voice parameter (“Voice”), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance
setting screen.
Note:
The voice function is inactivated if
you escape from the voice selection
screen by other operations.
To inactivate this function, press [VOICE] again.
Selecting the Voice in the Quiet/Headphone Mode
[VOICE]
1
2
=VOICE=
-+
?=
Voice=040<Celesta >[XG ]
Group=02<ChromaticPerc>
3
=VOICE=
-+
?=
Voice=041<Glocken >[XG ]
Group=02<ChromaticPerc>
4
The Silent Piano™ Function
English
6
Chapter
51
Note:
The reverb effect setting is saved
even though the Disklavier is turned
off.
A piano sounds differently depending on the size of the room, or the
material of the building in which it is played. The reverberation is the major
reason for this difference. Using the reverb functions of the Disklavier and
simulating the reverberation in a concert hall, gives you the feeling of the
being at a live performance.
Note:
Reverb is off when the [REVERB]
knob is turned fully
counterclockwise.
Turn the [REVERB] knob clockwise to turn the reverb
effect on.
For Grand Pianos
For Upright Pianos
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “Reverb” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The reverb setting screen appears.
Applying the Reverb Effect to the Digital Piano
“Reverb”[SETUP]
1
[REVERB] knob
[REVERB] knob
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
3
*Network *Playback
*Shortcut
]
*Reverb
=SETUP MENU=
(2/3)
_
>Type=Hall1
=Reverb=
-+
The Silent Piano™ Function
6
Chapter
52
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired reverb
effect.
Note:
The default setting for the reverb
effect is “Hall1.”
The following reverb settings are available:
Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu.
Adjust the reverb depth with the [REVERB] knob.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to
decrease the reverb effect.
Note:
Key movement can only be
inactivated in the quiet or
headphone mode. Otherwise, the
keys will always move during
playback, with the exception of L/R
song playback, in which you can
cancel either the left- or right-hand
piano part.
During playback of a song, key normally move in accordance with the
playback of the respective note’s key. In the quiet or headphone mode,
you can select an option of stopping this key movement. This enables you,
for example, to play along with the song being played back, to add your
own improvisation, or to create a four-hand duet.
During the song playback in the quiet or headphone mode,
press [FUNC.] several times.
Note:
You can change the setting for key
movement from the “Playback”
option in the setup menu.
The key motion setting screen appears.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the setting.
4
Type Description
Room
Simulates the reverb of a medium-sized room
Hall1
Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
Hall2
Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
5
6
Inactivating the Key Movement during Playback
During playback [FUNC.]
1
2
KeyMotion=OFF
=Memory=
-+ENT
53
English
7
Chapter
Basic Recording
A song that you play on the Disklavier can be recorded and the recorded song can be easily
saved for the selected medium. Furthermore, you can title your new recording for simple
distinguish before recording.
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be recorded in a
medium.
You can save a new song that you play for an album.
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a destination medium and album.
Press [RECORD].
Note:
You cannot select “CD” as the
destination medium.
The recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the
control unit lights red and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.
The level appears in the format section as soon as you play a
keyboard or press a pedal.
Press [PLAY].
[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing.
The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.
Start playing your song.
Recording will start automatically as soon as you touch a key. The
counter starts to advance.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
Recording a New Song
[RECORD]
1
2
(New Song)
=Memory=
<00:00>
LR 99%S0
A01-039
3
4
(New Song)
=Memory=
<00:01>
LR 99%S0
A01-039
5
Basic Recording
7
Chapter
54
Title a new song before you start recording.
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a destination medium and album.
To rename the existing song, see
Chapter 9 “Media Management –
Renaming a Song” on page 79.
Press [RECORD].
Press [FUNC.] twice in the recording standby screen.
The song title editing screen appears.
Enter a title to a new song.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on next page.
Press [PLAY] after title determined.
Recording begins.
Titling a Song at the Start of Recording
[FUNC.]×2[RECORD]
1
2
3
×2
=Memory= [A-Z]
4
Chopin
=Memory= [a-z]
5
Basic Recording
English
7
Chapter
55
■ Entering Characters
How to Enter Characters with the Remote Control
The following illustration shows how to enter characters with the remote control.
Available Characters
The following table shows which characters are available.
Character Type Characters
Letters
(Upper Case)
[A-Z]
Space A B C D E F G H I J K L
M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Letters
(Lower Case)
[a-z]
Space a b c d e f g h i j k l
m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols
[etc]
Space ! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + ,
- . / : ; < = > ? _ @
Numbers
[0-9]
Space 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number keypad
Overwrites a number.
[SEARCH] button
Overwrites a dot (.).
[REVERSE] button
Deletes a character. The characters on the right of the deleted one
move to the left for one character space.
[FORWARD] button
Inserts a space.
[ ]/[ ] buttons
Moves the cursor left and right.
[+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons
Selects the character. Pressing these keys simultaneously
overwrites a space.
Yellow button
Switches the character types.
The character type cycles as follows each time you press this button:
[A-Z]: letters (upper case)
[a-z]: letters (lower case)
[etc]: symbols
[0-9]: numbers
56
8
Chapter
Advanced Recording
This chapter describes further functions for the advanced piano recording such as playing and
measuring the current playing song tempo with the metronome, recording the left-hand part
and the right-hand part separately.
Note:
The tempo parameter displayed on
the metronome setting screen
indicates the number of beats in a
minute, and one beat represents a
quarter. When you play a song
written in different measure unit
from quarter note, change the setting
(e.g. When playing a song in 3/2, set
beat to 6/4).
You can use the metronome to record songs.
Songs recorded with the metronome will be in the measures and beats
format.
All metronome parameters are reset when the Disklavier is switched off.
Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
The metronome setting screen appears.
To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo
parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.
To change the beat, move the cursor to the beat parameter
(“”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The following beat settings are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4,
7/4, 8/4, 9/4.
Recording with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME] [RECORD]
1
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
=METRONOME=
-+
2
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
*
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
3
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
*
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
57
To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume
parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.
Note:
The sound parameter does not
appear when the quiet or headphone
mode is activated on models
equipped with the Silent Piano™
function. The metronome sound is
fixed to “TG.”
To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound
parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG
Press [RECORD] in the metronome setting screen.
The metronome recording setting screen appears.
Press [PLAY]
Recording begins immediately.
[PLAY/PAUSE], [REC] and [SELECT] on the control unit flash
simultaneously at the first beat of the metronome.
Start playing your song.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
4
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
5
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=TG
=METRONOME=
-+
_?=]
6
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=VOLUME= SOUND=TG
=Memory=
-+
_?=]
7
8
9
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
58
When recording an L/R song, the left- and right-hand parts can be
recorded separately. Either part can be recorded first, and the pedals can
be recorded with the first part.
While you record the second part, the first part will play back for
monitoring.
If the left-hand or right-hand part is difficult to play at normal speed, the first
part can be recorded at a slow tempo, and then the tempo changed
afterwards to record the second part at the normal song speed.
This section describes how to record the left-hand part first then the
right-hand part second.
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a destination medium and album.
In the case you want to title your
new song before recording, see
Chapter 7 “Basic Recording –
Titling a Song at the Start of
Recording” on page 54, to rename
the title after recording, see Chapter
9 “Media Management – Renaming
a Song” on page 79.
Press [RECORD].
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 8
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 56.
Make sure that the left-hand part is set to be recorded
(“L=REC”), then press [PLAY].
This Disklavier is now ready for you to play the left-hand part.
Start playing your song.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The L/R song with the left-hand part recorded is saved onto the
selected album.
Next, record the right-hand part overwriting the left-hand part that
you have just recorded.
Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately
[FUNC.][RECORD]
1
2
3
L=REC R=OFF
=Memory=
LR
4
5
6
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
59
Press [RECORD].
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song with the left-
hand part that you have just recorded, then press
[ENTER].
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
The part that has already been recorded is displayed as “L=PLY.”
Press [PART SELECT R] to record the right-hand part.
The part set to “REC” will be recorded.
Press [PLAY].
Playback of the left-hand recorded part starts immediately, so be
sure that you are ready to play the right-hand part along with it.
7
8
9
L=PLY R=OFF
=Memory=
LR
10
L=PLY R=REC
=Memory=
LR
11
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
60
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
Press [ ] and [ ] to select an option, then press
[ENTER].
The right-hand part is saved as indicated or canceled.
You can also record an L/R song by playing the left- and right-hand parts
simultaneously. In this case, a keyboard split point is set, and the notes
played on the left-hand side of the split point are saved as the left-hand
part, and notes played on the right-hand side of the split point are saved as
the right-hand part.
To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a destination medium and album.
Press [RECORD].
In the case you want to title your
new song before recording, see
Chapter 7 “Basic Recording –
Titling a Song at the Start of
Recording” on page 54, to rename
the title after recording, see Chapter
9 “Media Management – Renaming
a Song” on page 79.
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 8
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 56.
Option Description
SAVE
The second part is saved with the first part under the
current song number, overwriting the previously saved
first part.
NEW
The second part is saved under a new song number. The
first part is kept under the previous song number.
CANCEL
The second part is discarded. The first part is kept under
the previous song number.
12
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
=Memory=
ENT
13
Recording the Left and Right Parts Together (Setting a Split Point)
[FUNC.][RECORD]
1
2
3
L=REC R=OFF
=Memory=
LR
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
61
Press [PART SELECT R] to set both parts to record.
The split point setting screen appears.
The above display shows that the default keyboard split point is
note C3, or middle C. In this case, note C3 and notes below are
saved as the left-hand part and notes above C3 are saved as the
right-hand part, as shown in the following figure.
To change the split point, press a key on the keyboard or
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a different key.
The split point can be set from note A-1 to note C7.
Press [PLAY].
The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.
Starts playing your song with the left- and right-hand parts
and the pedal part simultaneously.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
4
LR=REC SPLIT=C3
=Memory=
-+
Left-hand part Right-hand part
C3
5
or
6
7
8
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
62
You can re-record the only one part left-hand or the right-hand of the
existing L/R song.
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a desired medium and album.
Press [RECORD].
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song that you want to
re-record, then press [ENTER].
Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] to select the
part to re-record.
The part set to “REC” will be re-recorded.
Press [PLAY].
Recording will start immediately, so be sure that you are ready to
play the part.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.
Re-Recording One Part
[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]Select the L/R song[RECORD]
1
2
3
4
5
6
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
=Memory=
ENT
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
63
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
Press [ ] and [ ] to select an option, then press
[ENTER].
The re-recorded part is saved as indicated or canceled.
This function allows you to change the default tempo of a song and save
the change. It should not be confused with the playback tempo function
described in Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Changing the
Playback Tempo” in which tempo changes are lost when the Disklavier is
turned off.
The tempo of a song can be changed many times. This function can be
used when recording a very complex song that is difficult to play at a fast
tempo. First, record the song at a tempo you can manage, then change the
tempo afterwards. For example, you could record a difficult left-hand part
at a slow tempo, use this function to change the tempo, then record the
right-hand part at the normal tempo.
If a song’s time format is minutes and seconds, tempo changes are
specified as a percentage of the original tempo.
If a song’s time format is measures and beats, tempo changes are
specified in beats per minute.
To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a desired medium and album.
Press [RECORD].
Option Description
SAVE
The re-recorded part is saved with the other existing
part under the current song number.
NEW
The re-recorded part is saved under a new song
number. The existing parts are kept under the current
song number.
CANCEL
The re-recorded part is discarded. The existing parts
are kept under the current song number.
7
Changing the Default Tempo
Select the song[RECORD] [FUNC.]×3
1
2
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
64
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the song in which you want
to change the tempo, then press [ENTER].
Press [FUNC.] three times.
Note:
You cannot change the beat setting
on the prerecorded songs.
For measures and beats, the current song tempo (bpm) is shown.
Note:
The sound parameter does not
appear when the quiet or headphone
mode is activated on models
equipped with the Silent Piano™
function.
For minutes and seconds, the current song tempo is shown as
“000%.”
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the tempo.
[+/YES] increases the tempo, and [–/NO] decreases the tempo.
For measure and beats, the tempo range is from 30 bpm to 400
bpm.
For minutes and seconds, the tempo range is from –75% to
+242%.
Press [STOP] to save the tempo change.
The following screen appears.
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
3
4
×3
Option Description
SAVE
The song is saved at its new tempo under the current
song number.
NEW
The song is saved at its new tempo under a new song
number. The original song is kept under the previous
song number.
CANCEL
The song with a new tempo is discarded. The original
song is kept under the previous song number.
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME=
=Memory=
-+
SOUND=BUZZER
TEMPO=+000%
=Memory=
-+
5
6
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
=Memory=
ENT
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
65
Press [ ] and [ ] to select an option, then press [ENTER].
To change the tempo again or to reset the original tempo, repeat
steps 1 to 6.
For details on video synchronized
playback, see Chapter 4 “Advanced
Song Playback – Video
Synchronized Playback” on page 40.
By recording a song played on the Disklavier synchronized with the video
recording, later on, you can enjoy piano playback with the video. First set
up the camcorder, the DVD recorder, and the Disklavier, and then start
recording by following the procedures below.
■ Setting for Video Synchronized Recording
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The audio I/O setting screen appears.
7
Video Synchronized Recording
Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder[SETUP] “AudioI/O”
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
66
Select “OMNI IN” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to “Auto
Detect”.
Select “OMNI OUT” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to
“SYNC”.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
Note:
Confirm the shape of input/output
connectors on the camcorder and the
DVD recorder, and prepare the
cables fit to them.
Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder to the control
unit.
3
4
5
6
TV
(for displaying)
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Control unit
RCA cord
(not supplied)
To
audio
output
To video
input
To
audio
input
To A/V
output
To video
input
To
video
output
DVD recorder
(for recording and playback)
Video
connector
(yellow)
Video cord
(not supplied)
A/V cord
(supplied with the
camcorder)
Camcorder
(for shooting)
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
67
■ Starting Video Synchronized Recording
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Select a destination medium and album.
Press [RECORD].
The video synchronized recording standby screen appears, and
[RECORD] on the control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE]
flashed in green.
Set the camcorder to video shooting mode.
Select the video input on the DVD recorder which the
camcorder is connected to, then start recording on the
DVD recorder.
Press [PLAY].
[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing, and the counter starts to advance.
Note:
This step is necessary for
synchronization of the song and the
video playback, and should not be
omitted.
Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing
your song.
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
Stop recording on the DVD recorder.
1
2
(New Song)
=Memory=(SYNC) SO
<00:00>
LR 99%
A01-005
3
4
5
(New Song)
=Memory=(SYNC) SO
<00:00>
LR 99%
A01-005
6
7
8
Advanced Recording
8
Chapter
68
■ Using the Camcorder only
If your camcorder has both mic input and audio output, you can
perform video synchronized recording using the camcorder only.
1. Set the Disklavier following the procedures 1 to 5 on page 65.
2. Connect a camcorder to the control unit.
3. Select a destination medium and album.
4. Press [RECORD].
5. Start recording on the camcorder.
6. Press [PLAY].
7. Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing your
song.
8. Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
9. Stop recording on the camcorder.
Camcorder
RCA cord with
resistance
(not supplied)
To mic/line
input
To audio
output
Control unit
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Advanced Recording
English
8
Chapter
69
You can record a Disklavier piano performance along with the playback of
songs on commercial CDs.
Note:
The Disklavier recognizes the
destination album by selecting the
song in it. Note that the selected
song is not overwritten by this
procedure.
Select a destination medium and album, then song in the
selected album.
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 18.
Insert an audio CD and select the song that you want to
synchronize with.
Press [RECORD].
The SPS recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the
control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.
Select the desired part of a song, then press [PLAY] to
start synchronizing.
Recording begins with the CD playback.
Start playing the Disklavier along with the CD playback.
To play back the performance
recorded with this feature, see
Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adding Disklavier
Accompaniment to Commercial CD
Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)” on
page 41.
Press [STOP] to stop recording.
The recorded song is loaded.
CD Synchronized Recording
Insert an audio CD [RECORD]
1
2
3
(New Song)
=Memory=(SPS)
<00:00>
LR 99%
A01-038
4
5
6
70
9
Chapter
Media Management
This chapter describes how to manage contents inside the media, such as managing albums,
songs and playlists.
To select a album, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You can use the album function menu for creating, deleting and copying
albums inside a medium.
Press [FUNC.] in the album selection screen.
The album function menu screen appears.
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
About playlists, see Chapter 9
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 84.
The following functions are available:
- CopyAlbum
- DeleteAlbum
- NewAlbum
- RenameAlbum
- SortAlbum
- AddToPList
- DeleteList
- NewList
- RenameList
Note:
Up to 99 albums can be saved in a
medium.
You can make copies of the album to the different medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
Managing Albums
[FUNC.]Album selection screen
1
*CopyAlbum
*NewAlbum
*DeleteAlbum
*RenameAlbum
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/2)
2
Making Copies of Albums
“CopyAlbum”[FUNC.]Album selection screen
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
71
Select “CopyAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The CopyAlbum screen appears.
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
To copy to the new album, press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
To add to the existing album, press [ ] to move the
cursor to the album, and press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to
select the album, then press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
1
*CopyAlbum
*NewAlbum
*DeleteAlbum
*RenameAlbum
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/2)
2
3a
3b
Media Management
9
Chapter
72
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
You can delete the albums.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and
[FromToPC].
Select “DeleteAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The DeleteAlbum screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to delete the album, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
4
Executing...
=CopyAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
=CopyAlbum=
ANY
Deleting Albums
“DeleteAlbum”[FUNC.]Album selection screen
1
*CopyAlbum
*NewAlbum
*DeleteAlbum
*RenameAlbum
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/2)
2
3
Executing...
=DeleteAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
=DeleteAlbum=
ANY
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
73
Note:
Up to 99 albums can be created in a
medium.
You can create a new album into the selected medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1] and [USB2].
Note:
If you enter the same title as the
album already exists, the new album
is titled in the form of “album title
xx” (“xx” indicates the number).
Select the “NewAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The NewAlbum screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.
Enter a title to a new album.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Creating a New Album
“NewAlbum”[FUNC.]Album selection screen
1
*CopyAlbum
*NewAlbum
*DeleteAlbum
*RenameAlbum
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/2)
03:(no title)
=NewAlbum=
ENT
2
3
4
Media Management
9
Chapter
74
Press [+/YES] to create a new album, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
You can rename the albums which already named.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].
Select “RenameAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The RenameAlbum screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.
Enter a new title to the selected album.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55.
5
Executing...
=NewAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
=NewAlbum=
ANY
Renaming an Album
“RenameAlbum”[FUNC.]Album selection screen
1
*CopyAlbum
*NewAlbum
*DeleteAlbum
*RenameAlbum
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/2)
2
3
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
75
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return the album selection screen.
You can rearrange the order of albums that you selected.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].
Select “SortAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The SortAlbum screen appears.
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the albums to the desired
position.
4
5
Executing...
=RenameAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
=RenameAlbum=
ANY
Rearranging the Order of Albums
“SortAlbum”[FUNC.]Album selection screen
1
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight
=SortAlbum=
ENT
2
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight
=SortAlbum=
ENT
07:Free Flight
06:Favorite Latin Select
=SortAlbum=
ENT
Media Management
9
Chapter
76
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
To select the song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You can use the song function menu for managing the copy or the deletion
songs inside the album.
Press [FUNC.] in the song selection screen.
The song function menu screen appears.
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
Note:
If there is no available function or
no song, the song function menu
screen does not appear although
pressing [FUNC.].
About playlists, see Chapter 9
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 84.
The following functions are available:
- CopySong
- DeleteSong
- RenameSong
- SortSong
- AddToPList
- ConvertSong
- Counter
- Strip XP
3
08:Mike Garson Trio-Live
06:Favorite Latin Select
=SortAlbum=
OK? YES/NO
4
Executing...
=SortAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
=SortAlbum=
ANY
Managing Songs
[FUNC.]Song selection screen
1
*CopySong
*RenameSong
*DeleteSong
=SONG MENU=
(1/2)
*SortSong
2
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
77
Note:
Copy-protected songs, such as
PianoSoft songs, cannot be copied to
a removable medium.
You can copy songs stored on an album to another.
This function is available for song in the album on [Memory], [CD](CD-
ROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be saved in an
album.
Select “CopySong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The CopySong screen appears.
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album, and press
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a destination album.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Making Copies of Songs
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “CopySong”
1
*CopySong
*RenameSong
*DeleteSong
=SONG MENU=
(1/2)
*SortSong
2
3
4
Media Management
9
Chapter
78
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
You can delete songs stored on an album.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2], [Playlist] and [FromToPC].
Select “DeleteSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The DeleteSong screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to delete the song, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
5
Executing...
=CopySong=
Completed.
Press any button.
=CopySong=
ANY
Deleting Songs
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “DeleteSong”
1
*CopySong
*RenameSong
*DeleteSong
=SONG MENU=
(1/2)
*SortSong
2
3
Executing...
=DeleteSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
=DeleteSong=
ANY
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
79
You can rename the songs which already named.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
Select “RenameSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The RenameSong screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The song title editing screen appears.
Enter a new title to the selected song.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Renaming a Song
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “RenameSong”
1
*CopySong
*RenameSong
*DeleteSong
=SONG MENU=
(1/2)
*SortSong
006:Toccata
=RenameSong=
ENT
2
3
4
006:Toccata and Fugue
=RenameSong= OK? YES/NO
Media Management
9
Chapter
80
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
You can rearrange the order of songs in an album.
This function is available only for songs in the album on [Memory] and
[Playlist].
Select “SortSong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The SortSong screen appears.
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the songs to the desired
position.
5
Executing...
=RenameSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
=RenameSong=
ANY
Rearranging the Order of Songs
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “SortSong”
1
*CopySong
*RenameSong
*DeleteSong
=SONG MENU=
(1/2)
*SortSong
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration
=SortSong=
ENT
2
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration
=SortSong=
ENT
007:Admiration
006:Toccata and Fugue
=SortSong=
ENT
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
81
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Note:
The converted song will be newly
added to the end of the album.
The song format can be converted to other format.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
Select “ConvertSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
The ConvertSong screen appears.
3
008:Interaction
006:Toccata and Fugue
=SortSong= OK? YES/NO
4
Executing...
=SortSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
=SortSong=
ANY
Converting Song Format
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “ConvertSong”
1
001:Song For Students
SMF0 E-SEQ
=ConvertSong=
-+ENT
Media Management
9
Chapter
82
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a song format.
This following options are available:
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to convert, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
The counter display of a song can be changed from “measures and
beats”(metronome) to “minutes and seconds” or vice versa.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
Option Song Format
E-SEQ
E-SEQ format
SMF0
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0
SMF1
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1
Piano1
E-SEQ format to play on all Disklavier in correct tempo
2
001:Song For Students
SMF0 Piano1
=ConvertSong=
-+ENT
3
001:Song For Students
SMF0 Piano1
=ConvertSong=OK? YES/NO
4
Executing...
=ConvertSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
=ConvertSong=
ANY
Changing the Counter Display
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “Counter”
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
83
Select “Counter” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The CounterChange screen appears.
TIME: minutes and seconds display
METRONOME: measures and beats display
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to change, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Note:
Once the XP event is stripped, the
original data cannot be restored.
Before converting valuable music
data, be sure to backup the original
data.
Some Disklavier pianos record highly precise control information (XP
events) that becomes part of the MIDI song files. This data is used to
achieve accurate playback on the Disklavier PRO model, but is not used
when the file is played back on general MIDI devices. When you edit the
song with external MIDI devices (for example a software sequencer), the
relationship between the note data and the XP event as well as the actual
performance may not be maintained. There may be cases in which songs
edited in this manner cannot be played back normally, depending on the
instrument’s settings. In such cases, use the Strip XP function to remove
the XP event to convert the song to standard MIDI format before using it
for playback. Strip XP also makes it possible to reduce the size of MIDI
files when desired.
1
001:Song For Students
TIME METRONOME
=CounterChange=
ENT
2
001:Song For Students
TIME METRONOME
=CounterChange=OK?YES/NO
3
Executing...
=CounterChange=
Completed.
Press any button.
=CounterChange=
ANY
Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form (Strip XP)
[FUNC.]Song selection screen “Strip XP”
Media Management
9
Chapter
84
Select “Strip XP” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The Strip XP screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to execute, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
To create a playlist, see Chapter 9
“Media Management – Creating a
New Playlist” on page 87.
By creating lists of your favorite songs, you can program your Disklavier to
automatically play back a series of songs.
At the initial factory settings, no playlist is created in the internal flash
memory. First create your own playlist, then play back that list.
1
2
3
Managing Playlists
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
85
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be added to a
playlist.
This function is available only for songs/albums on [Memory].
Note:
You cannot add songs on media
other than [Memory] directly to the
playlist. First, copy songs to the
internal flash memory.
Select “AddToPList” in the album or song function menu,
then press [ENTER].
The AddToPList screen appears.
Note:
If “New Playlist” is selected in step
2, the title of added album is copied
to that playlist.
Select a destination playlist with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
Note:
If you select “New Playlist” and add
songs to it, the playlist is titled as
“My Playlist.”
Note:
The new playlist created in this
procedure can be selected from
“Playlist” in the media selection
screen.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to add, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album or song selection screen.
Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist
[FUNC.]Media selection screen “AddToPList”Album or song selection screen“Memory”
1
2
3
4
Executing...
=AddToPList=
Completed.
Press any button.
=AddToPList=
ANY
Media Management
9
Chapter
86
Note:
Even if you delete the playlist, songs
or albums added to that playlist
remain in the internal flash memory.
You can delete the playlists which already registered.
Select “DeleteList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
The DeleteList screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to delete the playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
Deleting a Playlist
[FUNC.]Album selection screen “DeleteList”Media selection screen “Playlist”
1
*DeleteList
*RenameList
*NewList
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/1)
02:My Best Collection
=DeleteList=
ENT
2
02:My Best Collection
=DeleteList= OK? YES/NO
3
Executing...
=DeleteList=
Completed.
Press any button.
=DeleteList=
ANY
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
87
Note:
Up to 99 playlists can be created.
You can create a new playlist for playing back your favorite songs in your
selected order.
Note:
If you enter the same title as the
playlist already exists, the new
playlist is titled in the form of
“playlist title [xx]” (“xx” indicates
the number).
Select “NewList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
The NewList screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.
Enter a title to a new playlist.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Creating a New Playlist
[FUNC.]Album selection screen “NewList”Media selection screen “Playlist”
1
*DeleteList
*RenameList
*NewList
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/1)
03:(no title)
=NewList=
ENT
2
3
4
03:My Best Collection
=NewList= OK? YES/NO
Media Management
9
Chapter
88
Note:
The new playlist created in this
procedure can be selected from
“Playlist” in the media selection
screen.
Press [+/YES] to create a new playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
You can rename a playlist which already registered.
Select “RenameList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
The RenameList screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.
Enter a new title to the selected playlist.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55.
5
Executing...
=NewList=
Completed.
Press any button.
=NewList=
ANY
Renaming a Playlist
[FUNC.]Album selection screen “RenameList”Media selection screen “Playlist”
1
*DeleteList
*RenameList
*NewList
=ALBUM MENU=
(1/1)
My Best Collection
=RenameList=
ENT
2
3
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
89
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
To select a media, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You can use the media function menu for copying or deleting entire
contents inside the media.
Press [FUNC.] in the media selection screen.
The media function menu screen appears.
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
Note:
If there is no available functions, the
media function menu screen does
not appears although pressing
[FUNC.].
The following functions are available:
- CopyAll
- DeleteAll
- Format
- Refresh
4
=RenameList=
My Best Hit Collection
OK? YES/NO
5
Executing...
=RenameList=
Completed.
Press any button.
=RenameList=
ANY
Managing Media
[FUNC.]Media selection screen
1
*CopyAll *DeleteAll
=MEDIA MENU=
2
Media Management
9
Chapter
90
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You can copy the entire contents in a medium to the another medium.
The function is available for [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1], [USB2]
and [FromToPC].
Select “CopyAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The CopyAll screen appears.
Note:
Confirm that the destination
medium has enough space to store
the contents.
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Note:
If the maximum number of the
albums in the destination medium
exceeds 99, copying stops.
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a Medium
[FUNC.]Media selection screen “CopyAll”
1
*CopyAll *DeleteAll
=MEDIA MENU=
USB1 Memory
=CopyAll=
-+ENT
2
USB1 Memory
=CopyAll=
-+ENT
3
USB1 Memory
=CopyAll= OK? YES/NO
4
Executing...
=CopyAll=
Completed.
Press any button.
=CopyAll=
ANY
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
91
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You can delete the entire contents in a medium.
This function is available for [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].
Select “DeleteAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The DeleteAll screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to delete, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium
[FUNC.]Media selection screen “DeleteAll”
1
*CopyAll *DeleteAll
=MEDIA MENU=
Media=Memory
=DeleteAll=
ENT
2
Media=Memory
=DeleteAll= OK? YES/NO
3
Executing...
=DeleteAll=
Completed.
Press any button.
=DeleteAll=
ANY
Media Management
9
Chapter
92
Note:
Copy-protected files, such as
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs,
cannot be copied to the [FromToPC]
folder.
You can copy song files from a Windows or Macintosh computer to a
special folder on the Disklavier called [FromToPC] and then play them on
the Disklavier.
Note:
Do not copy the files other than
Disklavier song files.
Note:
Do not access the [FromToPC]
folder while the Disklavier is
engaged in another operation (such
as file copying or deleting).
Connect the control unit to a LAN (local area network) to
which a personal computer with a song file is also
connected.
Note:
It is necessary to configure the
Disklavier properly for network
communications by enabling it to
get a DHCP IP address
automatically (recommended) or by
assigning an appropriate address
manually. The procedure is the same
as the one used for setting up the
Disklavier for Internet
communications. Please follow the
instructions in Chapter 10 “Internet
Direct Connection (IDC) – Setting
the Disklavier for the Internet
Connection” on page 107.
Note:
Use an STP (shielded twisted pair)
cable for connection. For details, see
Chapter 10 “Internet Direct
Connection (IDC) – Connecting the
Disklavier to the Internet” on
page 101.
Note:
For information about configuring a
personal computer for network
communications, please refer to the
documentation that came with the
computer.
Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier
1
Personal computer
Control unit
LAN
Router
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
93
■ For Windows
Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier.
On the computer screen, click [Start] and then select [My
Network Places].
Note:
The folder or icon name differs
depending on the version of your
operating system.
The [My Network Places] window appears. Confirm that the
[Dkv******] icon is shown in the [My Network Places] window.
Double-click the [Dkv*******] icon.
The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is
shown in the [Dkv******] folder.
Double-click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.
Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
See Chapter 9 “Media Management
– Refreshing the Contents in
[FromToPC]” on page 96.
Refresh the contents in the folder.
2
3
4
5
■ For Windows: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Open the [My Network Places] on the computer, and then click
the [Search] icon on the top of the window.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the [Computer name] box,
and then click [Search] to start searching.
7. Open [Dkv******] and confirm that the [FromToPC] folder is
shown under that.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
6
Media Management
9
Chapter
94
■ For Mac OS X 10.3 or 10.4
Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then click the
[Network] icon in the left side of the window.
The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv] icon is
shown in the [Network] window.
Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier.
Click the [Dkv] icon.
The [Dkv] folder opens. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is shown
in the [Dkv] folder.
Click the [Dkv******] icon.
Note:
If the user ID and password are
required during the process, enter
any name for the ID and leave the
space for the password blank.
In the first dialog that appears, select [FromToPC] from
the mini-menu and click [OK].
Click [OK] again in the next dialog that appears.
Connection process completes and the [FromToPC] icon appears
in the left side of the window.
Click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.
Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
See Chapter 9 “Media Management
– Refreshing the Contents in
[FromToPC]” on page 96.
Refresh the contents in the folder.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
95
■ For Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6
Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier.
Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then select [Go]
and then [Network] from the menu bar.
The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is
shown in the [Network] window.
Note:
If the user ID and password are
required during the process, enter
any name for the ID and leave the
space for the password blank.
Click the [Dkv*******] icon.
The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is
shown in the [Dkv******] folder.
Click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.
Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
See Chapter 9 “Media Management
– Refreshing the Contents in
[FromToPC]” on page 96.
Refresh the contents in the folder.
2
3
4
5
■ For Macintosh: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Select [Go] and then [Connect to Server] from the menu bar on
the computer.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the address field, and
then click [Connect]. Use syntax “smb://” when entering the
name (“smb://Dkv******”).
7. Select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu in the first window
appears and click [OK]. Click [OK] again in the next window that
appears.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder on the left
side of the finder window.
6
Media Management
9
Chapter
96
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
You must refresh the contents in the [FromToPC] folder after copying song
files from a personal computer, in order to play them on the Disklavier.
Select “Refresh” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The Refresh screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to refresh, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]
[FUNC.] “Refresh”“FromToPC”Media selection screen
1
Media=FromToPC
=Refresh=
ENT
2
Media=FromToPC
=Refresh= OK? YES/NO
3
Executing...
=Refresh=
Completed.
Press any button.
=Refresh=
ANY
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
97
Important:
Formatting a floppy disk erases all
data that stored in the disk, so make
sure that the disk you are going to
format does not contain the data you
want to keep.
In the case of using the unformatted floppy disk on the floppy drive
(optional) or deleting the entire contents on the floppy disk, format the
floppy disk.
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 18.
Connect the floppy drive (optional) to the USB port on the
control unit.
Note:
If you are formatting a floppy disk,
make sure that the floppy disk’s
erasure protection tab is set to
“unprotected.”
Insert a floppy disk to the floppy drive.
Select “Format” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The Format screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to format, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional)
[FUNC.]Select the floppy disk “Format”
1
2
3
Media=FD
=Format=
ENT
4
Media=FD
=Format= OK? YES/NO
5
Executing...
=Format=
Completed.
Press any button.
=Format=
ANY
Media Management
9
Chapter
98
■ Floppy Disk Accidental Erasure Protection
Floppy disks have an erasure protection tab located on the reverse side of
the disk in the bottom right-hand corner. When formatting a disk, make
sure that its erasure protection tab is set to “unprotected.”
Note:
Be sure to use the USB medium
described in Chapter 2 “Getting
Started – Compatible Media Format
for the Removable Media” on
page 15.
You can make a backup copy of the songs and playlists. In order to protect
your valuable music data, Yamaha strongly recommends that you backup
your memory on regular basis.
If the floppy disk is inserted to the optional floppy disk drive, eject it before
you start making backups.
Note:
Make sure that the USB medium has
enough space to save the backup
data.
\
Connect an external USB medium to the USB port on the
control unit.
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
Protected
Unprotected
When the tab window is open,
formatting and recording are
not possible.
When the tab window is closed,
formatting and recording are
possible.
Making Backups of Songs
[SYSTEM] “Backup”
1
2
Media Management
English
9
Chapter
99
Select “Backup” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The Backup screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to make a backup, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu screen.
To make a backup, see Chapter 9
“Media Management – Making
Backups of Songs” on page 98.
You can restore the current condition of the internal memory to the
previous condition that you made a backup copy.
Connect an external USB medium in which you made
backup last time to the USB port on the control unit.
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
3
4
Backup song data?
=Backup= OK? YES/NO
5
Completed.
Press any button.
=Backup=
ANY
Restoring the Backups
[SYSTEM] “Restore”
1
2
Media Management
9
Chapter
100
Select “Restore” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The Restore screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to restore, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu screen.
3
4
Restore this data?
Date:2007-10-22 15:42:00
=Restore= OK? YES/NO
5
Completed.
Press any button.
=Restore=
ANY
101
English
10
Chapter
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
By connecting to the Internet, you can enjoy a streaming broadcast or download update
programs directly.
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) is a feature that allows you to connect
your Disklavier directly to the Internet. Internet Direct Connection users are
able to listen to a streaming broadcast (DisklavierRadio™), and receive
valuable information such as product updates. Your Disklavier can be
upgraded remotely as new technologies and services are developed
through the IDC service.
Note:
If you have already registered for
the IDC service with any other
instrument (such as the Clavinova),
you do not need to register again.
You can use your ID and password
obtained through that registration.
To use the IDC service, initial registration is required using an Internet-
connected computer.
Please register at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Note:
Some IDC service functions do not
require an ID and password.
Once you have an IDC account, you will interact with that account using
the remote control. To use the full IDC service, you are required to enter
your registered ID (e-mail address) and password with the remote control.
You can connect the Disklavier to a full-time online Internet connection
(ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped
with a router.
■ Preparations
• To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an
Internet service or provider.
• Use a computer to obtain and configure Internet service. You cannot
obtain Internet service or configure router settings on a local area
network using the Disklavier itself.
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to connect the control unit and
a router.
• Before connecting the LAN cable, make sure to turn off (or shut down)
the Disklavier.
What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?
Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration)
Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
10
Chapter
102
Note:
Depending on the contract with your
Internet provider, you may not be
able to connect two or more devices
(for example, a computer and the
Disklavier) to the Internet. Please
check your contract or contact your
Internet provider for further
information.
■ Connecting the Control Unit to the Internet
Connection example 1:
Using a modem with router function
Note:
Some types of modems (such as
ADSL modems or cable modems)
have multiple ports for connecting
two or more devices (such as
computer, musical instrument, etc.).
If your modems have only one port,
an optional router or hub is required
in order to connect several devices
simultaneously.
Note:
Use an STP (shielded twisted pair)
cable for connection.
Connection example 2:
Using a modem without router function
Control unit
Modem
(with router function)
Other device
(such as computer)
LAN
cable
Control unit
Modem
(without router
function)
Other device
(such as computer)
LAN
cable
Router
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
English
10
Chapter
103
For further information on the Internet connection (only a wired LAN
connection is supported), visit the Yamaha Disklavier website:
http://services.music.yamaha.com/radio/
■ Notes on Network Security
The Disklavier E3 attempts to achieve a balance between security and
usability in its network implementation. However, a determined hacker may
be able to defeat these security measures and utilize the network of the
purchaser in an unauthorized manner. Since each network is different,
only the purchaser can determine whether the security measures
discussed here will adequately protect their network.
The purchaser acknowledges that connection to the Internet and use of the
Disklavier E3 Internet features is done at the risk of the purchaser. In no
event shall Yamaha, its subsidiaries or Yamaha’s and/or its subsidiaries’
directors, officers, or employees be responsible for unauthorized access,
loss or alteration of the data of the purchaser or be liable for any damage
from intrusions.
Note:
Free contents that do not require an
ID and password are available.
Once you have established an IDC account and successfully connected
your Disklavier to the Internet, you can access a special Disklavier website
where you can access the DisklavierRadio™, and download software
updates.
Note:
The service contents are subject to
change without prior notice.
See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the DisklavierRadio™”
on page 26.
D-Radio
Select this to listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels
of music content. You can enjoy listening to piano performances that play
continuously.
MyAccount
Select this to log in to the IDC service. You can also refer to the help
information from this option.
Update
Select this to update the Disklavier using Internet connection.
Accessing the Internet
[INTERNET]
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
10
Chapter
104
Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.
Select a desired menu with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
Perform operations on the screen that appears.
You can confirm your current account information of IDC service. You can
also log out from the IDC service.
Note:
ID and password are not required for
free contents (such as free channel
of DisklavierRadio™).
Login
Select this to log in to the IDC service. You need to enter your ID and
password.
Logout
If you wish to use another IDC account or prevent the current account from
being used by others, select this to log out from the IDC service.
Account Information
Select this to confirm your account information.
Subscription Status
Select this to confirm your DisklavierRadio™ subscription status.
Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.
1
*D-Radio
*Update
*MyAccount
=Internet=
(1/1)
2
Checking Your Account Information
“MyAccount”[INTERNET]
1
*D-Radio
*Update
*MyAccount
=Internet= (1/1)
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
English
10
Chapter
105
Select “MyAccount” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
The MyAccount screen appears.
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [ENTER].
Perform operations on the screen that appears.
You can download the update program directly from the Internet and
update the firmware of the Disklavier.
Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.
2
*D-Radio
*Update
*MyAccount
=Internet=
(1/1)
3
Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet
“Update”[INTERNET]
1
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
10
Chapter
106
Select “Update” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The update screen appears if there is any update program
available.
You can scroll the screen up or down with the cursor buttons ([ ]
[]).
Following the instructions on the screen, select the option
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press
[ENTER].
The download process of the update program starts.
Shut down the Disklavier with [ON/OFF] on the control unit
after the download process is completed.
The update program is now prepared.
Update the firmware following the procedures in Chapter 12 “Other
Settings – Updating the Disklavier” on page 129.
2
*D-Radio
*Update
*MyAccount
=Internet=
(1/1)
3
------------------------
*Update Fir
=Update=
*Cancel
4
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
English
10
Chapter
107
To use the Internet connection,
inquire of your Internet service
provider.
You can change various settings related to the Internet connection. In most
cases, you do not have to change the default factory settings.
Note:
For information about DNS server
address, IP address, subnet mask
and gateway server address, inquire
of your internet service provider.
Information
You can confirm the information of network settings.
Use DHCP
Select the method to determine several addresses. If your router has
DHCP server function, we recommend that you to select “DHCP” or
“DHCP+DNS.”
DNS1/DNS2
Enter the address of the primary and secondary DNS server. These
settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “DHCP+DNS” or
“MANUAL.”
IPAddr./SubMask/Gateway
Enter the address of the control unit, subnet mask and gateway server.
These settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “MANUAL.”
Proxy/Proxy Port
Enter the name and the port number for the proxy server. These settings
are necessary only when a proxy server is located in your local network.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “Network” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
Note:
The “Reverb” option appears only
on models equipped with the Silent
Piano™ function.
The network setting screen appears.
Setting the Disklavier for the Internet Connection
[SETUP] “Network”
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*Network *Playback
*Shortcut
=SETUP MENU=
(2/3)
*Reverb
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
10
Chapter
108
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change
setting.
If you select “Information” on the network setting screen, the
current network setting appears. To return to the network setting
screen, press [ENTER] after confirming.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
For details on cookies, see Chapter
16 “Glossary” on page 140.
If you want to initialize the Internet settings, first you must reset the
Disklavier to its initial factory setting.
However, cookies are still remain after parameter resetting. To delete
cookies, perform the appropriate operation on the reset screen.
See Chapter 12 “Other Settings –
Resetting the Disklavier” on
page 126.
3
4
Initializing Internet Settings
[SETUP] “Reset”
109
English
11
Chapter
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking
Up Other Devices
If you connect the Disklavier to an audio system, you can hear the sound
played/played back on the Disklavier from the connected audio system,
and the sound played back on the connected audio system from the
Disklavier.
Hooking Up Audio Equipment
Control unit
AV amplifier
To audio
inputs
CD player, etc.
To audio
outputs
RCA cord
(not supplied)
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
11
Chapter
110
You can select the kind of the incoming/outgoing audio signals. The
following options should be set up in advance.
OMNI IN
Selects the appropriate option to match the incoming data input to the
OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks.
Auto Detect:
Select this to have the Disklavier detect the input signal
automatically.
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
Audio: Select this when you play back audio from a connected CD
player, etc. and reproduce the sound from the monitor
speakers*.
OFF: Select this when you cancel the data reception from the OMNI
(SYNC) IN jacks.
OMNI IN Vol
Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.
OMNI OUT
Selects the desired data to be output from the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.
*1
Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
Output: Select this when you output the same audio signals as the
ones for the monitor speakers
*1
.
*2
Only for models equipped with
the Silent Piano™ function
Output+PianoTG
*2
:
Select this when you output the ensemble part and the digital
piano sound. Note that the digital piano sound is also output in
the acoustic mode.
PianoTG
*2
: Select this when you output only the digital piano sound.
SYNC: Select this when you output the SMPTE signal used for video
synchronization playback.
OFF: Select this when you cancel the data transmission from the
OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.
OMNI OUT Vol
Note:
“M-Volume” is the next increment
on the OMNI OUT Vol setting
above 127.
Adjust the volume of the outgoing audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) OUT
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127, or to “M-Volume.”
When you set to “M-Volume”, the OMNI OUT volume works with the main
volume.
ANALOG MIDI IN Vol
Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the ANALOG MIDI IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.
Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission
[SETUP] “AudioI/O”
000
127
M-Volume
OMNI OUT
Vol parameter
~
[–/NO]
[+/YES]
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
English
11
Chapter
111
A-MIDI IN Offset
For some display devices, the video images may be displayed a little bit
later than the piano playing when playing back the video synchronized
software that contains the analog MIDI signal. To eliminate this delay, you
can adjust the offset time that leads the actual playback of the piano. A
delay is applied to the incoming analog MIDI signal. The offset time can be
set in a range of –500 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano
playing, and increase to advance the piano playing.
SYNC IN Offset
Adjusts the length of the offset time that leads the actual playback of the
entire recording. The offset time can be set in a range of –500ms to
+500ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to
advance the piano playing.
SYNC OUT Level
Adjusts the output level of the SMPTE signal. For normal use, the
adjustment of this option is not required. If noises (synchronized signal) are
output from the OUTPUT jacks during video synchronized playback, turn
down the level and re-record.
OUTPUT Offset
For some speakers or digital amplifiers, the audio from the Disklavier may
be output a little bit later than the acoustic piano playing. To eliminate this
delay, you can adjust the offset time for the sound output. This setting is
applied to the outgoing audio signal from the OUTPUT jacks and OMNI
(SYNC) OUT jacks. Decrease this value to advance the sound output. The
offset time can be set in a range of –100 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value
to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance the piano playing.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The audio I/O setting screen appears.
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
11
Chapter
112
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
Note:
When you use the USB connection,
it is required to install the USB
driver to the connected device. In
such a case, visit the following
website and download the driver.
http://download.yamaha.com/
MIDI (an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows
electronic device (synthesizers, etc.) to interact and work in
synchronization with other MIDI compatible device. The Disklavier enables
you to enjoy a variety of MIDI features by connecting a MIDI device or
computer to the Disklavier’s control unit.
Note:
Be sure to use the commercially
available MIDI cable with the L-
shaped connector on the control unit
end.
3
4
Hooking Up MIDI Devices
Control unit
MIDI device (sequencer, synthesizer, etc.) or computer
To MIDI
input
To MIDI
output
MIDI cable
(not supplied)
To USB
port
USB cable
(not supplied)
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
English
11
Chapter
113
The Disklavier can play back the MIDI data being received from the
connected MIDI device as well as the software loaded or stored in the
Disklavier itself. The following options should be set up in advance.
MIDI IN Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data reception.
MIDI: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI IN
terminal.
USB: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port.
Piano Rcv Ch
The MIDI data consists of multi channels that are respectively assigned to
a certain instrument’s part. This option assigns the desired channel(s) to
the piano part(s) that is (are) played back on the Disklavier’s keyboard.
01 thru 16:
Select
the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.
1+2: Select this when the “01” and “02” channels are assigned to the
piano parts.
Prg: Select the smallest number channel assigned to the piano
group voice (see page 131) to be played on the Disklavier.
Prg(All): Select all channels assigned to the piano group voice (see
page 131) to be played on the Disklavier.
MIDI IN Delay
When the Disklavier receives two kinds of data (strong and weak note) at
the same time, the weak note sounds a little bit later than the strong one
due to the characteristics of the Disklavier’s mechanism. To eliminate this
delay in the sound reproduction so that the notes are sounded in accurate
timing at 500 milliseconds after the data reception, usually a delay is
applied to the incoming MIDI data.
ON: Select this when you apply this delay to the incoming MIDI
data.
OFF: Select this when you do not apply this delay.
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Reception
[SETUP] “MIDI”
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
11
Chapter
114
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]),
then press [ENTER].
The MIDI setting screen appears.
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
3
4
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
English
11
Chapter
115
The Disklavier can transmit the information of piano playing/ensemble part
playback on the Disklavier as the MIDI data to the connected MIDI device
to reproduce the sound with its sound generator, etc. or to record the MIDI
data. The following options should be set up in advance.
MIDI OUT Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data transmission.
MIDI: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI OUT
terminal.
USB: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port.
MIDI OUT
Selects one of the following parts to be transmitted to the connected MIDI
device.
ESBL Out:Select this when you transmit the ensemble part played back
on the Disklavier.
KBD Out: Select this when you transmit the piano part played on the
Disklavier.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]),
then press [ENTER].
The MIDI setting screen appears.
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Transmission
[SETUP] “MIDI”
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
11
Chapter
116
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
Besides the MIDI OUT options, more detailed setups for the keyboard
playing data transmission are available. The following options should be
set up in advance.
KBD OUT CH
Assigns the piano part to the desired channels.
01 thru 16:
Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.
Local
Selects whether you reproduce or not the piano part playing with the
Disklavier’s internal tone generator.
ON: Select this when you reproduce the piano part with the
Disklavier’s internal tone generator.
OFF: Select this when you reproduce the song (played on the
Disklavier) on the external MIDI device. This option inactivates
the internal tone generator to prevent both the internal and
external tone generator sound at the same time.
3
4
Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing Data Transmission
[SETUP] “MIDI”
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
English
11
Chapter
117
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]),
then press [ENTER].
The MIDI setting screen appears.
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
3
4
118
12
Chapter
Other Settings
Note:
For models equipped with the Silent
Piano™ function, be sure to switch
the Disklavier to the acoustic mode
before tuning.
The internal XG tone generator has already been tuned to match the
acoustic piano (A3=440 Hz). However, you can re-tune the internal XG
tone generator in accordance with the pitch of the acoustic piano by
following the procedure below.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “M-Tune” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The TG Master Tune setting screen appears.
Playing the keyboard, press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to tune the
pitch of the internal XG tone generator.
The same note will sound simultaneously on the XG tone
generator’s digital piano and on the acoustic piano as soon as you
play the keyboard.
The pitch of the internal XG tone generator can be adjusted in a
range of –50 cent to +50 cent.
Tuning the Tone Generator (TG Master Tune)
[SETUP] “M–Tune”
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
>Tune= 000cent
=TG Master Tune=
-+
3
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
119
Note:
To reset to the default factory pitch
settings, see Chapter 12 “Other
Settings – Resetting the Disklavier”
on page 126.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
You can assign the number keypad of the remote control ([1] thru [9] and
[0]) a series of procedures for often used functions.
■ Assigning Functions
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “Shortcut” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
Note:
The “Reverb” option appears only
on models equipped with the Silent
Piano™ function.
The shortcut setting screen appears.
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the desired number.
4
Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the Number Keypad on
the Remote Control
[SETUP] “Shortcut”
1
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*M-Tune*MIDI
=SETUP MENU= (1/3)]
2
*Network *Playback
*Shortcut
=SETUP MENU= _(2/3)]
*Reverb
=Shortcut=
1[----- ]
?-+
2[----- ]
3
=Shortcut=
3[----- ]
?=-+
4[----- ]
Other Settings
12
Chapter
120
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired function.
The following functions are available:
* Only for grand pianos.
When functions other than “POWER” and “QUIET” are selected,
the detailed setting parameter appears.
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the detailed setting
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired setting.
You can set two sets of parameter depending on the function you
have selected.
When “PLAY” is selected:
4
=Shortcut=
3[----- ]
?=]-+
4[PLAY Mem01 --- ]
Option Description
PLAY
Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist.
RPT
Starts repeat playback of a song or songs in the selected
album or playlist.
RND
Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist
at random.
RADIO
Starts playback of the selected
DisklavierRadio
™ channel.
BLNC
Adjusts the volume balance among the different sound
sources (tone generator or audio).
POWER
Turns on and off the Disklavier.
QUIET
Activates and inactivates the quiet mode*.
Option 1 Option 2 Description
Mem01 -
Mem99
---
Starts playback from the first song in the
album selected for option 1.
001 - 999
Starts playback from the song selected for
option 2 in the album selected for option 1.
Lst01 -
Lst99
---
Starts playback from the first song in the
playlist selected for option 1.
001 - 999
Starts playback from the song selected for
option 2 in the playlist selected for option 1.
5
=Shortcut=
3[----- ]
_?=]-+
4[PLAY Mem02 --- ]
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
121
When “RPT” is selected:
When “RND” is selected:
When “RADIO” is selected:
When “BLNC” is selected:
When “POWER” or “QUIET” is selected:
Details settings are not required.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
Option 1 Option 2 Description
Mem01 -
Mem99
---
Starts repeat playback of all songs in the
album selected for option 1 from the first
song.
001 - 999
Starts repeat playback of the song selected
for option 2 in the album selected for option
1.
Lst01 -
Lst99
---
Starts repeat playback of all songs in the
playlist selected for option 1 from the first
song.
001 - 999
Starts repeat playback of the song selected
for option 2 in the playlist selected for
option 1.
Option Description
Mem01 -
Mem99
Starts playback of songs in the selected album at
random.
Lst01 -
Lst99
Starts playback of songs in the selected playlist at
random.
Option Description
CH01 -
CH99
Starts playback of the selected DisklavierRadio™
channel.
Option 1 Option 2 Description
TG UP
Raises the volume of the tone generator.
DOWN
Lowers the volume of the tone generator.
AUDIO UP
Raises the volume of the audio.
DOWN
Lowers the volume of the audio.
6
Other Settings
12
Chapter
122
■ Using the Shortcut
Holding the green button on the remote control, press the corresponding
number button on the number keypad to execute the assigned function.
Note:
These settings are not required for
the use of the remote control of this
unit. In case of using an external
remote controller, refer to the user’s
guide for that remote controller.
You can enter the 4-digit passcode to prevent unauthorized access from
the commercially available external remote controller, or you can also set
the MAC address of the external remote controller to allow it to access
your Disklavier without entering the passcode.
Note:
If changes are inappropriately made
for these settings, the external
remote controller may not function
properly. In such cases, enter
“####” to reset the passcode setting.
■ Setting the Passcode
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
Select “Passcode” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The passcode setting screen appears.
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor left and right.
+
Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized Access
[SETUP] “Passcode”
1
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*M-Tune*MIDI
=SETUP MENU= (1/3)]
2
*Passcode *Reset
=SETUP MENU= _(3/3)
>Passcode=####
=Passcode= ]-+
3
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
123
Note:
You can also use [+/YES] and
[–/NO] on the remote control, or the
dial on the control unit to enter the
code.
Enter the 4-digit code with the number keypad.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
■ Setting the MAC Address
If you feel inconvenient to enter the passcode each time you access from
the external remote controller, you can set the MAC address of the
external remote controller. This will allow the external remote controller
with the registered MAC address to access your Disklavier without entering
the passcode.
With the passcode properly set, press [ ] to select
“MAdr1.”
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor left and right.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to enter the address.
Enter the address with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
You can set up to three addresses.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
4
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:##
=Passcode= _?-+
5
1
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:##
=Passcode= ?=]-+
2
3
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=01:AB:23:C#:##:##
=Passcode= _?=]-+
4
Other Settings
12
Chapter
124
You can adjust the brightness of the display. You can also set the display
to dim after the elapse of a certain time if there is no operation.
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
Select “Display” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The display setting screen appears.
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the brightness.
The following brightness settings are available: 40%, 60%, 80%,
100%.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
[SETUP] “Display”
1
*Clock Adj.
*Backup
*TimeZone
*Restore
=STSTEM MENU= (1/2)]
2
*Language
*Display
*Maintenance
=STSTEM MENU= _(2/2)
*Brightness=100%
*Dim light=OFF
=Display= ?=-+ENT
3
*Brightness=80%
*Dim light=OFF
=Display= ?=-+ENT
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
125
Note:
The brightness of the display will
return to its original setting when
you press any buttons, insert media,
or eject media.
To set the time for the display to dim, press [ ] to move
the cursor to the dim light parameter, then press
[+/YES] and [–/NO].
The following time settings are available: OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min,
5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min.
If there is no operation for the time set above, the display dims to
half the brightness of its original setting.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
Select “Language” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The language setting screen appears.
4
*Brightness=100%
*Dim light=1min.
=Display= ?=-+ENT
5
Switching the Languages for the Screen
[SYSTEM] “Language”
1
2
*Language *Maintenance
=SYSTEM MENU=
(2/2)
*Display
Other Settings
12
Chapter
126
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the language.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to set the language, and return to the
system menu screen.
Important:
If you reset your Disklavier,
depending upon the option you
select, you may lose all parameters
or all data in the internal memory, or
both of these. For normal use, you
do not have to reset. If you must
reset your Disklavier, Yamaha
strongly recommends that you
backup your songs in the internal
memory. However, you cannot
backup your various parameter
settings.
If you want to return your Disklavier to its initial factory settings, follow the
procedure below.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
To make a backup copy of the songs
which are in the internal memory,
see Chapter 9 “Media Management
– Making Backups of Songs” on
page 98.
Select “Reset” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
The reset screen appears.
3
4
5
Resetting the Disklavier
[SETUP] “Reset”
1
*TimerPlay
*MIDI
*AudioI/O
*M-Tune
=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)
2
*Passcode *Reset
=SETUP MENU=
(3/3)
>Reset=Parameter
=Reset=
-+ENT
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
127
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the option that you
want to reset.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
Press [+/YES] to reset, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the setup menu screen.
Option Description
Parameter
Reset all parameters, excluding the clock setting
and the Internet setting.
Memory
Reset the internal memory.
Factory Init.
Reset the Disklavier to its initial factory setting.
DeleteCookies
Delete the contents of all saved cookies.
3
4
>Reset=Factory Init.
=Reset= OK? YES/NO
5
Executing...
=Reset=
Completed.
Press any button.
=Reset=
ANY
Other Settings
12
Chapter
128
The piano diagnostics may be required as the occasion demands. In such
a case, follow the instructions of your Yamaha dealer and perform the
following procedure.
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
Select “Maintenance” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
The maintenance screen appears.
Press [ENTER].
The maintenance options appears.
Diagnosing the Disklavier (Maintenance Mode)
[SYSTEM] “Maintenance”
(Grand piano)
(Upright piano)
1
2
*Language
=SYSTEM MENU=
(2/2)
*Maintenance
*Display
3
2.Program Versions
3.Pedal Calibration
1.Post Delivery Check
Other Settings
English
12
Chapter
129
Note:
Do not execute these options with
no instructions from the service
personnel.
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]),
then press [ENTER].
The selected option is executed.
Press [STOP] to complete the operation.
Note:
For this operation you have to insert
the CD-ROM or USB flash memory
in which the update program is
saved or download update program
via Internet, and shut down the
Disklavier.
You can update the Disklavier firmware using update program (saved on
the CD-ROM or USB flash memory, or downloaded via Internet).
You can download the update program from the following website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Make sure that Disklavier is shut down.
Note:
Depending on the version or
specification of the Disklavier, the
actual indications for the version
and module names may differ from
ones depicted here.
Holding [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, press [ON/OFF].
The current version information of each module appears one after
the other.
Make sure that the update program is prepared, then press
[ENTER] on the control unit.
The starting screen appears.
Press [ENTER] on the control unit again.
After a while, the update confirmation message of each module
appears.
4
5
Updating the Disklavier
Shut down the Disklavier [PLAY/PAUSE] and [ON/OFF]
1
2
Hold
+
CTRL system v2.20
(ENT)*UPDATE
3
4
v2.20
(PLAY,STOP)MC -SURE?
v3.00
Other Settings
12
Chapter
130
Important:
DO NOT turn off this unit during
update.
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update.
Important:
Be sure to update all the modules.
The update process of the first module takes approximately 3
minutes.
When the update of the first module completes, the following
confirmation message appears.
Confirmation message of the second module
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update of the second module.
The update process of the second module takes approximately 3
minutes.
A total of four modules needs to be updated. Repeat this step to
complete the update.
Confirmation message of the third module
The update process of the third module takes approximately 2
minutes.
Confirmation message of the fourth module
The update process of the fourth module takes approximately 2
minutes.
The closing screen appears when the update for all modules
completes.
Restart the Disklavier.
5
MC v2.20
DO NOT REMOVE DISK!
v3.00
v2.10
(PLAY,STOP)CTRL-SURE?
v3.00
v2.01
(PLAY,STOP)APE -SURE?
v3.00
v2.10
(PLAY,STOP)CSP -SURE?
v3.00
6
131
English
13
Chapter
Internal Tone Generator Voices
The following table lists the basic voices for the internal GM/XG and TG3 tone generator.
Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Voice # Display Name
01 Piano
001 GrandPno
002 GrndPnoK
003 MelloGrP
004 PianoStr
005 Dream
006 BritePno
007 BritPnoK
008 E.Grand
009 EIGrPnoK
010 Det.CP80
011 ElGrPno1
012 ElGrPno2
013 HnkyTonk
014 HnkyTnkK
015 E.Piano1
016 El.Pno1K
017 MelloEP1
018 Chor.EP1
019 HardEl.P
020 VX El.P1
021 60sEl.P
022 E.Piano2
023 El.Pno2K
024 Chor.EP2
025 DX Hard
026 DXLegend
027 DX Phase
028 DX+Analg
029 DXKotoEP
030 VX El.P2
031 Harpsi.
032 Harpsi.K
033 Harpsi.2
034 Harpsi.3
035 Clavi.
036 Clavi.K
037 ClaviWah
038 PulseClv
039 PierceCl
02 ChromaticPerc
040 Celesta
041 Glocken
042 MusicBox
043 Orgel
044 Vibes
045 VibesK
046 HardVibe
047 Marimba
048 MarimbaK
049 SineMrmb
050 Balafon2
051 Log Drum
052 Xylophon
053 TubulBel
054 ChrchBel
055 Carillon
056 Dulcimer
057 Dulcimr2
058 Cimbalom
059 Santur
03 Organ
060 DrawOrgn
061 DetDrwOr
062 60sDrOr1
063 60sDrOr2
064 70sDrOr1
065 DrawOrg2
066 60sDrOr3
067 EvenBar
068 16+2”2/3
069 Organ Ba
070 70sDrOr2
071 CheezOrg
072 DrawOrg3
073 PercOrgn
074 70sPcOr1
075 DetPrcOr
076 LiteOrg
077 PercOrg2
078 RockOrgn
079 RotaryOr
080 SloRotar
081 FstRotar
082 ChrchOrg
083 ChurOrg3
084 ChurOrg2
085 NotreDam
Voice # Display Name
086 OrgFlute
087 TrmOrgFl
088 ReedOrgn
089 Puff Org
090 Acordion
091 Accordlt
092 Harmnica
093 Harmo 2
094 TangoAcd
095 TngoAcd2
04 Guitar
096 NylonGtr
097 NylonGt2
098 NylonGt3
099 VelGtHrm
100 Ukulele
101 SteelGtr
102 SteelGt2
103 12StrGtr
104 Nyln&Stl
105 Stl&Body
106 Mandolin
107 Jazz Gtr
108 MelloGtr
109 JazzAmp
110 CleanGtr
111 ChorusGt
112 Mute.Gtr
113 FunkGtr1
114 MuteStlG
115 FunkGtr2
116 Jazz Man
117 Ovrdrive
118 Gt.Pinch
119 Dist.Gtr
120 FeedbkGt
121 FeedbGt2
122 GtrHarmo
123 GtFeedbk
124 GtrHrmo2
05 Bass
125 Aco.Bass
126 JazzRthm
127 VXUprght
Voice # Display Name
Internal Tone Generator Voices
13
Chapter
132
128 FngrBass
129 FingrDrk
130 FlangeBa
131 Ba&DstEG
132 FngrSlap
133 FngBass2
134 ModAlem
135 PickBass
136 MutePkBa
137 Fretless
138 Fretles2
139 Fretles3
140 Fretles4
141 SynFretl
142 Smooth
143 SlapBas1
144 ResoSlap
145 PunchThm
146 SlapBas2
147 VeloSlap
148 SynBass1
149 SynBa1Dk
150 FastResB
151 AcidBass
152 Clv Bass
153 TeknoBa
154 Oscar
155 SqrBass
156 RubberBa
157 Hammer
158 SynBass2
159 MelloSB1
160 Seq Bass
161 ClkSynBa
162 SynBa2Dk
163 SmthBa 2
164 ModulrBa
165 DX Bass
166 X WireBa
06 Strings
167 Violin
168 SlowVln
169 Viola
170 Cello
171 Contrabs
172 Trem.Str
173 SlwTrStr
174 Susp Str
175 Pizz.Str
176 Harp
177 YangChin
Voice # Display Name
178 Timpani
07 Ensemble
179 Strings1
180 S.Strngs
181 SlowStr
182 ArcoStr
183 60sStrng
184 Orchestr
185 Orchstr2
186 TremOrch
187 VeloStr
188 Strings2
189 S.SlwStr
190 LegatoSt
191 Warm Str
192 Kingdom
193 70s Str
194 Str Ens3
195 Syn.Str1
196 ResoStr
197 Syn Str4
198 SS Str
199 Syn.Str2
200 ChoirAah
201 S.Choir
202 Ch.Aahs2
203 MelChoir
204 ChoirStr
205 VoiceOoh
206 SynVoice
207 SynVox2
208 Choral
209 AnaVoice
210 Orch.Hit
211 OrchHit2
212 Impact
08 Brass
213 Trumpet
214 Trumpet2
215 BriteTrp
216 WarmTrp
217 Trombone
218 Trmbone2
219 Tuba
220 Tuba 2
221 Mute.Trp
222 Fr.Horn
223 FrHrSolo
224 FrHorn2
225 HornOrch
226 BrasSect
Voice # Display Name
227 Tp&TbSec
228 BrssSec2
229 HiBrass
230 MelloBrs
231 SynBras1
232 QuackBr
233 RezSynBr
234 PolyBrss
235 SynBras3
236 JumpBrss
237 AnaVelBr
238 AnaBrss1
239 SynBras2
240 Soft Brs
241 SynBras4
242 ChorBrss
243 VelBras2
244 AnaBrss2
09 Reed
245 SprnoSax
246 Alto Sax
247 Sax Sect
248 HyprAlto
249 TenorSax
250 BrthTnSx
251 SoftTenr
252 TnrSax 2
253 Bari.Sax
254 Oboe
255 Eng.Horn
256 Bassoon
257 Clarinet
10 Pipe
258 Piccolo
259 Flute
260 Recorder
261 PanFlute
262 Bottle
263 Shakhchi
264 Whistle
265 Ocarina
11 Synth Lead
266 SquareLd
267 Square 2
268 LMSquare
269 Hollow
270 Shmoog
271 Mellow
272 SoloSine
273 SineLead
274 Saw.Lead
Voice # Display Name
Internal Tone Generator Voices
English
13
Chapter
133
275 Saw 2
276 ThickSaw
277 DynaSaw
278 DigiSaw
279 Big Lead
280 HeavySyn
281 WaspySyn
282 PulseSaw
283 Dr. Lead
284 VeloLead
285 Seq Ana
286 CaliopLd
287 Pure Pad
288 Chiff Ld
289 Rubby
290 CharanLd
291 DistLead
292 WireLead
293 Voice Ld
294 SynthAah
295 VoxLead
296 Fifth Ld
297 Big Five
298 Bass &Ld
299 Big&Low
300 Fat&Prky
301 SoftWurl
12 Synth Pad
302 NewAgePd
303 Fantasy2
304 Warm Pad
305 ThickPad
306 Soft Pad
307 SinePad
308 Horn Pad
309 RotarStr
310 PolySyPd
311 PolyPd80
312 ClickPad
313 Ana Pad
314 SquarPad
315 ChoirPad
316 Heaven2
317 ltopia
318 CC Pad
319 BowedPad
320 Glacier
321 GlassPad
322 MetalPad
323 Tine Pad
324 Pan Pad
Voice # Display Name
325 Halo Pad
326 SweepPad
327 Shwimmer
328 Converge
329 PolarPad
330 Celstial
13 Synth Effects
331 Rain
332 ClaviPad
333 HrmoRain
334 AfrcnWnd
335 Caribean
336 SoundTrk
337 Prologue
338 Ancestrl
339 Crystal
340 SynDrCmp
341 Popcorn
342 TinyBell
343 RndGlock
344 GlockChi
345 ClearBel
346 ChorBell
347 SynMalet
348 SftCryst
349 LoudGlok
350 XmasBell
351 VibeBell
352 DigiBell
353 AirBells
354 BellHarp
355 Gamelmba
356 Atmosphr
357 WarmAtms
358 HollwRls
359 NylonEP
360 NylnHarp
361 Harp Vox
362 AtmosPad
363 Planet
364 Bright
365 FantaBel
366 Smokey
367 Goblins
368 GobSyn
369 50sSciFi
370 Ring Pad
371 Ritual
372 ToHeaven
373 Night
374 Glisten
Voice # Display Name
375 BelChoir
376 Echoes
377 EchoPad2
378 Echo Pan
379 EchoBell
380 Big Pan
381 SynPiano
382 Creation
383 Stardust
384 Reso Pan
385 Sci-Fi
386 Starz
14 Ethnic
387 Sitar
388 DetSitar
389 Sitar 2
390 Tambra
391 Tamboura
392 Banjo
393 MuteBnjo
394 Rabab
395 Gopichnt
396 Oud
397 Shamisen
398 Koto
399 T.Koto
400 Kanoon
401 Kalimba
402 Bagpipe
403 Fiddle
404 Shanai
405 Shanai2
406 Pungi
407 Hichriki
15 Percussive
408 TnklBell
409 Bonang
410 Gender
411 Gamelan
412 S.Gamlan
413 Rama Cym
414 AsianBel
415 Agogo
416 SteelDrm
417 GlasPerc
418 ThaiBell
419 WoodBlok
420 Castanet
421 TaikoDrm
422 Gr.Cassa
423 MelodTom
Voice # Display Name
Internal Tone Generator Voices
13
Chapter
134
Internal GM/XG Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
424 Mel Tom2
425 Real Tom
426 Rock Tom
427 Syn.Drum
428 Ana Tom
429 ElecPerc
430 RevCymbl
16 Sound Effects
431 FretNoiz
432 BrthNoiz
433 Seashore
434 Tweet
435 Telphone
436 Helicptr
437 Applause
438 Gunshot
18 SFX Voice
450 CuttngNz
451 CttngNz2
452 Str Slap
453 Fl.KClik
454 Rain
455 Thunder
456 Wind
457 Stream
458 Bubble
Voice # Display Name
459 Feed
460 Dog
461 Horse
462 Bird 2
463 Ghost
464 Maou
465 Tel.Dial
466 DoorSqek
467 DoorSlam
468 Scratch
469 Scratch2
470 WindChm
471 Telphon2
472 CarEngin
473 Car Stop
474 Car Pass
475 CarCrash
476 Siren
477 Train
478 Jetplane
479 Starship
480 Burst
481 Coaster
482 SbMarine
483 Laughing
484 Scream
Voice # Display Name
485 Punch
486 Heart
487 FootStep
488 MchinGun
489 LaserGun
490 Xplosion
491 FireWork
Voice # Display Name
17 Drum Kit
439 StandKit
440 Stnd2Kit
441 Room Kit
442 Rock Kit
443 ElectKit
444 AnalgKit
445 Jazz Kit
446 BrushKit
447 ClascKit
448 SFX Kit1
449 SFX Kit2
Voice # Display Name
Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Voice # Display Name
01 Piano
001 GrandPno
002 BritePno
003 E.Grand
004 HnkyTonk
005 E.Piano1
006 E.Piano2
007 Harpsi.
008 Clavi.
02 ChromaticPerc
009 Celesta
010 Glocken
011 MusicBox
012 Vibes
013 Marimba
014 Xylophon
015 TubulBel
016 Dulcimer
03 Organ
017 DrawOrgn
018 PercOrgn
019 RockOrgn
020 ChrchOrg
021 ReedOrgn
022 Acordion
023 Harmnica
024 TangoAcd
04 Guitar
025 NylonGtr
026 SteelGtr
027 Jazz Gtr
028 CleanGtr
029 Mute.Gtr
030 Ovrdrive
Voice # Display Name
031 Dist.Gtr
032 GtrHarmo
05 Bass
033 Aco.Bass
034 FngrBass
035 PickBass
036 Fretless
037 SlapBas1
038 SlapBas2
039 SynBass1
040 SynBass2
06 Strings
041 Violin
042 Viola
043 Cello
044 Contrabs
045 Trem.Str
Voice # Display Name
Internal Tone Generator Voices
English
13
Chapter
135
Internal TG3 Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
046 Pizz.Str
047 Harp
048 Timpani
07 Ensemble
049 Strings1
050 Strings2
051 Syn.Str1
052 Syn.Str2
053 ChoirAah
054 VoiceOoh
055 SynVoice
056 Orch.Hit
08 Brass
057 Trumpet
058 Trombone
059 Tuba
060 Mute.Trp
061 Fr.Horn
062 BrasSect
063 SynBras1
064 SynBras2
09 Reed
065 SprnoSax
066 Alto Sax
067 TenorSax
068 Bari.Sax
069 Oboe
070 Eng.Horn
071 Bassoon
072 Clarinet
10 Pipe
073 Piccolo
074 Flute
075 Recorder
076 PanFlute
077 Bottle
078 Shakhchi
079 Whistle
080 Ocarina
11 Synth Lead
081 SquareLd
082 Saw.Lead
083 CaliopLd
084 Chiff Ld
085 CharanLd
086 Voice Ld
087 Fifth Ld
088 Bass &Ld
12 Synth Pad
089 NewAgePd
090 Warm Pad
Voice # Display Name
091 PolySyPd
092 ChoirPad
093 BowedPad
094 MetalPad
095 Halo Pad
096 SweepPad
13 Synth Effects
097 Rain
098 SoundTrk
099 Crystal
100 Atmosphr
101 Bright
102 Goblins
103 Echoes
104 Sci-Fi
14 Ethnic
105 Sitar
106 Banjo
107 Shamisen
108 Koto
109 Kalimba
110 Bagpipe
111 Fiddle
112 Shanai
15 Percussive
113 TnklBell
114 Agogo
115 SteelDrm
116 WoodBlok
117 TaikoDrm
118 MelodTom
119 Syn.Drum
120 RevCymbl
16 Sound Effects
121 FretNoiz
122 BrthNoiz
123 Seashore
124 Tweet
125 Telphone
126 Helicptr
127 Applause
128 Gunshot
Voice # Display Name
17 Drum Kit
129 StandKit
Voice # Display Name
136
14
Chapter
Troubleshooting
If you are having difficulty operating the Disklavier, see if any of the symptoms listed below
apply to your problem and follow the recommended remedy.
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
Power
Symptom Remedy
The Diskalvier does not turn on. Make sure that the main switch on the power supply
unit is turned on.
Make sure that the AC power cable is securely
connected to a suitable AC wall outlet.
If the Disklavier still cannot be turned on, disconnect it
from the AC wall outlet, and consult your Disklavier
dealer.
Control Unit
Symptom Remedy
The control unit does not appear to work correctly. Turn off the control unit, wait 5 seconds, then turn it
back on. If the problem continues, consult your
Disklavier dealer.
The control unit becomes hot. Although the chassis of the control unit may become
hot while the Disklavier is turned on (also in the standby
mode), this is not a malfunction.
Remote Control
Symptom Remedy
You cannot control the Disklavier using the remote
control.
Make sure that you are pointing the remote control at
the control unit’s remote control sensor.
Make sure that you are within the remote control’s
specified operating range (approx. 5 m).
Make sure that the remote control’s batteries have
been installed correctly.
Check the condition of the remote control’s batteries.
Monitor Speakers*
Symptom Remedy
No sound is heard from the monitor speakers. Make sure that the POWER switches on both monitor
speakers are turned on.
Make sure that the monitor speakers are connected to
the OUTPUT jacks on the control unit with the supplied
speaker cords.
Make sure that the overall volume is adequately turned
up.
Make sure that the volume of the internal tone
generator, audio and voice are adequately turned up.
Certain model does not come with the monitor
speakers. In such a case, prepare active speakers
equivalent to the monitor speakers.
Troubleshooting
English
14
Chapter
137
Playback
Symptom Remedy
None of the playback functions can be used. Insert a medium that contains songs into the Disklavier.
The Disklavier does not read a song file. The maximum number of the readable files in an album
is 999.
Make sure that the name of the SMF song has an
extension as “.MID” or “.mid” and the E-SEQ song has
“.FIL” or “.fil.”
Songs are played back at the wrong tempo or in the
wrong key.
Reset the tempo or transposition changes. Once the
tempo or transposition have been changed, they will
affect playback of all songs on an album, until another
medium or album is selected, the recording standby
mode is engaged, the Disklavier is turned off, or they
are reset.
Songs are not played back in the normal song order. Make sure that the random repeat mode is off.
The playback order differs from the order on another
device.
The playback order depends on the recording software
or other factors. Naming the file starting from numbers
such as 01, 02, etc. may solve the problem.
When selecting a song using the remote control’s
number keypad, but the last song on the album is
selected.
If a song number higher than the last song number on
the album is specified, the last song will be selected.
When specifying a search time using the remote
control’s number keypad, but the end of the song is
selected.
If a time value higher than the total length of the song is
specified, the end of the song will be selected.
Some notes drop out during playback. When a piano song is played back at a low volume,
complex note trills and faint pianissimo passages
sometimes drop out. In such case, increase the
Disklavier’s volume level.
PianoSmart™ playback cannot be performed. Make sure that an appropriate SmartPianoSoft song,
which is paired with the song on commercial CDs, is
selected.
The pedals do not operate during playback. Make sure that the pedal part is not canceled.
Tone Generator
Symptom Remedy
The ensemble parts cannot be heard during ensemble
song playback.
Make sure that the TG balance is set to an appropriate
level and readjust it.
The pitch of the Disklavier and the internal tone
generator do not match.
Use the TG Master Tune function to tune the internal
tone generator.
Recording
Symptom Remedy
You cannot re-record. Re-recording is not possible on protected songs such
as PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs.
Troubleshooting
14
Chapter
138
Media
Symptom Remedy
The Disklavier does not read a CD-R/RW disc. The audio CD should be formatted in CD-DA, and the
data CD in ISO 9660 Level1. The Disklavier may not
read a CD-R/RW disc other than this format.
Connection with External Devices
Symptom Remedy
The Disklavier cannot send or receive MIDI data with
other MIDI instruments.
Make sure that the MIDI cables or USB cable are
connected properly.
A MIDI loop was accidentally created when you
connected a computer to the MIDI OUT terminal on
your Disklavier, so that song data is sent back and forth
between the computer and the Disklavier.
Configure the setting for the MIDI OUT terminal to
“KBD OUT.”
Video Synchronized Recording/Playback
Symptom Remedy
Synchronized songs are not played back. Make sure that the audio channels of the DVD recorder
are correctly connected to the Disklavier.
Make sure that the input and output of the DVD
recorder are correctly connected to the Disklavier.
Make sure that the “OMNI IN” option on the Disklavier
is set to “AutoDetect.”
Make sure that the “OMNI OUT” option on the
Disklavier is set to “SYNC.”
Noises are heard during recording. Turn down the volume of the TV connected to the DVD
recorder.
Disconnect the left side connector of the RCA cord from
the OMNI OUT (L) jack on the Disklavier. This will not
affect the functionality of video synchronized recording.
Noises are heard during playback. The level of the synchronized signal (SMPTE) from the
Disklavier may be too high. Turn down the level with the
“SYNC OUT Level” option and re-record.
The piano playback is not synchronized with the video
picture.
The video picture may be delayed on the projection
device. Adjust the offset time with the “SYNC IN Offset”
to match the piano playing and the video picture.
The beginning of the piano performance is dropped out
when you play back the synchronized song.
It may take some time until the Disklavier recognizes
the synchronized signal and the piano begins to play
back. Select the synchronized song in advance, and
then start playback on the DVD recorder. Note that you
should wait for a while before playing the piano after
recording begins on the DVD recorder.
139
English
15
Chapter
Error Messages
While operating your Disklavier, an error message may appear in the display. If an error
message appears, refer to the table below for an explanation of the message.
Media Selection / Playback
File Operation
Recording
Timer Play
Error Messages Situation Remedy
NO MEDIA! You selected the medium that has not
been inserted.
Insert the medium or select another
medium.
DIFFERENT CD! Your CD is not paired with the selected
SmartPianoSoft song.
Insert appropriate CD that is paired with
the SmartPianoSoft song.
Error Messages Situation Remedy
CANNOT EXECUTE.
NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE
You tried to copy a song to the medium
that has no disk space.
Try another medium or delete songs on
the media to make disk space.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
NO DESTINATION MEDIUM
You selected the destination medium
that has not been inserted when
copying the album.
Insert the destination medium and
select it.
DISK WRITE PROTECTED! You tried to copy songs or albums to
the medium with the protection tab set
to “protected”.
Set the protection tab of the medium to
“unprotected”.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
PROTECTED FILE
You tried to copy the protected song file
to the removable medium such as a
USB flash memory.
You cannot copy the protected file to
the removable medium.
Deleted all songs in this album You tried to delete the album with sub
folders on the external medium.
CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 99 ALBUMS
You tried to create a new album on the
medium that already contains 99
albums.
No more than 99 albums can be created
on the medium.
CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 999 SONGS
You tried to create a new song in the
album that already contains 999 songs.
No more than 999 songs can be created
in the album.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
SAME TITLE EXISTS
You tried to rename an album as same
as the album that already exists.
Enter the different title to an album.
You tried to rename a playlist as same
as the playlist that already exists.
Enter the different title to a playlist.
Error Messages Situation Remedy
SELECT REC TRACK You tried to start re-recording with no
part selected.
Select the part to record before starting
re-recording.
Error Messages Situation Remedy
SAME TIME EVENT EXISTS!
CHANGE THE TIME
You tried to set two different programs
with the same time for timer playback.
You cannot set two different program
with the same time.
140
16
Chapter
Glossary
This glossary provides basic definitions of terms used frequently in Disklavier manuals.
Continuous Pedal
See “Incremental Pedal.”
Cookie
A computer data file that stores certain information
for use when revisiting a website. In the case of the
Disklavier, cookies are used to store ID and
password for the IDC service.
DHCP
This is a standard or protocol by which IP
addresses and other low-level network
configuration information can be dynamically and
automatically assigned each time a connection is
made to the Internet.
DNS
A system that translates names of computers
connected to a network to their corresponding IP
addresses.
Ensemble Song
A song which contains piano parts and
accompanying instrumental voices. An ensemble
song contains the same left- and right-hand parts
as an L/R song, and in addition, up to 13
accompanying instrument tracks. These extra
tracks are played by the internal XG tone
generator. The accompanying tracks may be used
for acoustic bass, drums, strings, vibes, etc.
E-SEQ Song Format
A song file format developed by Yamaha for saving
songs.
Floppy Disk
The magnetic storage medium that the Disklavier
uses to save songs. With the optional USB floppy
drive, you can use the 3.5 inch 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks commonly used for computers.
Gateway
A system which links different networks or systems,
and makes possible data transfer and conversion
despite differing communications standards.
General MIDI (GM)
An addition to the MIDI standard that simplifies the
transfer of MIDI song files between instruments of
different manufacturers. A MIDI song recorded
using a GM compatible tone generator should play
back correctly when used with any GM compatible
tone generator. The standard specifies that a GM
compatible tone generator must support 24-note
polyphony, 16 parts, and 128 standard voices.
Half Pedal
See “Incremental Pedal.”
Headphone Mode
A mode of the Silent Piano™ function in which
sound is output through connected stereo
headphones so that you can listen to songs or play
the piano without disturbing people around you.
Incremental Pedal
Piano pedals are not always completely up or down
and may be held somewhere in-between. Using
incremental pedal data (also called continuous or
half pedal data) the Disklavier precisely records the
up and down movement of the piano pedals.
Internet
A huge network made up of networks, the Internet
allows high-speed data transfer among computers,
mobile phones and other devices.
IP Address
A string of numbers assigned to each computer
connected to a network, and indicating the device’s
location on the network.
LAN
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer
network that connects a group of computers at a
single location (such as an office or home) by
means of a special cable.
L/R Song
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and then play that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.
Glossary
English
16
Chapter
141
MIDI
An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.
Modem
A device which connects and allows data transfer
between a conventional telephone line and a
computer. It converts the digital signals from the
computer to analog audio for sending over the
phone line, and vice versa.
Piano Parts
Refer to the left- and right-hand piano parts of a
song. The left-hand piano part is recorded onto
track 1 and the right-hand piano part is recorded
onto track 2.
PianoSoft™
The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a library of
prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
specifically for use with the Disklavier.
PianoSoft·Plus™
PianoSoft·Plus disks contain Ensemble songs that
can be played on the Disklavier.
Polyphony
The maximum number of voices (or sounds) that
can be produced at a time from MIDI instruments.
Provider
A communications business that offers Internet
connection services. In order to connect to the
Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider.
Proxy
A proxy server is a server that all computers on a
local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or
designated requests to the real server to see if it
can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the
request to the real server. Proxy servers are used
to improve performance and speed, and to filter
requests, usually for security and to prevent
unauthorized access to an internal network.
Quiet Mode
A mode of the Silent Piano™ function in which
sound is output through the monitor speakers,
enabling you to freely adjust the volume of the
piano.
Router
A device for connecting multiple computer
networks. For example, a router is necessary when
connecting several computers in a house or office,
to allow all of them access the Internet and share
data. A router is usually connected between a
modem and a computer, although some modems
have a built-in router.
Sequencer
A sequencer can be used with the Disklavier to play
back and record MIDI data.
Server
A hardware system or computer used as a central
point for a network, providing access to files and
services.
Silent Piano™ Function
Yamaha’s innovative function that keeps the
hammers from striking the strings, effectively
silencing the acoustic piano. Sound information is
sent to the digital piano tone generator, and output
through the monitor speakers (quiet mode) or
stereo headphones (headphone mode).
SmartPianoSoft™
Software made by Yamaha containing MIDI signals
for playing back along with standard audio CDs.
SMF
Abbreviation for Standard MIDI File.
SMF Song Format
A song file format supported by MIDI sequencers
and music software.
Song
Normally, a short piece of music with lyrics.
However, for clarity in Disklavier manuals, the term
is used to refer to any piece of music of any genre.
Standard MIDI File
A file of MIDI data that can be read and used by a
number of different MIDI devices and computers.
Subnet Mask
A setting used to divide a large-scale network into
several smaller networks.
Glossary
16
Chapter
142
TG Master Tune
The function that allows you to tune the internal XG
tone generator, and if connected, an external tone
generator simultaneously so that their tunings
match that of the Disklavier.
Tone Generator
An electronic device that can generate tones or
instrument voices.
Transpose
Changing the key of a song. For example, a song in
the key of C is transposed to the key of D when it is
moved up two semitones.
USB
An interface for connecting an external device with
plug and play. The Disklavier supplies with 2 TO
DEVICE terminal with USB 1.1 standard and 1 TO
HOST terminal. You can use as the external
memory media if connected a USB flash memory or
a USB hard disk to TO DEVICE terminal. Also the
Disklavier enables you to enjoy a variety of MIDI
features by connecting a computer to TO HOST
terminal.
Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.
Web Page
Refers to each individual page that makes up a
website.
Website
This refers to the group of web pages that are
opened together. For example, the collection of
web pages whose addresses begin with “http://
www.yamaha.com/ ” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.
XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM (General
MIDI) format. Its greater polyphony, more voices,
and use of effects enhances the compatibility
between MIDI devices. When a song in the
Yamaha XG format is played on another XG-
compatible tone generator or synthesizer, it plays
and sounds as the original composer/creator
intended.
143
English
17
Chapter
Specifications
General Specifications
Upright Piano Grand Piano
Grand Piano (C6X/C7X/S)
*1
Sensor System
Key Sensors
Noncontact optical fiber/grayscale shutter sensing system for 88 keys (senses the
key position, keying velocity, and key releasing velocity)
Hammer Sensors —
Noncontact optical fiber
shutter sensing system
*2
Noncontact optical fiber/
grayscale shutter sensing
system
Pedal Sensors
Damper & soft pedals:
Noncontact optical
position-sensing system
Damper & shift pedals:
Noncontact optical
position-sensing system
Sostenuto pedal: Optical
ON/OFF detection
sensing system
*2
Damper & shift pedals:
Noncontact digital optical
position-sensing system
Sostenuto pedal: Optical
ON/OFF detection
sensing system
Drive System
Keys DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids)
Pedals DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids)
Data Storage Internal Memory 128 MB
Removable
Media
Compact Disc Audio CD (CD-DA), Data CD (ISO 9660 Level1-compliant)
USB Flash Memory
FAT16 or FAT32 format
Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available USB flash
memories.
USB Hard Disk
FAT32 format
Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available USB hard disks.
Floppy Disk 3.5” 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB) floppy disk
*3
File Format Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 0, Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 1, E-SEQ format
Song Format
PianoSoft (Solo), PianoSoft•Plus, PianoSoft•PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft, SmartKey
(CueTIME)
Control Unit
Drive CD (read only)
Dimensions (W
H
D)
292 49 216 mm (11-1/2” 1-15/16” 8-1/2”)
Weight 2.7 kg (5.95 lb)
Monitor
Speaker
*4
Rated Power Output 20 W 2 with tone and volume controls
Drivers 10 cm (3-15/16”) woofer 2, 2.2 cm (7/8”) tweeter 2
Dimensions (W
H
D)
144 236 167 mm (5-11/16” 9-5/16” 6-9/16”)
Weight 4.4 kg (9.70 lb)
Connectors
MIDI MIDI IN, MIDI OUT
Audio OUTPUT, ANALOG MIDI IN, OMNI IN, OMNI OUT, PHONES 2
*5
Others LAN, USB (1 TO HOST, 2 TO DEVICE)
Pitch Control Set at A=440 Hz, tunable –50 to +50 cents in 1 cent increment
Piano Tone
*5
Type Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2)
Polyphony 32 notes (max.)
Voice Piano (digital stereo sampling)
Reverb Type Room, Hall1, Hall2 (depth controllable)
Ensemble Tone
Type Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2)
Polyphony 32 notes (max.)
Ensemble Parts 16 parts
Voice Module Modes XG, GM
Normal Voices 676 voices (480 voices can be used for playing)
Drum Voices 21 kits (11 kits can be used for playing)
Power Source Local AC current, 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Specifications
17
Chapter
144
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Note:
*1
Not available in some areas.
*2
Not equipped on some models.
*3
Possible for optional floppy disk drive (UD-FD01).
*4
Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
*5
Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function.
*6
Only for grand pianos.
Supplied Accessories
Control unit (1), control unit suspension bracket (1)
*6
, screw for control unit
suspension bracket installation (4 10) (4)
*6
, screw for control unit suspension (5
12) (3)
*6
, screw for USB floppy disk drive installation (3 6) (4)
*6
, monitor speaker
(2)
*4
, monitor speaker installation kit (1)
*4
, speaker cord (2)
*4
, remote control (1),
battery for remote control (2), stereo headphone (1)
*5
, sample PianoSoft CD
software (1), operation manual (1), PianoSoft CD song list (1), music book “50
greats for the Piano” (1)
Optional Accessories USB floppy disk drive (UD-FD01)
Function & Controls
Playback
Functions
Media Select Internal memory, CD, USB media (including floppy disk)
Song Select Cursor buttons (control unit), cursor buttons/numeric section (remote control)
Basic Functions Play, stop, pause
Song Search
Reverse/forward w/ sound (MIDI songs), reverse/forward w/o sound (audio songs),
directly by time or measure.
Repeat
ALL (all songs in current album), RPT (current song), RND (all songs in current
album in random order), A-B
Part Cancel L (left), R (right), pedal
Timer Playback See page 36.
Video Synchronization See page 40.
SmartKey™ Playback See page 41.
PianoSmart™ Playback
See page 41.
Playback
Controls
Volume 11 levels (–10 to 0)
Tempo –50 to 50% in 1% increment
Transposition –24 to +24 semitones (2 octaves) in 1 semitone increment
Balance (TG, Audio) 10 to 127
Recording
Functions
Piano Part Recording L/R overwrite, split
Metronome Mode
Recording
See page 56.
Tempo Changing See page 63.
Video Synchronization See page 65.
Audio CD
Synchronization
See page 69.
Piano Playing
Functions
XG Voices Approx. 500 voices
Metronome
Range 30 to 400 beats per minute
Time Signatures 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4
Volume Controllable
Utility
Functions
Song Copy, delete, rename, sort, add to playlist, type convert, time format convert, strip XP
Album Copy, delete, create, rename, sort, add to playlist
Playlist Create, delete, rename
Backup/Restore See pages 98 and 99.
Floppy Disk
*3
Format
Network
Functions
DisklavierRadio™ See pages 26 and 103.
FromToPC Folder See pages 92 to 96.
Network Update See page 105.
Update Firmware update with media (CD-ROM or USB flash memory) or via the Internet
Appendix
Appendix
A-1
Appendix Software License Notice
Software License Notice
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
■ Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or
not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Software License Notice
A-2
■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the
Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say,
a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term modification.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program
a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with
a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-3
Software License Notice
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do
one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable.
However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-
free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
Software License Notice
A-4
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose
any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of
our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-5
Software License Notice
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
■ Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages — typically libraries — of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or
the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on
the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for
certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Software License Notice
A-6
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason
we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs
must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C
Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system,
as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form
executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library
(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-7
Software License Notice
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each
copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License
along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a
work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make
any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is
not a library.
Software License Notice
A-8
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope
of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses
the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if
the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file
is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this
object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the
Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work
for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that
the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the
work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the
Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer
system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-9
Software License Notice
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user
the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already
sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and
utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and
of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same
work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-
free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
Software License Notice
A-10
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-11
Software License Notice
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
This file contains the copying permission notices for various files in the GNU C Library distribution
that have copyright owners other than the Free Software Foundation. These notices all require
that a copy of the notice be included in the accompanying documentation and be distributed with
binary distributions of the code, so be sure to include this file along with any binary distributions
derived from the GNU C Library.
All code incorporated from 4.4 BSD is distributed under the following license:
Copyright © 1991 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. [This condition was removed.]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
expat
glibc
Software License Notice
A-12
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The DNS resolver code, taken from BIND 4.9.5, is copyrighted both by UC Berkeley and by Digital
Equipment Corporation. The DEC portions are under the following license:
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The Sun RPC support (from rpcsrc-4.0) is covered by the following license:
Copyright © 1984, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that
this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part.
Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute
it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR
ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special,
indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
The following CMU license covers some of the support code for Mach, derived from Mach 3.0:
Mach Operating System
Copyright © 1991, 1990, 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby
granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of
the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both
notices appear in supporting documentation.
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-13
Software License Notice
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS “AS IS” CONDITION.
CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to
Software Distribution Coordinator
School of Computer Science
Carnegie Mellon University
Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890
or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU any improvements or extensions that they make and
grant Carnegie Mellon the rights to redistribute these changes.
The file if_ppp.h is under the following CMU license:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The following license covers the files from Intel’s “Highly Optimized Mathematical Functions for
Itanium” collection:
Intel License Agreement
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
Software License Notice
A-14
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The files inet/getnameinfo.c and sysdeps/posix/getaddrinfo.c are copyright © by Craig Metz and
are distributed under the following license:
The Inner Net License, Version 2.00
The author(s) grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are
met:
0. If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for
redistribution (check the version message and/or README), you are not permitted to
redistribute that version of the software in any way or form.
1. All terms of the all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed.
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
4. [The copyright holder has authorized the removal of this clause.]
5. Neither the name(s) of the author(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
If these license terms cause you a real problem, contact the author.
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this libcap release may be used and distributed:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
libcap
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-15
Software License Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ìAS
ISî AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
libupnp
Software License Notice
A-16
Copyright Notice
jpg “Clone me,” says Dolly sheepishly
Last update: 02:45 UTC Tuesday, June 27, 2006
The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol
Version 4 Distribution. Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice
applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file.
Copyright © David L. Mills 1992-2006
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in
all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The University of
Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose. It is
provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices,
this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is
distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision
or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE
SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission.
Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.
ntp
openldap
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-17
Software License Notice
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights
Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses.
In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-cor[email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
openssl
Software License Notice
A-18
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the
parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or
textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
7. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
8. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
9. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related :-).
10. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]om)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed.
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license
[including the GNU Public License.]
Software License Notice
Appendix
A-19
Software License Notice
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this Linux-PAM release may be distributed:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
The definitive version of this document should be available at
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.
Copyright © 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly,
Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van
der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George
Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M.
Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich
Wales, Mike White
This software is provided “as is,” without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or
consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
pam
unzip
Software License Notice
A-20
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer,
and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a
standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been
removed from the binary or disabled.
3. Altered versions — including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versions — must be
plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. Such
altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases — including, but
not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further
prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and “MacZip” for its own source and binary releases.
© 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal
documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library
has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog
history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the
distribution of modified source versions.
zlib
A-21
Appendix MIDI Data Format
MIDI Data Format
If you are familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music software with computer-
generated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control your Disklavier.
Messages include those that can be received by the piano part and/or those that can be received by an
ESBL part. Messages that can be transmitted as well as received are shown as “transmitted.”
1. CHANNEL MESSAGES
1.1 Key On / Key Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Piano Part reception note range = A-1~C7 : C3=60
ESBL part reception note range = C-2~G8
Velocity range = 1~127 (Only the Key On velocity is received)
1.2 Control Change
1.2.1 Bank Select
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
0 Bank Select MSB 0: Normal,
63: User voice,
64: SFX,
126: SFX kit,
127: Drum
32 Bank Select LSB 0...127
You can select the Voice banks with MSB and LSB numbers.
MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the play mode.
In XG mode, MSB numbers select Voice type (Normal Voice or
Drum Voice), and LSB number select Voice banks.
In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select Voice
banks.
(See Normal Voice List Drum Voice List.)
A new bank selection will not become effective until the next
Program Change message is received.
1.2.2 Modulation
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
1 Modulation 0...127
1.2.3 Portamento Time
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
5 Portamento Time 0...127
When the parameter 1.2.9 Portamento = ON, values will adjust
the speed of pitch change.
A setting of 0 - minimum portamento time, and 127 - maximum
portamento time.
1.2.4 Data Entry
(ESBL Part)
Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by
RPN/NRPN.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
6Data Entry MSB 0...127
38 Data Entry LSB 0...127
Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB.
1.2.5 Main Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
7 Main Volume 0...127
1.2.6 Pan
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
10 Pan 0...127
1.2.7 Expression
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
11 Expression 0...127
1.2.8 Hold1
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
64 Hold1 0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
1.2.9 Portamento
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
65 Portamento 0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
1.2.10 Sostenuto
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
66 Sostenuto 0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
1.2.11 Soft Pedal
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
67 Soft Pedal 0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
1.2.12 Harmonic Content
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the resonance set for each Voice.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
71 Harmonic Content 0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound.
Depending on the Voice, the effective range may be narrower
than the range available for adjustment.
1.2.13 Release Time
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the envelope release time set for each
Voice.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
72 Release Time 0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
1.2.14 Attack Time
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the envelope attack time set for each
Voice.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
73 Attack Time 0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
1.2.15 Brightness
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each
Voice.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
74 Brightness 0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
1.2.16 Portamento Control
(ESBL Part)
Messages which apply a portamento between the currently-
sounding note and the subsequent note.
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
84 Portamento Control 0...127
1.2.17 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
91 Effect1 Depth 0...127
MIDI Data Format
A-22
1.2.18 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
93 Effect3 Depth 0...127
1.2.19 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
94 Effect4 Depth 0...127
1.2.20 Data Increment / Decrement (for RPN)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
96 RPN Increment 0...127
97 RPN Decrement 0...127
1.2.21 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
98 NRPN LSB 0...127
99 NRPN MSB 0...127
First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the
parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry to set
the value of the specified parameter.
* Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel subsequent
data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change.
Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH,
7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result.
The following NRPN number can be received.
NRPN Data entry
MSB LSB MSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
$01 $08 $mm Vibrato Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $09 $mm Vibrato Depth
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $0A $mm Vibrato Delay
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $20 $mm Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $21 $mm Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $63 $mm EG Attack Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $64 $mm EG Decay Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$01 $66 $mm EG Release Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$14 $rr $mm Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$15 $rr $mm Drum Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$16 $rr $mm Drum EG Attack
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$17 $rr $mm Drum EG Decay Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
Applies to both Decay1 and 2.
$18 $rr $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$19 $rr $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Fine
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$1A $rr $mm Drum Instrument Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
$1C $rr $mm Drum Instrument Pan
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (random, left -
center - right)
rr : drum instrument note number
$1D $rr $mm Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 -max)
rr : drum instrument note number
$1E $rr $mm Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
$1F $rr $mm Drum Instrument Variation Send
Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
MSB 14H- 1FH (for Drum) is valid only if the Multi Part
parameter PART MODE = DRUMS 1 or DRUMS2 for that
channel. (If PART MODE = DRUM, no values will be changed.)
1.2.22 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl# Parameter Data Range
100 RPN LSB 0...127
101 RPN MSB 0...127
The following RPN numbers can be received.
RPN Data entry
MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
00H 00H mmH — Pitch Bend Sensitivity
mm:00-18H (0-24 chromatic steps)
Assignable in chromatic steps up to 2
octaves
Default : 02H
LSB value is ignored.
00H 01H mmH 11H Fine Tuning
mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64-0-+63)
00H 02H mmH — Coarse Tuning
mm: 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - +24
chromatic steps)
LSB value is ignored.
7FH 7FH — — RPN null
Cancels RPN and NRPN numbers
1.2.23 Channel Mode Messages
The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.
2nd byte 3rd byte
120 0 All Sound Off
121 0 Reset All Controllers
123 0 All Note Off
124 0 Omni Off
125 0 Omni On
126 0 ~ 16 Mono
127 0 Poly
1.2.23.1 All Sound Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
ESBL part;
Terminates all sounds currently sounding on the specified
channel. However, the status of channel messages such as
Note On and Hold On is maintained.
Piano Part;
The status of channel messages is not maintained.
1.2.23.2 Reset All Controllers
(ESBL Part)
The values of the following controllers will be reset to the
defaults.
CONTROLLER VALUE
Pitch Bend Change ±O (center)
Channel Aftertouch 0 (off)
Polyphonic Aftertouch 0 (off)
Modulation 0 (off)
Expression 127 (max)
Hold l 0 (off)
Portamento 0 (off)
Sostenuto 0 (off)
Soft Pedal 0 (off)
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-23
Portamento Control cancels the Portamento Source Key
Number that was received
RPN number not specified; internal data
will not change
NRPN number not specified; internal data
will not change
1.2.23.3 All Note Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Terminates all notes currently on for the specified channel.
However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue
sounding until these are turned off.
1.2.23.4 Omni Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.
1.2.23.5 Omni On
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.
1.2.23.6 Mono
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds on message is
received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 -
16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m =
1).
1.2.23.7 Poly
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message
is received. and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode
(Mode 3).
1.2.24 Local Control
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
0;Off Disklavier keyboard does not play the internal voices.
127;On
1.3 Program Change
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Messages for Voice selection.
With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic
Voice numbers, but also variation Voice bank numbers.
1.4 Pitch Bend
(ESBL Part)
When Multi Part Parameter Rcv PITCH BEND CHANGE=OFF,
pitch bend for that part is not received.
1.5 Channel Aftertouch
(ESBL Part)
1.6 Polyphonic Aftertouch
(ESBL Part) (PianoPart) (transmitted)
Applying further pressure on the key does not output “key
aftertouch” information. Instead, key position is transmitted as
additional information.
2. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
2.1 Parameter Change
The Disklavier receives the following parameter change
messages.
[UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) Master Volume
[UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) General MIDI Mode On
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System on
2) XG System Data parameter change
3) Multi Effect1 Data parameter change
4) Multi Part Data parameter change
5) Drums Setup Data parameter change
[OTHER]
1) Master tuning
2) TG300 System Data Parameter change
3) TG300 Multi Effect Data parameter change
4) TG300 Multi Part Data parameter change
2.1.2 Universal Realtime Messages
2.1.2.1 Master Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01111111 7F = Universal Real Time
01111111 7F = ID of target device
00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
0sssssss *SS = Volume LSB
0ttttttt TT = Volume MSB
11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive
or
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01111111 7F = Universal Real Time
0xxxnnnn XN = Device Number, xxx = don’t care
00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
0sssssss SS = Volume LSB
0ttttttt TT = Volume MSB
11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive
When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the
System Parameter MASTER VOLUME.
* “SS” is the hexadecimal expression of Osssssss; same as for
“tt”, “aa”, etc.
2.1.3 Universal Non-Realtime Messages
2.1.3.1 General MIDI Mode On
(ESBL Part)
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01111110 7E = Universal Non-Real Time
01111111 7F = ID of target device
00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive
or
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01111110 7E = Universal Non-Real Time
0xxxnnnn XN = Device Number, xxx = don’t care
00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive
When General MIDI Mode On is received. the play mode will be
changed to XG mode.
When this happens, the ESBL part will receive the MIDI
messages which compatible with GM System Level 1, and
consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this messag, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message.
2.1.4 XG Native Parameter Change
(ESBL Part)
With the Parameter Change messages as listed below, you can
change the characteristic of a Voice, such as by Effect Type or
effect parameter, transpose, tuning, and others.
11110000 F0 Exclusive status
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
0001nnnn 1n Device Number
01001100 4C XG Model ID
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low
0ddddddd ddddddd Data
||
11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
* Any number is OK since the device number for the Disklavier
is fixed to “All.”
MIDI Data Format
A-24
For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate
number of data bytes.
When sending the parameter change messages consecutively, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval (if the time base is 480. ca 5
unit) between the messages.
2.1.4.1 XG System On
(ESBL Part)
11110000 F0 Exclusive status
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
0001nnnn 1N Device Number
01001100 4C XG Model ID
0aaaaaaa 00 Address High
0aaaaaaa 00 Address Mid
0aaaaaaa 7E Address Low
00000000 00 Data
11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
When this data is received. the Disklavier will switch to XG
mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and
XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select
messages can be received.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message
2.1.4.2 XG System Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.
2.1.4.3 Multi Effect1 Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.
2.1.4.4 Multi Part Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.
2.1.4.5 Drums Setup Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.
If a Drum Setup Reset parameter change message is received, the
Drum Setup parameter values will be initialized.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter
values to be initialized.
2.1.5 Other parameter changes
2.1.5.1 Master Tuning
(ESBL Part)
11110000 F0 Exclusive status
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
0001nnnn 1n Device Number
00100111 27 Model ID
00110000 30 Sub ID2
00000000 00
00000000 00
0mmmmmmm mm Master Tune MSB
0lllllll ll Master Tune LSB
0ccccccc cc
11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
This message simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels.
2.2 Bulk Dump
(ESBL Part)
The Disklavier receives the following bulk dump data.
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System Data
2) Multi Effect1 Data
3) Multi Part Data
4) Drums Setup Data
[QS300 NATIVE]
1) QS300 User Normal Voice Data
2.2.1 XG Native Bulk Dump
11110000 F0 Exclusive status
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
0000nnnn 0n Device Number
01001100 4C XG Model ID
0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount
0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low
0ddddddd dd Data
||
||
0ccccccc ccccccc Checksum
11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
For the Address and Byte Count, refer to the supplementary
tables.
The Checksum is the value that results in a value of 0 for the
lower 7 bits when the Start Address, Byte Count, plus the
Checksum itself are added.
2.2.1.1 XG System Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.
2.2.1.2 Multi Effect1 Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.
2.2.1.3 Multi Part Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.
2.2.1.4 Drums Setup Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.
2.2.2 QS300 Native Bulk Dump
11110000 F0 Exclusive status
01000011 43 YAMAHA ID
0000nnnn 0n Device Number
01001101 4B QS300 Model ID
0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount
0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid
0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low
0ddddddd dd Data
||
||
0ccccccc ccccccc Checksum
11110111 F7 End of Exclusive
2.2.2.1 QS300 User Normal Voice Data bulk damp
(ESBL Part)
See tables <2-1> and <2-2>.
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-25
3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
3.1 Active Sensing
a) Transmission
Transmitted.
b) Reception
Once FE has been received. if no MIDI data is subsequently
received for longer than an interval of approximately
300msec. the Disklavier will perform the same function as
when ALL SOUNDS OFF. ALL NOTES OFF, and RESET
ALL CONTROLLERS messages are received, and will then
return to a status in which FE is not monitored.
<Table 1-1>
Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4C [XG]
<Table 1-2>
MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) [XG]
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value
(H) (H) (H) (H)
00 00 00 4 0000-07FF MASTER TUNE -102.4 - +102.3 [cent] 00 04 00 00
1st bit3-0bit15-12 -400
2nd bit3-0bit11-8
3rd bit3-0bit7-4
4th bit3-0bit3-0
04 1 00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME 0 - 127 7F
05 1 00 - 7F not used
06 1 28 - 58 TRANSPOSE -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
7D n DRUM SETUP RESET n=Drum setup number
7E 00 XG SYSTEM ON 00=XG system ON (receive only)
7F 00 ALL PARAMETER RESET 00=ON (receive only)
TOTAL SIZE 07
<Table 1-3>
MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) [XG]
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value
(H) (H) (H) (H)
02 01 00 2 00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB see Effect Type List 01(=HALL1)
00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00
02 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 see Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type
03 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 ” ”
04 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 ” ”
05 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 ” ”
06 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 ” ”
07 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 ” ”
08 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 ” ”
09 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8 ” ”
0A 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 ” ”
0B 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10 ” ”
0C 1 00-7F REVERB RETURN -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40
0D 1 01-7F REVERB PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40
egnahCretemaraP
sserddA
)H()M()L(noitpircseD
METSYSGX000000metsyS
0000D7teseRputesmurD
0000E7nOmetsySGX
0000F7teseRretemara
PllA
1TCEFFE201000)noitairaV,surohC,breveR(1tceffE
TRAPITLUM8000001traPitluM
:
80F00061traPitluM
MURD0381001puteSmurD
0381002
puteSmurD
sserddAretemaraP
n3B00031rebmuneton
n3C00041rebmuneton
::
n3B50019rebmuneton
------->
n: Drum setup number (0, 1)
MIDI Data Format
A-26
TOTAL SIZE 0E
02 01 10 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 see Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type
11 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12 ” ”
12 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13 ” ”
13 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14 ” ”
14 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15 ” ”
15 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16 ” ”
TOTAL SIZE 6
02 01 20 2 00-7F CHORUS TYPE MSB see Effect Type List 41 (=CHORUS1)
00-7F CHORUS TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00
22 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1 see Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus Type
23 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2 ” ”
24 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3 ” ”
25 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4 ” ”
26 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5 ” ”
27 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6 ” ”
28 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7 ” ”
29 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 ” ”
2A 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 ” ”
2B 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 ” ”
2C 1 00-7F CHORUS RETURN -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40
2D 1 01-7F CHORUS PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40
2E 1 00-7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB -dB...0dB... +6dB(0...64...127) 00
TOTAL SIZE 0F
02 01 30 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 see Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus Type
31 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12 ” ”
32 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13 ” ”
33 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14 ” ”
34 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15 ” ”
35 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16 ” ”
TOTAL SIZE 6
02 01 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB see Effect Type List 05 (=DELAY L, C, R)
00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00
42 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB see Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB ” ”
44 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB ” ”
46 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB ” ”
48 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB ” ”
4A 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB ” ”
4C 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB ” ”
4E 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB ” ”
50 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB ” ”
52 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB ” ”
54 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB ” ”
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB ” ”
56 1 00-7F VARIATION RETURN - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40
57 1 01-7F VARIATION PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40
58 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00
59 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00
5A 1 00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION 0:INSERTION, 1:SYSTEM 00
5B 1 00-0F,7F VARIATION PART Part1...16(0...15) 7F
0FF (127)
5C 1 00-7F MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64 - +63 40
5D 1 00-7F BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64 - +63 40
5E 1 00-7F CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64 - +63 40
5F 1 00-7F AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64 - +63 40
60 1 00-7F AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64 - +63 40
TOTAL SIZE 21
02 01 70 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 see Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type
71 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12 ” ”
72 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 ” ”
73 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 ” ”
74 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 ” ”
75 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16 ” ”
TOTAL SIZE 6
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-27
<Table 1-4>
MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) [XG]
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value
(H) (H) (H) (H)
08 nn 00 1 00 - 20 ELEMENT RESERVE 0 - 32 part10=0, other =2
nn 01 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB 0 - 127 part10=7F, other=0
nn 02 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB 0 - 127 00
nn 03 1 00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER 1 - 128 00
nn 04 1 00 - 0F, 7F Rcv CHANNEL 1 - 16,OFF part no.
nn 05 1 00 - 01 MONO/POLY MODE 0:MONO 01
1:POLY
nn 06 1 00 - 02 SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON ASSIGN 0:SINGLE 1 (all part)
1:MULTI part10=2, other=0
2:INST (for DRUM)
nn 07 1 00 - 03 PART MODE 0:NORMAL 00 (other than Part10)
1:DRUM 02 (Part10)
2-3:DRUMS1 - 2
nn 08 1 28 - 58 NOTE SHIFT -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
nn 09 2 00 - FF DETUNE -12.8 - +12.7 [Hz] 08 00
nn 0A 1st bit3-0bit7-4 (80)
2nd bit3-0bit3-0
nn 0B 1 00 - 7F VOLUME 0 - 127 64
nn 0C 1 00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH 0 - 127 40
nn 0D 1 00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET 0 - 127 40
nn 0E 1 00 - 7F PAN 0/random, 1/L63-64/C-127/R63 40
nn 0F 1 00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT LOW C-2 - G8 00
nn 10 1 00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT HIGH C-2 - G8 7F
nn 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 7F
nn 12 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 00
nn 13 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND 0 - 127 40
nn 14 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND 0 - 127 00
nn 15 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO RATE -64 - +63 40
nn 16 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO DEPTH -64 - +63 40 (drum part ignores)
nn 17 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO DELAY -64 - +63 40 (drum part ignores)
nn 18 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY -64 - +63 40
nn 19 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE -64 - +63 40
nn 1A 1 00 - 7F EG ATTACK TIME -64 - +63 40
nn 1B 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY TIME -64 - +63 40
nn 1C 1 00 - 7F EG RELEASE TIME -61 - +63 40
nn 1D 1 28 - 58 MW PITCH CONTROL -24 -+24 [semitones] 40
nn 1E 1 00 - 7F MW FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 1F 1 00 - 7F MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 20 1 00 - 7F MW LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 0A
nn 21 1 00 - 7F MW LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 22 1 00 - 7F MW LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 23 1 28 - 58 BEND PITCH CONTROL -24 - +24 [semitones] 42
nn 24 1 00 - 7F BEND FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 25 1 00 - 7F BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 26 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH +100 - +100 [%] 40
nn 27 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH +100 - +100 [%] 40
nn 28 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH +100 - +100 [%] 40
TOTAL SIZE 29
nn 30 1 00 - 01 Rcv PITCH BEND 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 31 1 00 - 01 Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT) 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 32 1 00 - 01 Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 33 1 00 - 01 Rcv CONTROL CHANGE 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 34 1 00 - 01 Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT) 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 35 1 00 - 01 Rcv NOTE MESSAGE 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 36 1 00 - 01 Rcv RPN 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 37 1 00 - 01 Rcv NRPN 0/OFF, 1/ON XG=01, GM=00
nn 38 1 00 - 01 Rcv MODULATION 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 39 1 00 - 01 Rcv VOLUME 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3A 1 00 - 01 Rcv PAN 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3B 1 00 - 01 Rcv EXPRESSION 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3C 1 00 - 01 Rcv HOLD1 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3D 1 00 - 01 Rcv PORTAMENTO 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3E 1 00 - 01 Rcv SOSTENUTO 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 3F 1 00 - 01 Rcv SOFT PEDAL 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
nn 40 1 00 - 01 Rcv BANK SELECT 0/OFF,1/ON XG=01, GM=00
nn 41 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C -64 - +63 [cent] 40
MIDI Data Format
A-28
nn 42 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C# -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 43 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 44 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D# -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 45 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING E -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 46 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 47 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F# -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 48 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 49 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G# -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 4A 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 4B 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A# -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 4C 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING B -64 - +63 [cent] 40
nn 4D 1 28 - 58 CAT PITCH CONTROL -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
nn 4E 1 00 - 7F CAT FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 4F 1 00 - 7F CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 50 1 00 - 7F CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 51 1 00 - 7F CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 52 1 00 - 7F CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 53 1 28 - 58 PAT PITCH CONTROL -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
nn 54 1 00 - 7F PAT FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 55 1 00 - 7F PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 56 1 00 - 7F PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 57 1 00 - 7F PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 58 1 00 - 7F PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 59 1 00 - 5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER 0 - 95 10
nn 5A 1 28 - 58 AC1 PITCH CONTROL -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
nn 5B 1 00 - 7F AC1 FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 5C 1 00 - 7F AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 5D 1 00 - 7F AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 5E 1 00 - 7F AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 5F 1 00 - 7F AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 60 1 00 - 5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER 0 - 95 11
nn 61 1 28 - 58 AC2 PITCH CONTROL -24 - +24 [semitones] 40
nn 62 1 00 - 7F AC2 FILTER CONTROL -9600 - +9450 [cent] 40
nn 63 1 00 - 7F AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL -64 - +63 40
nn 64 1 00 - 7F AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 65 1 00 - 7F AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 66 1 00 - 7F AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 127 00
nn 67 1 00 - 01 PORTAMENTO SWITCH 0/OFF, 1/ON 00
nn 68 1 00 - 7F PORTAMENTO TIME 0 - 127 00
nn 69 1 00 - 7F PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL -64 -+63 40
nn 6A 1 00 - 7F PITCH EG ATTACK TIME -64 - +63 40
nn 6B 1 00 - 7F PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL -64 - +63 40
nn 6C 1 00 - 7F PITCH EG RELEASE TIME -64 - +63 40
nn 6D 1 01 - 7F VELOCITY LIMIT LOW 1 - 127 01
nn 6E 1 01 - 7F VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH 1 - 127 7F
TOTAL SIZE 3F
nn = Part Number (0:1Part, 1:2Part, 2:3Part, ..., 15:16Part)
For the DRUM PART, the following parameters have no effect.
• SOFT PEDAL • PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
• BANK SELECT LSB • PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
• MONO/POLY • PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
• SCALE TUNING • PITCH EF RELEASE TIME
• PORTAMENTO • POLY AFTER TOUCH
<Table 1-5>
MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP) [XG]
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
(H) (H) (H) (H)
3n rr 00 1 00 - 7F PITCH COARSE -64 - +63 40
3n rr 01 1 00 - 7F PITCH FINE -64 - +63 [cent] 40
3n rr 02 1 00 - 7F LEVEL 0 - 127 Depends on the note
3n rr 03 1 00 - 7F ALTERNATE GROUP 0/OFF, 1 - 127 ”
3n rr 04 1 00 - 7F PAN 0/random, 1/L63 - 64/C - 127/R63 ”
3n rr 05 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND 0 - 127 ”
3n rr 06 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 ”
3n rr 07 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND 0 - 127 7F
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-29
3n rr 08 1 00 - 01 KEY ASSIGN 0/SINGLE, 1/MULTI 00
3n rr 09 1 00 - 01 Rcv NOTE OFF 0/OFF, 1/ON Depends on the note
3n rr 0A 1 00 - 01 Rcv NOTE ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 01
3n rr 0B 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY -64 - +63 40
3n rr 0C 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE -64 - +63 40
3n rr 0D 1 00 - 7F EG ATTACK RATE -64 - +63 40
3n rr 0E 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY1 RATE -64 - +63 40
3n rr 0F 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY2 RATE -64 - +63 40
TOTAL SIZE 10
[Note]
n: Drum number (0 - 1)
rr: note number (0D - 5B)
When XG system on or GM mode on messages are received, all Drum Setup parameters are initialized.
The Drum Setup Reset message can be used to initialized each Drum Setup parameter.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter values to be initialized.
<Table 2-1>
Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4B [QS300]
<Table 2-2>
MIDI Bulk Dump table (USER NORMAL VOICE) [QS300]
Address Size Data Parameter Description Default
(H) (H) (H) (H)
[Common]
11 nn 00 17D 20-7E Voice Name
:
07
08 not used
:”
0A ”
0B 01-03 Element Switch 1:Element 1 on, 2:Element 2 on, 3:Element 1 and 2 on
0C 00-7F Voice Level
0D not used
:”
3C ”
[Element 1]
3D 00-7F Wave Number High bit13-bit7
3E 00-7F Wave Number Low bit6-bit0
3F 00-7F Note Limit Low
40 00-7F Note Limit High
41 00-7F Velocity Limit Low
42 00-7F Velocity Limit High
43 00-01 Filter EG Velocity Curve
44 00-02 LFO Wave Select 0:saw, 1:tri, 2:S&H
45 00-01 LFO Phase Initialize 0:OFF, 1:ON
46 00-3F LFO Speed
47 00-7F LFO Delay
48 00-7F LFO Fade Time
49 00-3F LFO PMD Depth
4A 00-0F LFO CMD Depth
4B 00-1F LFO AMD Depth
4C 20-60 Note Shift
4D 0E -72 Detune
4E 00-05 Pitch Scaling 0:100%, 1:50%, 2:20%, 3:10%, 4:5%, 5:0%
4F 00-7F Pitch Scaling Center Note
50 00-03 Pitch EG Depth 0:1/2oct, 1:1oct, 2:2oct, 3:4oct
51 39-47 Velocity PEG Level Sensitivity
52 39-47 Velocity PEG Rate Sensitivity
53 39-47 PEG Rate Scaling
54 00-7F PEG Rate Scaling Center Note
55 00-3F PEG Rate 1
56 00-3F PEG Rate 2
57 00-3F PEG Rate 3
pmuDkluB
sserddAnoitpircseD
)H()M()L(
RESU1100001ecioVlamroNresU
LAMRON:
ECIOV00F10023ecioVlamroNresU
MIDI Data Format
A-30
58 00-3F PEG Rate 4
59 00-7F PEG Level 0
5A 00-7F PEG Level 1
5B 00-7F PEG Level 2
5C 00-7F PEG Level 3
5D 00-7F PEG Level 4
5E 00-3F Filter Resonance
5F 00-07 Velocity Sensitivity
60 00-7F Cutoff Frequency
61 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Break Point 1
62 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Break Point 2
63 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Break Point 3
64 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Break Point 4
65 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Offset 1
66 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Offset 2
67 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Offset 3
68 00-7F Cutoff Scaling Offset 4
69 39-47 Velocity FEG Level Sensitivity
6A 39-47 Velocity FEG Rate Sensitivity
6B 39-47 FEG Rate Scaling
6C 00-7F FEG Rate Scaling Center Note
6D 00-3F FEG Rate 1
6E 00-3F FEG Rate 2
6F 00-3F FEG Rate 3
70 00-3F FEG Rate 4
71 00-7F FEG Level 0
72 00-7F FEG Level 1
73 00-7F FEG Level 2
74 00-7F FEG Level 3
75 00-7F FEG Level 4
76 00-7F Element Level
77 00-7F Level Scaling Break Point 1
78 00-7F Level Scaling Break Point 2
79 00-7F Level Scaling Break Point 3
7A 00-7F Level Scaling Break Point 4
7B 00-7F Level Scaling Offset 1
7C 00-7F Level Scaling Offset 2
7D 00-7F Level Scaling Offset 3
7E 00-7F Level Scaling Offset 4
7F 00-06 Velocity Curve
80 00-0F Pan 0 (Left)-14 (Right), 15:Scaling
81 39-47 AEG Rate Scaling
82 00-7F AEG Scaling Center Note
83 00-0F AEG Key on Delay
84 00-7F AEG Attack Rate
85 00-7F AEG Decay 1 Rate
86 00-7F AEG Decay 2 Rate
87 00-7F AEG Release Rate
88 00-7F AEG Decay 1 Level
89 00-7F AEG Decay 2 Level
8A 00-7F Address Offset High bit13-bit7
8B 00-7F Address Offset Low bit6-bit0
8C 39-47 Resonance Sensitivity
[Element 2]
8D same as [Element 1]
:”
DC ”
[Element 3]
DD not used
:”
12C ”
12D [Element 4]
:not used
17C ”
TOTAL SIZE 17D ”
nn=Voice Number (00-1F)
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-31
Bank Select MSB = 000, LSB = Bank Number
Voice names in bold typeface are voices that can be selected in the Disklavier.
The Disklavier can produce all the voices listed below, but can only display bank 0 voices.
XG Normal Voice List
Bank 0 : (GM)
Bank 1 : Key Scale Planning
Bank 3 : Stereo
Bank 6 : Single
Bank 8 : Slow
Bank 12 : Fast Decay
Bank 14 : Double Attack
Bank 16 : Bright
Bank 17 : Bright
Bank 18 : Dark
Bank 19 : Dark
Bank 20 : Resonant
Bank 24 : Attack
Bank 24 : Release
Bank 27 : Reso Sweep
Bank 28 : Muted
Bank 32 : Detune 1
Bank 33 : Detune 2
Bank 34 : Detune 3
Bank 35 : Octave 1
Bank 36 : Octave 2
Bank 37 : 5th 1
Bank 38 : 5th 2
Bank 39 : Bend
Bank 40 : Tutti
Bank 41 : Tutti
Bank 42 : Tutti
Bank 43 : Velo-Switch
Bank 45 : Velo-Xfade
Bank 64 : Other wave
Bank 65 : Other wave
Bank 66 : Other wave
Bank 67 : Other wave
Bank 68 : Other wave
Bank 69 : Other wave
Bank 70 : Other wave
Bank 71 : Other wave
Bank 72 : Other wave
Bank 96 : Other wave
Bank 97 : Other wave
Bank 98 : Other wave
Bank 99 : Other wave
Bank 100 : Other wave
Bank 101 : Other wave
Organ 17 0 DrawOrgn 1
32 DetDrwOr 2
33 60sDrOr1 2
34 60sDrOr2 2
35 70sDrOr1 2
36 DrawOrg2 2
37 60sDrOr3 2
38 EvenBar 2
40 16+2"2/3 2
64 Organ Ba 1
65 70sDrOr2 2
66 CheezOrg 2
67 DrawOrg3 2
18 0 PercOrgn 1
24 70sPcOr1 2
32 DetPrcOr 2
33 LiteOrg 2
37 PercOrg2 2
19 0 RockOrgn 2
64 RotaryOr 2
65 SloRotar 2
66 FstRotar 2
20 0 ChrchOrg 2
32 ChurOrg3 2
35 ChurOrg2 2
40 NotreDam 2
64 OrgFlute 2
65 TrmOrgFl 2
21 0 ReedOrgn 1
40 Puff Org 2
22 0 Acordion 2
32 AccordIt 2
23 0 Harmnica 1
32 Harmo 2 2
24 0 TangoAcd 2
64 TngoAcd2 2
Guitar 25 0 NylonGtr 1
16 NylonGt2 1
25 NylonGt3 2
43 VelGtHrm 2
96 Ukulele 1
26 0 SteelGtr 1
16 SteelGt2 1
35 12StrGtr 2
40 Nyln&Stl 2
41 Stl&Body 2
96 Mandolin 2
27 0 Jazz Gtr 1
18 MelloGtr 1
32 JazzAmp 2
28 0 CleanGtr 1
32 ChorusGt 2
29 0 Mute.Gtr 1
40 FunkGtr1 2
41 MuteStlG 2
43 FunkGtr2 2
45 Jazz Man 1
30 0 Ovrdrive 1
43 Gt.Pinch 2
31 0 Dist.Gtr 1
40 FeedbkGt 2
41 FeedbGt2 2
32 0 GtrHarmo 1
65 GtFeedbk 1
66 GtrHrmo2 1
Instrument
Group
Program
#
Bank
#
Voice Name
Ele-
ment
Program
#
Voice Name
Ele-
ment
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Bass 33 0 Aco.Bass 1
40 JazzRthm 2
45 VXUprght 2
34 0 FngrBass 1
18 FingrDrk 2
27 FlangeBa 2
40 Ba&DstEG 2
43 FngrSlap 2
45 FngBass2 2
65 ModAlem 2
35 0 PickBass 1
28 MutePkBa 1
36 0 Fretless 1
32 Fretles2 2
33 Fretles3 2
34 Fretles4 2
96 SynFretl 2
97 Smooth 2
37 0 SlapBas1 1
27 ResoSlap 1
32 PunchThm 2
38 0 SlapBas2 1
43 VeloSlap 2
39 0 SynBass1 1
18 SynBa1Dk 1
20 FastResB 1
24 AcidBass 1
35 Clv Bass 2
40 TeknoBa 2
64 Oscar 2
65 SqrBass 1
66 RubberBa 2
96 Hammer 2
40 0 SynBass2 2
6 MelloSB1 1
12 Seq Bass 2
18 ClkSynBa 2
19 SynBa2Dk 1
32 SmthBa 2 2
40 ModulrBa 2
41 DX Bass 2
64 X WireBa 2
Strings 41 0 Violin 1
8 SlowVln 1
42 0 Viola 1
43 0 Cello 1
44 0 Contrabs 1
45 0 Trem.Str 1
8 SlowTrStr 1
40 Susp Str 2
46 0 Pizz.Str 1
47 0 Harp 1
40 YangChin 2
48 0 Timpani 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Ensemble 49 0 Strings1 1
3 S.Strngs 2
8 SlowStr 1
24 ArcoStr 2
35 60sStrng 2
40 Orchestr 2
41 Orchstr2 2
42 TremOrch 2
45 VeloStr 2
50 0 Strings2 1
3 S.SlwStr 2
8 LegatoSt 2
40 Warm Str 2
41 Kingdom 2
64 70s Str 1
65 Str Ens3 1
51 0 Syn.Str1 2
27 ResoStr 2
64 Syn Str4 2
65 SS Str 2
52 0 Syn.Str2 2
53 0 ChoirAah 1
3 S.Choir 2
16 Ch.Aahs2 2
32 MelChoir 2
40 ChoirStr 2
54 0 VoiceOoh 1
55 0 SynVoice 1
40 SynVox2 2
41 Choral 2
64 AnaVoice 1
56 0 Orch.Hit 2
35 OrchHit2 2
64 Impact 2
Brass 57 0 Trumpet 1
16 Trumpet2 1
17 BriteTrp 2
32 WarmTrp 2
58 0 Trombone 1
18 Trmbone2 2
59 0 Tuba 1
16 Tuba 2 1
60 0 Mute.Trp 1
61 0 Fr.Horn 2
6 FrHrSolo 2
32 FrHorn2 1
37 HornOrch 2
62 0 BrasSect 1
35 Tp&TbSec 2
40 BrssSec2 2
41 HiBrass 2
42 MelloBrs 2
63 0 SynBras1 2
12 QuackBr 2
20 RezSynBr 2
24 PolyBrss 2
27 SynBras3 2
32 JumpBrss 2
45 AnaVelBr 2
64 AnaBrss1 2
64 0 SynBras2 1
18 Soft Brs 2
40 SynBras4 2
41 ChorBrss 2
45 VelBras2 2
64 AnaBras2 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Piano 1 0 GrandPno 1
1 GrndPnoK 1
18 MelloGrP 1
40 PianoStr 2
41 Dream 2
20BritePno 1
1 BritPnoK 1
30E.Grand 2
1 ElGrPnoK 2
32 Det.CP80 2
40 ElGrPno1 2
41 ElGrPno2 2
40HnkyTonk 2
1 HnkyTnkK 2
50E.Piano1 2
1 El.Pno1K 1
18 MelloEP1 2
32 Chor.EP1 2
40 HardEl.P 2
45 VX El.P1 2
64 60sEl.P 1
60E.Piano2 2
1 El.Pno2K 1
32 Chor.EP2 2
33 DX Hard 2
34 DXLegend 2
40 DX Phase 2
41 DX+Analg 2
42 DXKotoEP 2
45 VX El.P2 2
70Harpsi. 1
1 Harpsi.K 1
25 Harpsi.2 2
35 Harpsi.3 2
80Clavi. 2
1 Clavi. K 1
27 ClaviWah 2
64 PulseClv 1
65 PierceCl 2
Chromatic 9 0 Celesta 1
Percussion 10 0 Glocken 1
11 0 MusicBox 2
64 Orgel 2
12 0 Vibes 1
1 VibesK 1
45 HardVibe 2
13 0 Marimba 1
1 MarimbaK 1
64 SineMrmb 2
97 Balafon2 2
98 Log Drum 2
14 0 Xylophon 1
15 0 TubulBel 1
96 ChrchBel 2
97 Carillon 2
16 0 Dulcimer 1
35 Dulcimr2 2
96 Cimbalom 2
97 Santur 2
Instrument
Group
Program
#
Bank
#
Voice Name
Ele-
ment
MIDI Data Format
A-32
Bank Select
MSB = 064, LSB = 000
SFX Voice
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Reed 65 0 SprnoSax 1
66 0 Alto Sax 1
40 Sax Sect 2
43 HyprAlto 2
67 0 TenorSax 1
40 BrthTnSx 2
41 SoftTenr 2
64 TnrSax 2 1
68 0 Bari.Sax 1
69 0 Oboe 2
70 0 Eng.Horn 1
71 0 Bassoon 1
72 0 Clarinet 1
Pipe 73 0 Piccolo 1
74 0 Flute 1
75 0 Recorder 1
76 0 PanFlute 1
77 0 Bottle 2
78 0 Shakhchi 2
79 0 Whistle 1
80 0 Ocarina 1
Synth Lead 81 0 SquareLd 2
6 Square 2 1
8 LMSquare 2
18 Hollow 1
19 Shmoog 2
64 Mellow 2
65 SoloSine 2
66 SineLead 1
82 0 Saw.Lead 2
6 Saw 2 1
8 ThickSaw 2
18 DynaSaw 1
19 DigiSaw 2
20 Big Lead 2
24 HeavySyn 2
25 WaspySyn 2
40 PulseSaw 2
41 Dr. Lead 2
45 VeloLead 2
96 Seq Ana 2
83 0 CaliopLd 2
65 Pure Pad 2
84 0 Chiff Ld 2
64 Rubby 2
85 0 CharanLd 2
64 DistLead 2
65 WireLead 2
86 0 Voice Ld 2
24 SynthAah 2
64 VoxLead 2
87 0 Fifth Ld 2
35 Big Five 2
88 0 Bass &Ld 2
16 Big&Low 2
64 Fat&Prky 2
65 SoftWurl 2
Synth Pad 89 0 NewAgePd 2
64 Fantasy2 2
90 0 Warm Pad 2
16 ThickPad 2
17 Soft Pad 2
18 SinePad 2
64 Horn Pad 2
65 RotarStr 2
91 0 PolySyPd 2
64 PolyPd80 2
65 ClickPad 2
66 Ana Pad 2
67 SquarPad 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Synth Pad 92 0 ChoirPad 2
64 Heaven2 2
66 Itopia 2
67 CC Pad 2
93 0 BowedPad 2
64 Glacier 2
65 GlassPad 2
94 0 MetalPad 2
64 Tine Pad 2
65 Pan Pad 2
95 0 Halo Pad 2
96 0 SweepPad 2
20 Shwimmer 2
27 Converge 2
64 PolarPad 2
66 Celstial 2
Synth 97 0 Rain 2
Effects 45 ClaviPad 2
64 HrmoRain 2
65 AfrcnWnd 2
66 Caribean 2
98 0 SoundTrk 2
27 Prologue 2
64 Ancestrl 2
99 0 Crystal 2
12 SynDrCmp 2
14 Popcorn 2
18 TinyBell 2
35 RndGlock 2
40 GlockChi 2
41 ClearBel 2
42 ChorBell 2
64 SynMalet 1
65 SftCryst 2
66 LoudGlok 2
67 XmasBell 2
68 VibeBell 2
69 DigiBell 2
70 AirBells 2
71 BellHarp 2
72 Gamelmba 2
100 0 Atmosphr 2
18 WarmAtms 2
19 HollwRls 2
40 NylonEP 2
64 NylnHarp 2
65 Harp Vox 2
66 AtmosPad 2
67 Planet 2
101 0 Bright 2
64 FantaBel 2
96 Smokey 2
102 0 Goblins 2
64 GobSyn 2
65 50sSciFi 2
66 Ring Pad 2
67 Ritual 2
68 ToHeaven 2
70 Night 2
71 Glisten 2
96 BelChoir 2
103 0 Echoes 2
8 EchoPad2 2
14 Echo Pan 2
64 EchoBell 2
65 Big Pan 2
66 SynPiano 2
67 Creation 2
68 Stardust 2
69 Reso Pan 2
104 0 Sci-Fi 2
64 Starz 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Ethnic 105 0 Sitar 1
32 DetSitar 2
35 Sitar 2 2
96 Tambra 2
97 Tamboura 2
106 0 Banjo 1
28 MuteBnjo 1
96 Rabab 2
97 Gopichnt 2
98 Oud 2
107 0 Shamisen 1
108 0 Koto 1
96 T. Koto 2
97 Kanoon 2
109 0 Kalimba 1
110 0 Bagpipe 2
111 0 Fiddle 1
112 0 Shanai 1
64 Shanai2 1
96 Pungi 1
97 Hichriki 2
Percussive 113 0 TnklBell 2
96 Bonang 2
97 Gender 2
98 Gamelan 2
99 S.Gamlan 2
100 Rama Cym 2
101 AsianBel 2
114 0 Agogo 2
115 0 SteelDrm 2
97 GlasPerc 2
98 ThaiBell 2
116 0 WoodBlok 1
96 Castanet 1
117 0 TaikoDrm 1
96 Gr.Cassa 1
118 0 MelodTom 2
64 Mel Tom2 1
65 Real Tom 2
66 Rock Tom 2
119 0 Syn.Drum 1
64 Ana Tom 1
65 ElecPerc 2
120 0 RevCymbl 1
Sound 121 0 FretNoiz 2
Effects 122 0 BrthNoiz 2
123 0 Seashore 2
124 0 Tweet 2
125 0 Telphone 1
126 0 Helicptr 1
127 0 Applause 1
128 0 Gunshot 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
65 Tel.Dial 1
66 DoorSqek 1
67 Door Slam 1
68 Scratch 1
69 Scratch 2 2
70 WindChm 1
71 Telphon2 1
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81 CarEngin 1
82 Car Stop 1
83 Car Pass 1
84 CarCrash 1
85 Siren 2
86 Train 1
87 Jetplane 2
88 Starship 2
89 Burst 2
90 Coaster 2
91 SbMarine 2
92
93
94
95
96
97 Laughing 1
98 Scream 1
99 Punch 1
100 Heart 1
101 FootStep 1
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113 MchinGun 1
114 LaserGun 2
115 Xplosion 2
116 FireWork 2
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Ele-
ment
Program
#
1 CuttngNz 1
2 CttngNz2 2
3
4 Str Slap 1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 Fl.KClik 1
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 Rain 1
34 Thunder 1
35 Wind 1
36 Stream 2
37 Bubble 2
38 Feed 2
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49 Dog 1
50 Horse 1
51 Bird 2 1
52
53
54
55 Ghost 2
56 Maou 2
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
MSB=064
LSB=000
Ele-
ment
MSB=064
LSB=000
Program
#
: No Sound
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-33
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = ooo
TG300B Normal Voice List
Program
#
Voice Name
Ele-
ment
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Organ 17 0 DrawOrgn 1
1 70sDrOr1 2
8 DetDrwOr 2
9 70sDrOr2 2
16 60sDrOr1 2
17 60sDrOr2 2
18 60sDrOr3 2
24 CheezOrg 2
32 DrawOrg2 2
33 EvenBar 2
40 Organ Ba 1
126 Slap-2 2
127 harpsi1 1
18 0 PercOrgn 1
1 70sPcOr1 2
8 DetPrcOr 2
32 PercOrg2 2
126 Slap-3 2
127 harpsi2 2
19 0 RockOrgn 2
8 RotaryOr 2
16 SloRotar 2
24 FstRotar 2
126 Slap-4 2
127 harpsi3 1
20 0 ChrchOrg 2
8 ChurOrg2 2
16 ChurOrg3 2
24 OrgFlute 2
32 TrmOrgFl 2
126 Slap-5 2
127 clavi1 1
21 0 ReedOrgn 1
126 Slap-6 2
127 clavi2 1
22 0 Acordion 2
8 AccordIt 2
126 Slap-7 2
127 clavi3 1
23 0 Harmnica 1
1 Harmo 2 2
126 Slap-8 2
127 celesta1 1
24 0 TangoAcd 2
126 Finger-1 1
127 celesta2 1
Guitar 25 0 NylonGtr 1
8 Ukulele 1
16 NylonGt3 2
24 VelGtHrm 2
32 NylonGt2 1
40 LequintG 1
126 Finger-2 2
127 synbras1 2
26 0 SteelGtr 1
8 12StrGtr 2
9 Nyln&Stl 2
16 Mandolin 2
32 SteelGt2 1
126 Picked-1 1
127 synbras2 2
27 0 Jazz Gtr 1
1 MelloGtr 1
8 PdlSteel 1
126 Picked-2 2
127 synbras3 2
28 0 CleanGtr 1
8 ChorusGt 2
126 FretlsBs 1
127 synbras4 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Guitar 29 0 Mute.Gtr 1
8 FunkGtr1 2
16 FunkGtr2 2
126 A-Bass 2
127 synbass1 1
30 0 Ovrdrive 1
126 Choir-1 1
127 synbass2 1
31 0 Dist.Gtr 1
8 FeedbkGt 2
9 FeedbGt2 2
126 Choir-2 1
127 synbass3 2
32 0 GtrHarmo 1
8 GtFeedbk 1
126 Choir-3 2
127 synbass4 1
Bass 33 0 Aco.Bass 1
126 Choir-4 2
127 newagepd 2
34 0 FngrBass 1
1 FngBass2 2
126 Strngs-1 2
127 synharmo 2
35 0 PickBass 1
8 MutePkBa 1
126 Strngs-2 2
127 choir pd 2
36 0 Fretless 1
1 Fretles2 2
2 Fretles3 2
3 Fretles4 2
4 SynFretl 2
5 Smooth 2
126 Strngs-3 2
127 bowed pd 2
37 0 SlapBas1 1
8 ResoSlap 1
126 Strngs-4 2
127 soundtrk 2
38 0 SlapBas2 1
126 E-Organ1 2
127 atmosphr 2
39 0 SynBass1 1
1 SynBa1Dk 1
8 AcidBass 1
9 FastResB 1
10 TeknoBa 2
16 ResoBass 1
126 E-Organ2 2
127 syn warm 2
40 0 SynBass2 2
1 ClkSynBa 2
2 ModulrBa 2
3 Seq Bass 2
8 DX Bass 2
9 X WireBa 2
16 RubberBa 2
17 SynBa2Dk 1
18 MelloSB1 1
19 SmthBa 2 2
126 E-Organ3 2
127 synfunny 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Strings 41 0 Violin 1
8 SlowVln 1
126 E-Organ4 2
127 synecho1 2
42 0 Viola 1
126 E-Organ5 2
127 rain 2
43 0 Cello 1
126 E-Organ6 2
127 synoboe 2
44 0 Contrabs 1
126 E-Organ7 2
127 synecho2 2
45 0 Trem.Str 1
8 SlowTrStr 1
9 Susp Str 2
126 E-Organ8 2
127 synsolo 2
46 0 Pizz.Str 1
126 E-Organ9 2
127 synrdorg 2
47 0 Harp 1
126 SoftTP-1 1
127 synbell 1
48 0 Timpani 1
126 SoftTP-2 1
127 squareld 2
Ensemble 49 0 Strings1 1
1 Slow Str 1
8 Orchestr 2
9 Orchstr2 2
10 TremOrch 2
11 ChoirStr 2
16 S.Strngs 2
24 VeloStr 2
126 TP/TRB-1 1
127 strsect1 2
50 0 Strings2 1
1 70s Str 1
8 LegatoSt 2
9 Warm Str 2
10 S.SlwStr 2
126 TP/TRB-2 1
127 strsect2 2
51 0 Syn.Str1 2
1 Syn Str4 2
126 TP/TRB-3 1
127 strsect3 2
52 0 Syn.Str2 2
126 TP/TRB-4 1
127 pizz.str 1
53 0 ChoirAah 1
8 S.Choir 2
9 MelChoir 2
32 Ch.Aahs2 2
126 TP/TRB-5 2
127 violin 1 2
54 0 VoiceOoh 1
126 TP/TRB-6 2
127 violin 2 1
55 0 SynVoice 1
8 SynVox2 2
126 Sax-1 1
127 cello 1 1
56 0 Orch.Hit 2
1 OrchHit2 2
8 Impact 2
16 LoFiRave 2
126 Sax-2 1
127 cello 2 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Piano 1 0 GrandPno 1
8 GrndPnoK 1
16 MelloGrP 1
126 A-Piano1 2
127 a.piano1 1
2 0 BritePno 1
8 BritPnoK 1
126 A-Piano2 2
127 a.piano2 1
3 0 E.Grand 2
1 ElGrPno1 2
2 ElGrPno2 2
8 ElGrPnoK 2
126 A-Piano3 2
127 a.piano3 1
4 0 HnkyTonk 2
8 HnkyTnkK 2
126 A-Piano4 2
127 e.piano1 1
5 0 E.Piano1 2
8 Chor.EP1 2
16 VX El.P1 2
24 60sEl.P 1
25 HardEl.P 2
26 MelloEP1 2
32 El.Pno1K 1
126 A-Piano5 1
127 e.piano2 1
6 0 E.Piano2 2
8 Chor.EP2 2
16 VX El.P2 2
24 DX Hard 2
32 El.Pno2K 1
126 A-Piano6 1
127 e.piano3 1
7 0 Harpsi. 1
8 Harpsi.3 2
16 Harpsi.K 1
24 Harpsi.2 2
126 A-Piano7 1
127 e.piano4 1
8 0 Clavi. 2
8 Clavi. K 1
126 E-Piano1 2
127 hnkytnk 2
Chromatic 9 0 Celesta 1
Percussion 126 E-Piano2 2
127 e.organ1 2
10 0 Glocken 1
126 E-Piano3 2
127 e.organ2 2
11 0 MusicBox 2
126 A-Guitr1 1
127 e.organ3 1
12 0 Vibes 1
1 HardVibe 2
8 VibesK 1
126 A-Guitr2 2
127 e.organ4 1
13 0 Marimba 1
8 MarimbaK 1
17 Balafon2 2
24 Log Drum 2
126 A-Guitr3 2
127 pipeorg1 2
14 0 Xylophon 1
126 E-Guitr1 2
127 pipeorg2 2
15 0 TubulBel 1
8 ChrchBel 2
9 Carillon 2
126 E-Guitr2 1
127 pipeorg3 2
16 0 Dulcimer 1
1 Dulcimr2 2
8 Cimbalom 2
126 Slap-1 2
127 acordion 2
Instrument
Group
Program
#
Bank
#
Voice Name
Ele-
ment
MIDI Data Format
A-34
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Brass 57 0 Trumpet 1
1 Trumpet2 1
24 BriteTrp 2
25 WarmTrp 2
126 Sax-3 1
127 contrabs 1
58 0 Trombone 1
1 Trmbone2 2
126 Sax-4 2
127 harp 1 1
59 0 Tuba 1
1 Tuba 2 1
126 Brass-1 1
127 harp 2 1
60 0 Mute.Trp 1
126 Brass-2 1
127 guitar 1 1
61 0 Fr.Horn 2
1 FrHorn2 2
8 FrHrSolo 1
16 HornOrch 2
126 Brass-3 2
127 guitar 2 1
62 0 BrasSect 1
8 BrssSec2 2
126 Brass-4 2
127 elecgtr1 2
63 0 SynBras1 2
1 PolyBrss 2
8 SynBras3 2
9 QuackBr 2
16 AnaBrss1 2
126 Brass-5 2
127 elecgtr2 2
64 0 SynBras2 1
1 Soft Brs 2
8 SynBras4 2
16 AnaBrss2 2
17 VelBras2 2
126 Orch-Hit 1
127 sitar 1
Reed 65 0 SprnoSax 1
127 a.bass 1 1
66 0 Alto Sax 1
8 HyprAlto 2
127 a.bass 2 1
67 0 TnrSax 2 1
8 BrthTnSx 2
127 e.bass 1 1
68 0 Bari.Sax 1
127 e.bass 2 1
69 0 Oboe 2
127 slapbas1 1
70 0 Eng.Horn 1
127 slapbas2 1
71 0 Bassoon 1
127 fretles1 1
72 0 Clarinet 1
127 fretles2 1
Pipe 73 0 Piccolo 1
127 flute1 1
74 0 Flute 1
127 flute2 1
75 0 Recorder 1
127 piccolo1 1
76 0 PanFlute 1
127 piccolo2 2
77 0 Bottle 2
127 recorder 1
78 0 Shakhchi 2
127 panpipes 2
79 0 Whistle 1
127 sax1 2
80 0 Ocarina 1
127 sax2 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Synth Lead 81 0 SquareLd 2
1 Square 2 1
2 Hollow 1
3 Mellow 2
4 SoloSine 2
5 Shmoog 2
6 LMSquare 2
8 SineLead 1
127 sax3 1
82 0 Saw.Lead 2
1 Saw 2 1
2 PulseSaw 2
3 ThickSaw 2
4 Big Lead 2
5 VeloLead 2
6 HeavySyn 2
7 DynaSaw 1
8 Dr. Lead 2
16 WaspySyn 2
127 sax4 1
83 0 CaliopLd 2
2 Pure Pad 2
127 clarint1 1
84 0 Chiff Ld 2
127 clarint2 1
85 0 CharanLd 2
8 DistLead 2
127 oboe 1
86 0 Voice Ld 2
127 eng.horn 1
87 0 Fifth Ld 2
1 Big Five 2
127 bassoon 1
88 0 Bass &Ld 2
1 Big&Low 2
2 Fat&Prky 2
127 harmnica 1
Synth Pad 89 0 NewAgePd 2
1 Fantasy2 2
127 trumpet1 1
90 0 Warm Pad 2
1 ThickPad 2
2 Horn Pad 2
3 RotarStr 2
4 Soft Pad 2
127 trumpet2 1
91 0 PolySyPd 2
1 PolyPd80 2
127 trmbone1 2
92 0 ChoirPad 2
1 Heaven2 2
127 trmbone2 2
93 0 BowedPad 2
127 fr.horn1 1
94 0 MetalPad 2
1 Tine Pad 2
2 Pan Pad 2
127 fr.horn2 2
95 0 Halo Pad 2
127 tuba 2
96 0 SweepPad 2
1 PolarPad 2
8 Converge 2
9 Shwimmer 2
10 Celstial 2
127 brssect1 1
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Synth 97 0 Rain 2
Effects 1 HrmoRain 2
2 AfrcnWnd 2
8 ClaviPad 2
127 brssect2 2
98 0 SoundTrk 2
1 Ancestrl 2
2 Prologue 2
127 vibe1 1
99 0 Crystal 2
1 SynMalet 1
2 SftCryst 2
3 RndGlock 2
4 LoudGlok 2
5 GlockChi 2
6 ClearBel 2
7 XmasBell 2
8 VibeBell 2
9 DigiBell 2
16 ChorBell 2
17 AirBells 2
18 BellHarp 2
19 Gamelmba 2
127 vibe2 1
100 0 Atmosphr 2
1 WarmAtms 2
2 NylnHarp 2
3 Harp Vox 2
4 HollwRls 2
5 NylonEP 2
6 AtmosPad 2
127 symallet 1
101 0 Bright 2
127 maletwin 2
102 0 Goblins 2
1 GobSyn 2
2 50sSciFi 2
127 glocken 2
103 0 Echoes 2
1 EchoBell 2
2 Echo Pan 2
3 EchoPad2 2
4 Big Pan 2
6 SynPiano 2
127 tubulbel 1
104 0 Sci-Fi 2
1 Starz 2
127 xylophon 1
Ethnic 105 0 Sitar 1
1 Sitar 2 2
2 DetSitar 2
8 Tambra 2
16 Tamboura 2
127 marimba 2
106 0 Banjo 1
1 MuteBnjo 1
8 Rabab 2
16 Gopichnt 2
24 Oud 2
127 koto 1
107 0 Shamisen 1
127 sho 2
108 0 Koto 1
8 T. Koto 2
16 Kanoon 2
127 shakhchi 2
109 0 Kalimba 1
127 whistle1 2
110 0 Bagpipe 2
127 whistle2 1
111 0 Fiddle 1
127 bottle 2
112 0 Shanai 1
1 Shanai2 1
8 Pungi 1
16 Hichriki 2
127 breath 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
Program
#
Ele-
ment
Percussive 113 0 TnklBell 2
8 Bonang 2
9 Gender 2
10 Gamelan 2
11 S.Gamlan 2
16 Rama Cym 2
127 timpani 1
114 0 Agogo 2
127 melotom 1
115 0 SteelDrm 2
127 deepsnar 1
116 0 WoodBlok 1
8 Castanet 1
127 e.perc1 1
117 0 TaikoDrm 1
8 Gr.Cassa 1
127 e.perc2 1
118 0 MelodTom 2
1 Real Tom 2
8 Mel Tom2 1
9 Rock Tom 2
127 taiko 1
119 0 Syn.Drum 1
8 Ana Tom 1
9 ElecPerc 2
127 taikorim 1
120 0 RevCymbl 1
127 cymbal 2
Sound 121 0 FretNoiz 2
Effects 1 CuttngNz 1
2 Str Slap 1
3 CttngNz2 2
127 castanet 1
122 0 BrthNoiz 2
1 Fl.KClik 1
127 triangle 1
123 0 Seashore 2
1 Rain 1
2 Thunder 1
3 Wind 1
4 Stream 2
5 Bubble 2
127 orchehit 1
124 0 Tweet 2
1 Dog 1
2 Horse 1
3 Bird 2 1
127 telphone 1
125 0 Telphone 1
1 Tel.Dial 1
2 DoorSqek 1
3 DoorSlam 1
4 Scratch 1
5 WindChm 1
6 Scratch2 2
127 bird 1
126 0 Helicptr 1
1 CarEngin 1
2 Car Stop 1
3 Car Pass 1
4 CarCrash 1
5 Siren 2
6 Train 1
7 Jetplane 2
8 Starship 2
9 Burst 2
16 Coaster 2
127 jam 1
127 0 Applause 1
1 Laughing 1
2 Scream 1
3 Punch 1
4 Heart 1
5 FootStep 1
127 efctwatr 2
128 0 Gunshot 1
1 MchinGun 1
2 LaserGun 2
3 Xplosion 2
127 efctjngl 2
Instrument
Group
Bank
#
Voice Name
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-35
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = 000
Drum kit names in bold typeface are those that can be selected in the Disklavier.
XG Drum Voice List
Bank 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126
Program # 1 2 9 17 25 26 33 41 49 1 2
Note# Note Key Alternate
Standard Kit Standard2 Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2
off assign
13 C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
15 D# -1 Hi Q
16 E -1 Whip Slap
17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
18 F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
19 G -1 Finger Snap
20 G# -1 Click Noise
21 A -1 Metronome Click
22 A# -1 Metronome Bell
23 B -1 Seq Click L
24 C 0 Seq Click H
25 C# 0 Brush Tap
26 D 0 O Brush Swirl L
27 D# 0 Brush Slap
28 E 0 O Brush Swirl H Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2
30 F# 0 Castanet Hi Q Hi Q
31 G 0 Snare L Snare L 2 SD Rock M Snare M SD Rock H Brush Slap L
32 G# 0 Sticks
33 A 0 Bass Drum L Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M Bass Drum L2
34 A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
35 B 0 Bass Drum M Bass Drum M 2 Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock BD Analog L Gran Cassa
36 C 1 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H 2 BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Cassa Mute Guitar Cutting Noise Dial Tone
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Guitar Cutting Noise 2 Door Creaking
38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock SD Rock L Analog Snare L Brush Slap M Marching Sn M Door Slam
39 D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch
40 E 1 Snare H Snare H 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H Brush Tap H Marching Sn H Scratch 2
41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Windchime
42 F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Telephone Ring2
43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2
44 G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2
45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3
46 A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open
47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4
48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Hand Cym.Open L
50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Closed L
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal FL.Key Click Engine Start
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Tire Screech
54 F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Crash
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Siren
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Open H Train
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Jetplane
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Closed H Starship
60 C 3 Bongo H Burst Noise
61 C# 3 Bongo L Coaster
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H SbMarine
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M
64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L
65 F 3 Timbale H
66 F# 3 Timbale L
67 G 3 Agogo H
68 G# 3 Agogo L Rain Laughing
69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Screaming
70 A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Wind Punch
71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat
72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps
73 C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
74 D 4 O Guiro Long
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Claves
76 E 4 Wood Block H
77 F 4 Wood Block L
78 F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
80 G# 4 2 Triangle Mute
81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
82 A# 4 Shaker
83 B 4 Jingle Bell
84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
85 C# 5 Horse Gallop Laser Gun
86 D 5 Bird 2 Explosion
87 D# 5 FireWork
88 E 5
89 F 5
90 F# 5 Ghost
91 G 5 Maou
: Same as Standard kit
: No sound
MIDI Data Format
A-36
TG300B Drum Voice List
Program # 1 9 17 25 26 33 41 49 57 128
Note# Note Alternate Standard Kit Room Kit Power Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Orchestra Kit SFX Set C/M Kit
assign
25 C# 0 Snare Roll
26 D 0 Finger Snap
27 D# 0 Hi Q Hi-Hat Closed
28 E 0 Whip Slap Hi-Hat Pedal
29 F 0 7 Scratch Push Hi-Hat Open
30 F# 0 7 Scratch Pull Ride Cymbal 1
31 G 0 Sticks
32 G# 0 Click Noise
33 A 0 Metronome Click
34 A# 0 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 Bass Drum M BD Jazz
36 C 1 Bass Drum H BD Power BD Electronic BD Analog H BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Cassa
37 C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick
38 D 1 Snare M SD Power SD Electronic Analog Snare L Brush Tap Concert SD
39 D# 1 Hand Clap Brush Slap Castanet High-Q
40 E 1 Snare H SD Power Brush Swirl Concert SD Slap SD Electro
41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Room Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Timpani F Scratch Push
42 F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Timpani F# Scratch Pull
43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Timpani G Sticks
44 G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Timpani G# Square Click Hi-Hat Open 1
45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Room Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Timpani A Metronome Click
46 A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Timpani A# Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open 2
47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Room Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Timpani B Guitar Fret Noise
48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Room Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Timpani C Guitar Cutting Down
49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Timpani C# Guitar Cutting Up
50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Room Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Timpani D Ac Bass Slap
51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Timpani D# FL.Key Click
52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Timpani E Laughing
53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Timpani F Screaming
54 F# 2 Tambourine Punch
55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Heartbeat
56 G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Footsteps 1
57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.1 Footsteps 2
58 A# 2 Vibraslap Applause
59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.2 Door Creaking
60 C 3 Bongo H Door Slam
61 C# 3 Bongo L Scratch
62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Windchime
63 D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M Engine Start
64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L Tire Screech
65 F 3 Timbale H Car Passing
66 F# 3 Timbale L Crash
67 G 3 Agogo H Siren
68 G# 3 Agogo L Train
69 A 3 Cabasa Jetplane
70 A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Helicopter
71 B 3 2 Samba Whistle H Starship
72 C 4 2 Samba Whistle L Gunshot
73 C# 4 3 Guiro Short Machine Gun Vibraslap
74 D 4 3 Guiro Long Laser Gun
75 D# 4 Claves Analog Claves Explosion
76 E 4 Wood Block H Dog Laughing
77 F 4 Wood Block L Horse Gallop Screaming
78 F# 4 4 Cuica Mute Bird Tweet Punch
79 G 4 4 Cuica Open Rain Heartbeat
80 G# 4 5 Triangle Mute Thunder Footsteps 1
81 A 4 5 Triangle Open Wind Footsteps 2
82 A# 4 Shaker Seashore Applause
83 B 4 Jingle Bell Stream Door Creaking
84 C 5 Bell Tree Bubble Door Slam
85 C# 5 Castanet Scratch
86 D 5 6 Surdo Mute Windchime
87 D# 5 6 Surdo Open
Engine Start
88 E 5 Applause Tire Screech
89 F 5 Car Passing
90 F# 5 Crash
91 G 5 Siren
92 G# 5 Train
93 A 5 Jetplain
94 A# 5 Helicopter
95 B 5 Starship
96 C 6 Gunshot
97 C# 6 Machine Gun
98 D 6 Laser Gun
99 D# 6 Explosion
100 E 6 Dog
101 F 6 Horse Gallop
102 F# 6 Bird Tweet
103 G 6 Rain
104 G# 6 Thunder
105 A 6 Wind
106 A# 6 Seashore
107 B 6 Stream
108 C 7 Bubble
: Same as Standard kit
: No sound
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-37
* MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal.
* LCB=0 is the basic effect type.
Effect Type List
Exclusive Effect Type Description
MSB LSB
REVERB
00 00 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
01 00 HALL1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
01 01 HALL2 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
02 00 ROOM1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
02 01 ROOM2 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
02 02 ROOM3 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
03 00 STAGE1 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
03 01 STAGE2 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
04 00 PLATE Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
10 00 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.
11 00 TUNNEL Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right.
13 00 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.
CHORUS
00 00 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
41 00 CHORUS1 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
41 01 CHORUS2 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
41 02 CHORUS3 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
41 08 CHORUS4 Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
42 00 CELESTE1 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 01 CELESTE2 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 02 CELESTE3 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 08 CELESTE4 Celeste with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
43 00 FLANGER1 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
43 01 FLANGER2 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
43 08 FLANGER3 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
VARIATION
00 00 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
01 00 HALL1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
01 01 HALL2 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
02 00 ROOM1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
02 01 ROOM2 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
02 02 ROOM3 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
03 00 STAGE1 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
03 01 STAGE2 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
04 00 PLATE Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
05 00 DELAY L, C, R A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center).
06 00 DELAY L, R A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided.
07 00 ECHO Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R.
08 00 CROSS DELAY A program that crosses the feedback of two delays.
09 00 EARLY REF1 An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
09 01 EARLY REF2 An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
0A 00 GATE REVERB A simulation of gated reverb.
0B 00 REVERSE GATE A program that simulates gated reverb played backwards.
14 00 KARAOKE 1 A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
14 01 KARAOKE 2 A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
14 02 KARAOKE 3 A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
41 00 CHORUS1 Conventional chorus program that add natural spaciousness.
41 01 CHORUS2 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
41 02 CHORUS3 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
41 08 CHORUS4 Chorus with stereo input.
42 00 CELESTE1 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 01 CELESTE2 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 02 CELESTE3 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
42 08 CELESTE4 Celeste with stereo input.
43 00 FLANGER1 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
43 01 FLANGER2 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
43 08 FLANGER3 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
44 00 SYMPHONIC A multi-phase version of CELESTE.
45 00 ROTARY SPEAKER A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use AC1 (assignable controller) etc. to control the speed of rotation.
46 00 TREMOLO An effect that cyclically modulates the volume.
47 00 AUTO PAN A program that cyclically moves that sound image to left and right, front and back.
48 00 PHASER1 Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound.
48 08 PHASER2 Phaser with stereo input.
49 00 DISTORTION Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound.
4A 00 OVER DRIVE Adds mild distortion to the sound.
4B 00 AMP SIMULATOR A simulation of a guitar amp.
4C 00 3BAND EQ (MONO) A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.
4D 00 2BAND EQ (STEREO) A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.
4E 00 AUTO WAH (LFO) Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah.
40 00 THRU Bypass without applying any effect.
MIDI Data Format
A-38
Effect Parameter List
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
HALL1, HALL2, ROOM 1, 2, 3, STAGE 1, 2, PLATE
1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4
2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3
5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E>R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
16
WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, BASEMENT
1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4
2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3
5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
6 Width 0.5~10.2m 0-37 table#11
7 Height 0.5~20.2m 0-73 table#11
8 Depth 0.5~30.2m 0-104 table#11
9 Wall Vary 0~30 0-30
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R~E=R~E>R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
16
DELAY L, C, R
1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
3 Cch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 Cch Level 0~127 0-127
7 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
DELAY L, R
1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
3 Feedback Delay1 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
4 Feedback Delay2 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
ECHO
1 Lch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3350
2
Lch Feedback Level
-63~+63 1-127
3 Rch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
4
Rch Feedback Level
-63~+63 1-127
5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
6 Lch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
7 Rch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
8 Delay2 Level 0~127 0-127
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
CROSS DELAY
1 L->R Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
2 R->L Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Input Select L, R, L&R 0-2
5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
EARLY REF1, EARLY REF2
1 Type
S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr
0-5
2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6
3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
4 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11 Liveness 0~10 0-10
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
14
15
16
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
1 Type TypeA, TypeB 0-1
2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6
3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
4 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11 Liveness 0~10 0-10
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
14
15
16
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
• : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-39
KARAOKE 1, 2, 3
1 Delay Time 0~127 0-127 table#7
2 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
3 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
14
15
16
CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4, CELESTE 1, 2, 3, 4
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO PM Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Delay Offset 0~127 0-127 table#2
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
14
15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1
16
FLANGER 1, 2, 3
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Delay Offset 0~63 0-63 table#2
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
14
LFO Phase Difference
-180~+180deg 4-124
15
16
SYMPHONIC
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Delay Offset 0~127 0-127 table#2
4
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11
12
13
14
15
16
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
ROTARY SPEAKER
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 •
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3
4
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
TREMOLO
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 •
2 AM Depth 0~127 0-127
3 PM Depth 0~127 0-127
4
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10
11
12
13
14 -180~+180deg 4-124
15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1
16
AUTO PAN
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 •
2 L/R Depth 0~127 0-127
3 F/R Depth 0~127 0-127
4 PAN Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R,
Lturn, Rturn, L/R 0-5
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PHASER1, PHASER2
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Phase Shift 0~127 0-127
4 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 •
11 Stage 3~10 3-10
12 Diffusion Mono/Stereo 0-1
13 LFO Phase Di -180~+180deg 4-124
14
15
16
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
• : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
MIDI Data Format
A-40
DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE
1 Drive 0~127 0-127 •
2
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
5 Output Level 0~127 0-127
6
7
EQ Mid Frequency
500Hz~10.0kHz 28-54 table#3
8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127
mild ~sharp
12
13
14
15
16
GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR
1 Drive 0~127 0-127 •
2 AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0-3
3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
4 Output Level 0~127 0-127
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127
mild ~sharp
12
13
14
15
16
3-BAND EQ
1 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
2
EQ Mid Frequency
500Hz~10.0kHz 28-54 table#3
3 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120
5 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
2-BAND EQ
1
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
2 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
3
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
4 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
EQ Mid Frequency
100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 table#3
12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120
14
15
16
AUTO WAH
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Cutoff Frequency 0~127 0-127 •
4 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120
5
6
EQ Low Frequency
50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8
EQ High Frequency
500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
No Parameter Range Value See
Table
Con-
trol
• : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
MIDI Data Format
Appendix MIDI Data Format
A-41
Effect Data Assign Table
Data Value
LFO Frequency (Hz)
Table#1
Data Value Data Value
0 0.00
1 0.04
2 0.08
3 0.13
4 0.17
5 0.21
6 0.25
7 0.29
8 0.34
9 0.38
10 0.42
11 0.46
12 0.51
13 0.55
14 0.59
15 0.63
16 0.67
17 0.72
18 0.76
19 0.80
20 0.84
21 0.88
22 0.93
23 0.97
24 1.01
25 1.05
26 1.09
27 1.14
28 1.18
29 1.22
30 1.26
31 1.30
32 1.35
33 1.39
34 1.43
35 1.47
36 1.51
37 1.56
38 1.60
39 1.64
40 1.68
41 1.72
42 1.77
43 1.81
44 1.85
45 1.89
46 1.94
47 1.98
48 2.02
49 2.06
50 2.10
51 2.15
52 2.19
53 2.23
54 2.27
55 2.31
56 2.36
57 2.40
58 2.44
59 2.48
60 2.52
61 2.57
62 2.61
63 2.65
64 2.69
65 2.78
66 2.86
67 2.94
68 3.03
69 3.11
70 3.20
71 3.28
72 3.37
73 3.45
74 3.53
75 3.62
76 3.70
77 3.87
78 4.04
79 4.21
80 4.37
81 4.54
82 4.71
83 4.88
84 5.05
85 5.22
86 5.38
87 5.55
88 5.72
89 6.06
90 6.39
91 6.73
92 7.07
93 7.40
94 7.74
95 8.08
96 8.41
97 8.75
98 9.08
99 9.42
100 9.76
101 10.10
102 10.80
103 11.40
104 12.10
105 12.80
106 13.50
107 14.10
108 14.80
109 15.50
110 16.20
111 16.80
112 17.50
113 18.20
114 19.50
115 20.90
116 22.20
117 23.60
118 24.90
119 26.20
120 27.60
121 28.90
122 30.30
123 31.60
124 33.00
125 34.30
126 37.00
127 39.70
Table#2
Data Value
Modulation Delay Offset (ms)
Data Value Data Value
0 0.0
1 0.1
2 0.2
3 0.3
4 0.4
5 0.5
6 0.6
7 0.7
8 0.8
9 0.9
10 1.0
11 1.1
12 1.2
13 1.3
14 1.4
15 1.5
16 1.6
17 1.7
18 1.8
19 1.9
20 2.0
21 2.1
22 2.2
23 2.3
24 2.4
25 2.5
26 2.6
27 2.7
28 2.8
29 2.9
30 3.0
31 3.1
32 3.2
33 3.3
34 3.4
35 3.5
36 3.6
37 3.7
38 3.8
39 3.9
40 4.0
41 4.1
42 4.2
43 4.3
44 4.4
45 4.5
46 4.6
47 4.7
48 4.8
49 4.9
50 5.0
51 5.1
52 5.2
53 5.3
54 5.4
55 5.5
56 5.6
57 5.7
58 5.8
59 5.9
60 6.0
61 6.1
62 6.2
63 6.3
64 6.4
65 6.5
66 6.6
67 6.7
68 6.8
69 6.9
70 7.0
71 7.1
72 7.2
73 7.3
74 7.4
75 7.5
76 7.6
77 7.7
78 7.8
79 7.9
80 8.0
81 8.1
82 8.2
83 8.3
84 8.4
85 8.5
86 8.6
87 8.7
88 8.8
89 8.9
90 9.0
91 9.1
92 9.2
93 9.3
94 9.4
95 9.5
96 9.6
97 9.7
98 9.8
99 9.9
100 10.0
101 11.1
102 12.2
103 13.3
104 14.4
105 15.5
106 17.1
107 18.6
108 20.2
109 21.8
110 23.3
111 24.9
112 26.5
113 28.0
114 29.6
115 31.2
116 32.8
117 34.3
118 35.9
119 37.5
120 39.0
121 40.6
122 42.2
123 43.7
124 45.3
125 46.9
126 48.4
127 50.0
Table#3
Data Value
EQ Frequency (Hz)
Data Value
0 THRU(20)
122
225
328
432
536
640
745
850
956
10 63
11 70
12 80
13 90
14 100
15 110
16 125
17 140
18 160
19 180
20 200
21 225
22 250
23 280
24 315
25 355
26 400
27 450
28 500
29 560
30 630
31 700
32 800
33 900
34 1.0k
35 1.1k
36 1.2k
37 1.4k
38 1.6k
39 1.8k
40 2.0k
41 2.2k
42 2.5k
43 2.8k
44 3.2k
45 3.6k
46 4.0k
47 4.5k
48 5.0k
49 5.6k
50 6.3k
51 7.0k
52 8.0k
53 9.0k
54 10.0k
55 11.0k
56 12.0k
57 14.0k
58 16.0k
59 18.0k
60
THRU(20.0k)
Table#4
Data Value
Reverb Time (ms)
Data Value
0 0.3
1 0.4
2 0.5
3 0.6
4 0.7
5 0.8
6 0.9
7 1.0
8 1.1
9 1.2
10 1.3
11 1.4
12 1.5
13 1.6
14 1.7
15 1.8
16 1.9
17 2.0
18 2.1
19 2.2
20 2.3
21 2.4
22 2.5
23 2.6
24 2.7
25 2.8
26 2.9
27 3.0
28 3.1
29 3.2
30 3.3
31 3.4
32 3.5
33 3.6
34 3.7
35 3.8
36 3.9
37 4.0
38 4.1
39 4.2
40 4.3
41 4.4
42 4.5
43 4.6
44 4.7
45 4.8
46 4.9
47 5.0
48 5.5
49 6.0
50 6.5
51 7.0
52 7.5
53 8.0
54 8.5
55 9.0
56 9.5
57 10.0
58 11.0
59 12.0
60 13.0
61 14.0
62 15.0
63 16.0
64 17.0
65 18.0
66 19.0
67 20.0
68 25.0
69 30.0
Table#5
Data Value
Delay Time (ms)
Data Value Data Value
0 0.1
1 1.7
2 3.2
3 4.8
4 6.4
5 8.0
6 9.5
7 11.1
8 12.7
9 14.3
10 15.8
11 17.4
12 19.0
13 20.6
14 22.1
15 23.7
16 25.3
17 26.9
18 28.4
19 30.0
20 31.6
21 33.2
22 34.7
23 36.3
24 37.9
25 39.5
26 41.0
27 42.6
28 44.2
29 45.7
30 47.3
31 48.9
32 50.5
33 52.0
34 53.6
35 55.2
36 56.8
37 58.3
38 59.9
39 61.5
40 63.1
41 64.6
42 66.2
43 67.8
44 69.4
45 70.9
46 72.5
47 74.1
48 75.7
49 77.2
50 78.8
51 80.4
52 81.9
53 83.5
54 85.1
55 86.7
56 88.2
57 89.8
58 91.4
59 93.0
60 94.5
61 96.1
62 97.7
63 99.3
64 100.8
65 102.4
66 104.0
67 105.6
68 107.1
69 108.7
70 110.3
71 111.9
72 113.4
73 115.0
74 116.6
75 118.2
76 119.7
77 121.3
78 122.9
79 124.4
80 126.0
81 127.6
82 129.2
83 130.7
84 132.3
85 133.9
86 135.5
87 137.0
88 138.6
89 140.2
90 141.8
91 143.3
92 144.9
93 146.5
94 148.1
95 149.6
96 151.2
97 152.8
98 154.4
99 155.9
100 157.5
101 159.1
102 160.6
103 162.2
104 163.8
105 165.4
106 166.9
107 168.5
108 170.1
109 171.7
110 173.2
111 174.8
112 176.4
113 178.0
114 179.5
115 181.1
116 182.7
117 184.3
118 185.8
119 187.4
120 189.0
121 190.6
122 192.1
123 193.7
124 195.3
125 196.9
126 198.4
127 200.0
Table#6
Data Value
Room Size (m)
Data Value
0 0.1
1 0.3
2 0.4
3 0.6
4 0.7
5 0.9
6 1.0
7 1.2
8 1.4
9 1.5
10 1.7
11 1.8
12 2.0
13 2.1
14 2.3
15 2.5
16 2.6
17 2.8
18 2.9
19 3.1
20 3.2
21 3.4
22 3.5
23 3.7
24 3.9
25 4.0
26 4.2
27 4.3
28 4.5
29 4.6
30 4.8
31 5.0
32 5.1
33 5.3
34 5.4
35 5.6
36 5.7
37 5.9
38 6.1
39 6.2
40 6.4
41 6.5
42 6.7
43 6.8
44 7.0
Table#7
Data Value
Delay Time (ms)
Data Value Data Value
0 0.1
1 3.2
2 6.4
3 9.5
4 12.7
5 15.8
6 19.0
7 22.1
8 25.3
9 28.4
10 31.6
11 34.7
12 37.9
13 41.0
14 44.2
15 47.3
16 50.5
17 53.6
18 56.8
19 59.9
20 63.1
21 66.2
22 69.4
23 72.5
24 75.7
25 78.8
26 82.0
27 85.1
28 88.3
29 91.4
30 94.6
31 97.7
32 100.9
33 104.0
34 107.2
35 110.3
36 113.5
37 116.6
38 119.8
39 122.9
40 126.1
41 129.2
42 132.4
43 135.5
44 138.6
45 141.8
46 144.9
47 148.1
48 151.2
49 154.4
50 157.5
51 160.7
52 163.8
53 167.0
54 170.1
55 173.3
56 176.4
57 179.6
58 182.7
59 185.9
60 189.0
61 192.2
62 195.3
63 198.5
64 201.6
65 204.8
66 207.9
67 211.1
68 214.2
69 217.4
70 220.5
71 223.7
72 226.8
73 230.0
74 233.1
75 236.3
76 239.4
77 242.6
78 245.7
79 248.9
80 252.0
81 255.2
82 258.3
83 261.5
84 264.6
85 267.7
86 270.9
87 274.0
88 277.2
89 280.3
90 283.5
91 286.6
92 289.8
93 292.9
94 296.1
95 299.2
96 302.4
97 305.5
98 308.7
99 311.8
100 315.0
101 318.1
102 321.3
103 324.4
104 327.6
105 330.7
106 333.9
107 337.0
108 340.2
109 343.3
110 346.5
111 349.6
112 352.8
113 355.9
114 359.1
115 362.2
116 365.4
117 368.5
118 371.7
119 374.8
120 378.0
121 381.1
122 384.3
123 387.4
124 390.6
125 393.7
126 396.9
127 400.0
Table#8
Data Value
Reverb Width; Depth; Height
Data Value Data Value
0 0.5
1 0.8
2 1.0
3 1.3
4 1.5
5 1.8
6 2.0
7 2.3
8 2.6
9 2.8
10 3.1
11 3.3
12 3.6
13 3.9
14 4.1
15 4.4
16 4.6
17 4.9
18 5.2
19 5.4
20 5.7
21 5.9
22 6.2
23 6.5
24 6.7
25 7.0
26 7.2
27 7.5
28 7.8
29 8.0
30 8.3
31 8.6
32 8.8
33 9.1
34 9.4
35 9.6
36 9.9
37 10.2
38 10.4
39 10.7
40 11.0
41 11.2
42 11.5
43 11.8
44 12.1
45 12.3
46 12.6
47 12.9
48 13.1
49 13.4
50 13.7
51 14.0
52 14.2
53 14.5
54 14.8
55 15.1
56 15.4
57 15.6
58 15.9
59 16.2
60 16.5
61 16.8
62 17.1
63 17.3
64 17.6
65 17.9
66 18.2
67 18.5
68 18.8
69 19.1
70 19.4
71 19.7
72 20.0
73 20.2
74 20.5
75 20.8
76 21.1
77 21.4
78 21.7
79 22.0
80 22.4
81 22.7
82 23.0
83 23.3
84 23.6
85 23.9
86 24.2
87 24.5
88 24.9
89 25.2
90 25.5
91 25.8
92 26.1
93 26.5
94 26.8
95 27.1
96 27.5
97 27.8
98 28.1
99 28.5
100 28.8
101 29.2
102 29.5
103 29.9
104 30.2
Mode 1 : OMNI ON. POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON. MONO : YES
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF. POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF. MONO
× : NO
Yamaha Disklavier
Model: E3
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
Date: 18-Mar-2011
Version: 1.00
Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic Default 1-16 1-16 Memorized
Channel Changed 1-16 1-16
Default 3 3
Mode Messages × 3, 4 (m=1) *2, *3
Altered **************** ×
Note 0-127 0-127
Number : True voice **************** 0-127
Velocity Note ON 9nH, v=1-127 v=1-127
Note OFF 8nH, v=0-127
After Key s *5
Touch Ch s × *1, *2
Pitch Bend × 0-24 semi *1, *2
0, 32 *1, *2 Bank Select
7, 11 *1
1, 5, 10 × *1, *2
6, 38 × *2 Data Entry
64 Hold1 (Sustain)
Control 65 × *2 Portament
66 *4 *2 Sostenuto
Change 67 Soft (Shift) Pedal
71-74, 84 × *2
91, 93, 94 × *2 Effect Depth
96-101 × *1,*2
Prog 0-127 0-127 *2
Change : True # ****************
System Exclusive
: Song Pos × ×
Common : Song Sel × ×
: Tune × ×
System : Clock × ×
Real Time : Commands × ×
Aux : All Sound OFF (120, 126, 127)
:
Reset All Cntrls
× (121)
: Local ON/OFF ×
: All Notes OFF (123-125)
Messages : Active Sense
: Reset × ×
Notes *1 = Received (transmitted) if switch is on.
*2 = Only ESBL Part can be recognized.
*3 =
m is always treated as 1 regardless of its
value.
*4 =
Transmit if this model has a Sostenuto Pedal.
*5 = Applying further pressure on the key does not output
key aftertouch information. Instead, key position is
transmitted as additional information.
Transcripción de documentos
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated on the safety instruction section. SEE BOTTOM OF ENCLOSURE OR LOWER FRONT PANEL FOR GRAPHIC SYMBOL MARKINGS The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes neccessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. HS YAMAHA CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. 92-469 1 PATENTS Model _________________________________________ Serial No. ______________________________________ Purchase Date __________________________________ IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING — When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Read these instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. the power cord from being walked on or 10. Protect pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. use attachments/accessories specified by the 11. Only manufacturer. only with the cart, stand, tripod, 12. Use bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. this apparatus during lightning storms or 13. Unplug when unused for long periods of time. all servicing to qualified service personnel. 14. Refer Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. product shall not be exposed to dripping or 15. This splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. not put burning items, such as candles, on the 16. Do apparatus. 92-469-DK 2 Do not place this product or any other objects on 17. the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. — To reduce the risk of fire or electric 18. WARNING shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. should be taken that objects do not fall and liq19. Care uids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. product, either alone or in combination with an 20. This amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Yamaha products may have benches and/or 21. Some accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part or the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. product shall be connected to a MAINS socket 22. This outlet with a protective earthing connection. product has a power switch for shutting off all 23. This system. The switch is located on the Power Supply Unit nearby the entrance of the AC cord. Note that the switch on the Controller does not shutdown all system. sure that the plug of the Power Supply Unit’s 24. Make power cable can easily be disconnected from the AC outlet as a measure of precaution. Battery – Danger of explosion if battery incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same type. Outlets for Speakers – Connect speakers of 2A/1A (confirm the indication to the outlets) or less of totals. Do not connect other products except speakers. – Consult Yamaha service technician when using the outlets outside the purchased area. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT: The wires in mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. The control unit is classified as a Class 1 laser product. One of the labels below is located on the inside of the CD drive unit. La unidad de control está clasificada como producto láser de Clase 1. Una de las etiquetas siguientes o similar está situada en el interior de la unidad de disco CD. Управляющий модуль классифицируется как лазерное изделие класса 1. Одна из приведенных ниже этикеток или подобная расположена на внутренней стороне привода CD. 控制器分类为第 1 类激光产品。下列标签中的一种位于 CD 驱动 装置的内侧。 控制器分類為第 1 類激光產品。下列標簽中的一種位于 CD 驅動 裝置的內側。 컨트롤 유닛은 1 등급 레이저 제품으로 분류됩니다 . 다음의 라벨 중의 하나가 CD 드라이브 유닛의 안쪽에 붙어 있습니다 . CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT APAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 EN60825 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 CAUTION—Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. PRECAUCIÓN—El emplo de controles o ajustes o la realización de procedimientos distintos a los especificados en este manual podrá resultar en una peligrosa exposición a la radiación. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ—Использование управления, регулировок или выполнение процедур, отличающихся от описанных в этом руководстве, может привести к опасному радиоактивному облучению. 注意 — 本操作说明书指定之外的控制器的使用、调整或操作 可能会导致危险的放射性照射。 注意 — 本操作說明書指定之外的控制器的使用、調整或操作 可能會導致危險的放射性照射。 주의 — 여기에 지정된 것 이외로 컨트롤을 사용하는 것 , 혹은 지정된 것 이외로 조정을 행하거나 , 절차를 실행하는 것은 위 험한 방사선에 노출되는 결과를 초래할 수도 있습니다 . Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Laser Diode Properties * Material: GaAIAs * Wavelength: 790 nm * Laser Output Power at the lens of the Laser Pick Up Unit: max. 0.2 mW Propiedades del diodo láser * Material: GaAIAs * Longitud de onda: 790 nm * Potencia de salida láser en el objetivo de la unidad Laser Pick Up: máx. 0.2 mW Свойства лазерного диода * Материал: GaAlAs * Длина волны: 790 нм * Мощность лазерного излучения на линзах звукоснимателя: макс. 0.2 мВт 激光二极管的性能 * 材料∶ GaAlAs * 波长∶ 790 nm * 激光拾波器透镜部的激光输出功率∶最大 0.2 mW Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. 激光二極管的性能 * 材料：GaAlAs * 波長：790 nm * 激光拾波器透鏡部的激光輸出功率：最大 0.2 mW 이 기기는 가정용 (B 급 ) 전자파적 합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적 으로 하며 , 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 . 레이저 다이오드 속성 * 재료 : GaAlAs * 파장 : 790 nm * 레이저 픽업 유닛 렌즈에서의 레이저 출력 : 최대 0.2 mW Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo y Baterías usadas Estos símbolos en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe significan que los productos electrónicos y eléctricos usados y las baterías usadas no deben ser mezclados con desechos hogareños corrientes. Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos y las baterías usadas, por favor llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional y las directivas 2002/96/EC y 2006/ 66/EC. Al disponer de estos productos y baterías correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo de los desechos. Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos y baterías, por favor contacte a su municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta en el cual usted adquirió los artículos. [Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea] Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte a su vendedor o proveedor para mayor información. [Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea] Estos símbolos sólo son válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos artículos, por favor contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte por el método correcto de disposición. Nota sobre el símbolo de la batería (ejemplos de dos símbolos de la parte inferior) Este símbolo podría ser utilizado en combinación con un símbolo químico. En este caso el mismo obedece a un requerimiento dispuesto por la Directiva para el elemento químico involucrado. Для инструментов с заземленным кабелем питания ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ! Электропитание/кабель питания Место установки • Подключайте только к электросети с соответствующим напряжением и защитным заземлением. Неправильное заземление может вызвать поражение электрическим током. • При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что используемая электрическая розетка легкодоступна. При возникновении какого-либо сбоя или неисправности немедленно отключите питание инструмента и отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Даже если питание устройства отключено, инструмент продолжает в минимальном количестве потреблять электроэнергию. Если инструмент не используется в течение длительного времени, отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Беречь от воды • Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в отверстия. Беречь от огня • Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет может упасть и вызвать пожар. Для инструментов с незаземленным кабелем питания ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ! Беречь от воды Место установки • Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в отверстия. • При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что используемая электрическая розетка легкодоступна. При возникновении какого-либо сбоя или неисправности немедленно отключите питание инструмента и отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Даже если питание устройства отключено, инструмент продолжает в минимальном количестве потреблять электроэнергию. Если устройство не используется в течение длительного времени, отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Беречь от огня • Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет может упасть и вызвать пожар. Для инструментов с блоком питания ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ! Беречь от воды Место установки • Не держите инструмент там, где он может попасть под дождь, рядом с водой, а также в сырых и влажных помещениях. Не ставьте на него емкости с жидкостью, которая может пролиться и попасть в отверстия. • При установке инструмента убедитесь в том, что используемая электрическая розетка легкодоступна. При возникновении какого-либо сбоя или неисправности немедленно отключите питание инструмента и отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Даже если кнопка питания находится в положении STANDBY, устройство продолжает в минимальном количестве потреблять электроэнергию. Если устройство не используется в течение длительного времени, отсоедините кабель питания от электросети. Беречь от огня • Не ставьте на инструмент зажженные свечи и другие подобные предметы. Горящий предмет может упасть и вызвать пожар. Важное примечание: Информация об условиях Гарантии для Клиентов в Российской Федерации [Русский] Для получения подробной информации об условиях Гарантии на продукцию Yamaha в России, условиях гарантийного обслуживания, пожалуйста, посетите веб-сайт по адресу ниже (на сайте доступен файл с условиями для скачивания и печати) или обратитесь в офис представительства Yamaha в России. http://ru.yamaha.com/ru/support/ ቂ߾ܕනृภቂȃ ቂࣴճ2000mᇵݓฏภቂȃ ጝᄎ࠲खၤֶׁܿؠডؠݒȃ Mounting the Control Unit to the Grand Piano Montaje de la Unidad de control en el Gran Piano Установка блока управления на Disklavier модели «рояль» 将控制器安装在大钢琴上 將控制器安裝在大鋼琴上 그랜드피아노에 컨트롤 유닛 장착하기 (1) Remove the four screws from the sides of the control unit. Quite los cuatro tornillos laterales de la unidad de control. Удалите четыре винта с боковых панелей блока управления. 从控制器左右侧面取下 4 个螺丝。 從控制器左右側面取下 4 個螺絲。 컨트롤 유닛의 측면에 있는 나사 네 개를 제거해 주십시오 . (2) Place the metal suspension bracket, supplied with the Disklavier grand model, over the control unit, then secure the metal suspension bracket to the control unit using the four screws (4 10) supplied with the Disklavier. Coloque el soporte metálico de suspensión suministrado con el modelo de gran piano Disklavier en la unidad de control, luego fije el soporte metálico de suspensión utilizando los cuatro tornillos (4 10) suministrados con el Disklavier. Поместите металлический кронштейн подвески, поставляемый с Disklavier, над блоком управления. Прикрепите кронштейн подвески к блоку управления при помощи четырех винтов (4 10), входящих в комплект Disklavier. 将 Disklavier 大钢琴机型配备的金属配件放在控制器上，然后用 Disklavier 配备的 4 个螺丝 （4×10）将金属配件固定在控制器上。 將 Disklavier 大鋼琴機型配備的金屬配件放在控制器上，然後用 Disklavier 配備的 4 個螺絲 （4×10）將金屬配件固定在控制器上。 Disklavier 그랜드 모델과 함께 제공되는 고정용 금속 브래킷을 컨트 롤 유닛 위에 장착한 후 , Disklavier 와 함께 제공되는 네 개의 나사 (4 10) 를 사용하여 고정용 금속 브래킷을 컨트롤 유닛에 단단히 고정시켜주십시오 . Insert the three restraining screws (5 12) into the marked nuts underneath the bass side key bed, then tighten the screws, leaving a gap of about 5 mm between head of the screw and piano body. (3) 5 mm Coloque los tres tornillos de retención (5 12) en las tuercas marcadas debajo del asiento del teclado del lado de bajo, luego apriete los tornillos dejando un espacio de unos 5 mm entre la cabeza del tornillo y el cuerpo del piano. Вставьте три удерживающих винта (5 12) в указанные гайки в штульраме со стороны басовых клавиш. Затяните винты, оставляя зазор около 5 мм между головкой винта и корпусом Disklavier. 将 3 个安装螺丝 （5×12）插入位于低音侧键盘下面的螺孔中，然 后拧紧螺丝，在螺丝头和钢琴主体之间要留下约 5mm 间隙。 將 3 個安裝螺絲 （5×12）插入位於低音側鍵盤下面的螺孔中，然 後擰緊螺絲，在螺絲頭和鋼琴主體之間要留下約 5mm 間隙。 세 개의 고정나사 (5 12) 를 키보드의 베이스 쪽 받침대 하부에 설 치되어 있는 너트에 삽입한 후 , 나사머리와 피아노 본체 사이가 5mm 정도의 틈이 남도록 나사를 조여주십시오 . (4) Fit the “slots” of the metal suspension bracket containing the control unit to the screws mentioned in step (3). After mounting the control unit, push the control unit back as far as it will go and then tighten the three screws to secure the bracket. Fije las “ranuras” del soporte metálico de suspensión que contiene la unidad de control a los tornillos mencionados en el paso (3). Después de montar la unidad de control, empújela hacia atrás hasta el tope y luego fíjela con los tres tornillos para bloquear el soporte. Через отверстия кронштейна подвески, удерживающего блок управления, пропустите винты, описанные в пункте (3). До упора подтолкните блок управления от себя и закрепите винт на кронштейне. 使固定在控制器上的金属配件的 “ 槽 ” 穿过步骤 （3）所述的螺 丝。 装好控制器后，推入控制器到尽头位置，然后紧固 3 个螺丝来固定 金属配件。 使固定在控制器上的金屬配件的 “ 槽 ” 穿過步驟 （3）所述的螺 絲。 裝好控制器後，推入控制器到儘頭位置，然後緊固 3 個螺絲來固定 金屬配件。 컨트롤 유닛이 장착되어있는 고정용 금속 브래킷의 “ 슬롯 ” 을 순 서 (3) 에서 언급한 나사에 끼워 넣어 주십시오 . 컨트롤 유닛을 장착한 후 , 그 유닛을 뒤쪽으로 끝까지 밀어 준 다음 에 세 개의 나사를 조여서 브래킷을 단단히 고정시켜 주십시오 . (5) Connect the cables extending from the piano to the appropriate connectors/jacks on the rear panel of the control unit. • Coaxial cable: to the TO PIANO connectors • Speaker cord*: to the OUTPUT jacks * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. Conecte los cables que salen del piano a los conectores/tomas apropiados del panel trasero de la unidad de control. • Cable coaxial: al los conectores TO PIANO • Cable de los altavoces*: a las tomas OUTPUT * Solamente para los modelos suministrados con los altavoces monitores. Подключите кабельные шнуры Disklavier к соответствующим разъемам на задней панели блока управления. • Коаксиальный кабель к разъемам TO PIANO • Кабель для подключения мониторов*: к гнездам OUTPUT * Только для моделей, поставляемых с мониторами. 将从钢琴伸出的电缆连接到控制器背面板上相应的端子。 • 同轴电缆∶连接到 TO PIANO 端子 • 扬声器软线 * ∶连接到 OUTPUT 端子 * 仅适用于带监听扬声器的机型。 將從鋼琴伸出的電纜連接到控制器背面板上相應的端子。 • 同軸電纜：連接到 TO PIANO 端子 • 揚聲器軟線 *：連接到 OUTPUT 端子 * 僅適用於帶監聽揚聲器的機型。 피아노에 연결되어 있는 케이블을 컨트롤 유닛의 뒷면에 있는 적당 한 커넥터 / 잭에 연결해 주십시오 . • 동축 케이블 : TO PIANO 커넥터에 • 스피커 코드 *: OUTPUT 잭에 * 모니터 스피커가 함께 제공되는 모델에만 한정됨 . Notes: 1) Handle the metal suspension bracket and the control unit carefully to avoid scratches. 2) Screws; For suspension bracket installation: Flat head (4 10) 4 For control unit suspension: Bind head (5 12) 3 3) When mounted correctly, the control unit is angled approximately 18° above horizontal. Notas: 1) Manipule con cuidado el soporte metálico de suspensión y la unidad de control para evitar ralladuras. 2) Tornillos; Para la instalación del soporte de suspensión: Cabeza plana (4 10) 4 Para la suspensión de la unidad de control: Cabeza fijadora (5 12) 3 3) Cuando está montada correctamente, la unidad de control queda angulada aproximadamente unos 18º respecto a la posición horizontal. Примечания: 1) При установке кронштейна подвески и блока управления соблюдайте осторожность во избежание появления царапин. 2) Винты: Для установки кронштейна подвески: Потайная головка (4 10) 4 Для подвески блока управления: Обвязывающая головка (5 12) 3 3) При правильной установке блок управления должен располагаться приблизительно под углом 18° к горизонту. 注∶ 1) 小心操作金属配件和控制器，以免造成划伤。 2) 螺丝； 金属配件安装用∶平头螺丝 （4×10） ×4 控制器安装用∶连结头螺丝 （5×12） ×3 3) 当安装正确时，控制器应处于从水平仰起约 18° 左右的状态。 注： 1) 小心操作金屬配件和控制器，以免造成劃傷。 2) 螺絲； 金屬配件安裝用：平頭螺絲 （4×10） ×4 控制器安裝用：連結頭螺絲 （5×12） ×3 3) 當安裝正確時，控制器應處於從水平仰起約 18° 左右的狀態。 주목 : 1) 고정용 금속 브래킷과 컨트롤 유닛에 상처가 나지 않도록 조심해서 다루어 주십시오 . 2) 나사 ; 고정용 브래킷 설치용 : 플랫 헤드 (4 10) 4 컨트롤 유닛 고정용 : 바인드 헤드 (5 12) 3 3) 컨트롤 유닛이 정확하게 장착되어있다면 , 그 각도가 수평면 위로 약 18 ˚ 를 유지합니다 . Mounting an Optional USB Floppy Disk Drive to the Grand Piano Montaje de una unidad de disco floppy USB opcional en el gran piano Установка на Disklavier модели «рояль» дисковода для USB носителей, поставляемого по дополнительному заказу 将任选 USB 软磁盘驱动器安装在大钢琴上 將任選 USB 軟磁盤驅動器安裝在大鋼琴上 그랜드피아노에 옵션사양의 USB 플로피 디스크 드라이브 장착하기 Remove the backing papers from the adhesive tape inside the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. (1) Quite el papel trasero de la cinta adhesiva dentro de la caja y coloque la unidad de disco floppy en la caja. Удалите бумажную подложку с клейкой ленты, покрывающей дно корпуса, установите дисковод. 取下盒内的两面胶带覆纸，将软磁盘驱动器固定在盒中。 取下盒內的兩面膠帶覆紙，將軟磁盤驅動器固定在盒中。 Adhesive tape Cinta adhesiva Клейкой лента ਥܕ ጳழ 닖뛯밒눺뿊 (2) 케이스 내부에 있는 점착테이프로부터 보호지를 제거하고 , 플로피 디스크 드라이브를 케이스에 끼워 넣어주십시오 . Attach the drive and case assembly to the bottom of the control unit, using the four screws (3 6) supplied with the Disklavier. Fije el conjunto de la unidad y la caja en la parte inferior de la unidad de control por medio de los cuatro tornillos (3 6) suministrados con el Disklavier. Прикрепите корпус, с находящимся в нем дисководом, к нижней панели блока управления с помощью четырех винтов (3 6), поставляемых с Disklavier. 使用 Disklavier 配备的 4 个螺丝 （3×6）将软磁盘驱动器与盒一起 固定到控制器底面上。 使用 Disklavier 配備的 4 個螺絲 （3×6）將軟磁盤驅動器與盒一起 固定到控制器底面上。 Disklavier 와 함께 제공되는 네 개의 나사 (3 6) 를 사용하여 드라이 브와 케이스 조립부를 컨트롤 유닛의 하부에 부착시켜 주십시오 . Connect the USB cable extending from the drive to the USB port on the rear panel of the control unit. (3) Conecte el cable USB que sale de la unidad al puerto USB del panel trasero de la unidad de control. Подключите кабельные шнуры USB дисковода к соответствующим разъемам на задней панели блока управления. 将从驱动器伸出的 USB 电缆连接到控制器的背面板上。 USB cable Cable USB Кабель USB USBݢେ USBႬᢠ USB 맆눺 將從驅動器伸出的 USB 電纜連接到控制器的背面板上。 드라이브에 연결되어 있는 USB 케이블을 컨트롤 유닛의 뒷면에 있 는 USB 포트에 연결해 주십시오 . Notes: 1) The case is supplied with the USB floppy disk drive. 2) Use the screws (3 6) supplied with the Disklavier when attaching. Notas: 1) La caja se suministra con la unidad de disco floppy USB. 2) Utilice los tornillos (3 6) suministrados con el Disklavier para su fijación. Примечания: 1) Корпус поставляется с USB-дисководом гибких дисков. 2) При закреплении корпуса используйте винты (3 6), поставляемые с Disklavier. 注∶ 1) 盒为 USB 软磁盘驱动器的附件。 2) 安装时，要使用 Disklavier 配备的螺丝 （3×6） 注： 1) 盒為 USB 軟磁盤驅動器的附件。 2) 安裝時，要使用 Disklavier 配備的螺絲 （3×6）。 주목 : 1) 케이스는 USB 플로피 디스크 드라이브와 함께 제공됩니다 . 2) 부착 시에는 Disklavier 와 함께 제공되는 나사 (3 6) 를 사용하여 주십시오 . English Operation manual Welcome to the Yamaha DisklavierTM! Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Disklavier piano! The Disklavier is a fascinating instrument that integrates a classic Yamaha acoustic piano with innovative electronics to suit your entertainment, educational, and creative needs, while retaining the tone, touch and long-term value that have long made Yamaha pianos the world’s finest. English Before using your Disklavier piano, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference. ■ Notes on Source Code Distribution For three years after the factory shipment, you may request from Yamaha the source code for any portions of the product which are licensed under the GNU General Public License by writing to the following address: 10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka, 430-8650, JAPAN Piano Development Department, Yamaha Corporation The source code will be provided at no charge; however, we may require you to reimburse Yamaha for the cost of delivering the source code to you. The source code download is also available on the following website: http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/disklavier_e3/ • Note that we shall bear no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising from changes (additions/ deletions) made to the software for this product by a third party other than Yamaha (or party authorized by Yamaha). • Note that re-use of source code released to the public domain by Yamaha is unguaranteed, and Yamaha shall not bear any responsibility whatsoever for the source code. ■ Trademarks & Copyrights • The contents of this operation manual and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by Yamaha Corporation. • Yamaha, Disklavier, DisklavierRadio, Silent, PianoSoft, PianoSoft·Plus, and PianoSoft·PlusAudio are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • SmartKey, CueTIME, and You Are The Artist are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation or Yamaha Corporation of America. • Disklavier E3 software, Copyright © 2008 Yamaha Corporation. • This contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License, GNU Lesser General Public License, the BSD Copyright, the Artistic License, and the others. • This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this operation manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. i Important Precautions Read the following before operating the Disklavier. ■ Warnings ■ Cautions • Do not locate the Disklavier in a place subject to excessive heat, low temperatures, or direct sunlight. This could be a fire hazard and may damage the finish and internal parts. • Turn off all audio devices when connecting to the Disklavier. Refer to the user’s guide for each device. Use the correct cables and connect as specified. • Excessive humidity or dust can lead to fire or electric shock. • Set the volume level on all the devices to minimum before applying power. • Connect the plug on the Disklavier power cable to a compatible AC outlet. Failure to do so will present a fire and electric shock hazard. If the power cable plug is not compatible with your AC outlet, consult your dealer. • Do not play the Disklavier at a high volume for extended periods; you may damage your hearing. This is especially important when using headphones. If you think your hearing ability is impaired, consult your doctor. • Do not plug several devices into the same AC outlet. This can overload the AC outlet, and lead to fire and electric shock hazard. It may also affect the performance of some devices. • If the Disklavier is worked extremely hard —that is, prolonged playback of very “busy” songs — the Disklavier’s thermal relay may trip. The thermal relay will automatically reset when the Disklavier has cooled down. • Do not place heavy objects on the power cable. A damaged power cable is a potential fire and electric shock hazard. If the power cable runs under a carpet, make sure heavy objects, including the Disklavier, are not placed on top of the cable. • If the power cable is damaged (i.e. cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a replacement. Using the Disklavier in this condition is a fire and shock hazard. • When disconnecting the power cable from an AC outlet, always pull from the plug. Never pull the cable. Damaging the cable in this way is a potential fire and electric shock hazard. • If a foreign object or water gets inside the Disklavier turn it off immediately, and remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer. • If you plan not to use the Disklavier for a long period of time (such as when you are on vacation), disconnect the electrical mains. • The cover of the unit should be removed only by qualified service technicians. • Always remove the power plug from the AC outlet before cleaning the Disklavier. Leaving the power plug connected presents a risk of electric shock. • Do not place liquid containers such as vases, potted plants, glasses, cosmetic bottles, medicines, etc., on top of the Disklavier. • Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the Disklavier. • Do not try to modify the Disklavier, as this could lead to fire or electric shock hazard. • Do not place metal objects with rubber feet on top of the Disklavier. The color and finish of the Disklavier can be damaged. • When moving the Disklavier to another location, turn off the power, remove the power plug from the AC outlet, and remove all cables connected to external devices. ii • If you notice any abnormality — such as smoke, odor, or noise — turn off the Disklavier immediately, and remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair. • Do not place heavy objects on the Disklavier. Doing so can damage the Disklavier. • Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the Disklavier. However, if you discover a stain, carefully use a soft damp cloth to remove it. ■ Interference • The Disklavier uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference to radios and TVs placed close to it. If interference does occur, relocate the affected equipment. The remote control of this unit is powered by dry batteries. Improper use or misuse of the dry batteries can cause the dry batteries to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in a fire, damage to equipment and/or nearby objects or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. Read through and familiarize yourself with the following safety precautions prior to use to ensure correct usage. • Remove spent batteries immediately from equipment. Otherwise, batteries will overdischarge, causing them to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. English ■ Handling Batteries • When the battery-powered unit is not going to be used for a prolonged period of time, remove the dry batteries from the unit. Otherwise the batteries will run down and their electrolyte may leak, resulting in damage to the unit. • Dispose of batteries in accordance with the applicable regulations and ordinances. • The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. • Do not directly touch the chemicals (electrolyte) which have leaked from dry batteries. 1. If electrolyte from dry batteries has made contact with your eyes, rinse your eyes thoroughly with clean water and seek medical treatment from a physician immediately. 2. If electrolyte from dry batteries has touched your skin or clothing, rinse it off immediately with clean water. 3. If electrolyte from dry batteries has found its way inside your mouth, gargle immediately and consult a physician. • Do not install the dry batteries with the “+” and “–” poles reversed. Misaligning the poles of dry batteries can lead the dry batteries to be charged or shorted or it can cause them to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in a fire, damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. • Use only the designated batteries. Do not use used batteries with unused batteries or different types of batteries together. This can cause them to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in a fire or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. Replace all the dry batteries at the same time. Do not use new and old dry batteries together. Do not use different types of batteries (alkaline and manganese batteries, batteries made by different manufacturers or different battery products made by the same manufacturer) together: this can cause them to heat up, ignite or leak electrolyte. Please keep this manual for future reference. iii Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Features .................................................................1 Items Supplied with the Disklavier .........................1 Names of Parts and Their Functions......................2 Basic Disklavier Terminology .................................8 Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting the Control Unit ...................................9 Connecting the AC Power Cable ...........................9 Using the Remote Control....................................10 Turning On the Disklavier.....................................11 Setting the Internal Calendar ...............................12 Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode) ..........15 Shutting Down the Disklavier ...............................15 Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media ...................................................................15 Compatible File Format........................................16 Basic Precautions for Using CDs .........................16 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Types of Playable Software .................................17 Selecting Medium and Their Contents .................18 Using the Number Keypad ...................................20 Starting Playback .................................................20 Stopping Playback ...............................................22 Pausing Playback.................................................22 Fast Preview & Review ........................................23 Fast Forward & Reverse ......................................24 Searching a Specific Section of a Song ...............25 Listening to the DisklavierRadio™ .......................26 Adjusting the Volume ...........................................27 Using the Timer Play ........................................... 36 Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a Song .................................................................... 39 Video Synchronized Playback............................. 40 Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)................... 41 SmartKey™ Playback ......................................... 41 Chapter 5 Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal Metronome .......................................................... 43 Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice... 44 Chapter 6 Advanced Song Playback Changing the Playback Tempo ............................28 Playing Back Songs in a Different Key (Transposition) .....................................................28 Repeating Song Playback....................................29 Repeating a Specific Section of a Song (A-B Repeat) ........................................................30 Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part...........31 Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback ...............................................32 Adjusting the Pitch of Audio .................................34 Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio......................35 iv The Silent Piano™ Function What is the Silent Piano™ Function?.................. 46 Quiet Mode and Headphone Mode ..................... 46 Playing the Digital Piano (Quiet Mode) ............... 47 Using the Headphones (Headphone Mode)........ 48 Adjusting the Volume in the Quiet Mode ............. 49 Adjusting the Volume in the Headphone Mode ... 49 Selecting the Voice in the Quiet/Headphone Mode ................................................................... 50 Applying the Reverb Effect to the Digital Piano ................................................................... 51 Inactivating the Key Movement during Playback.............................................................. 52 Chapter 7 Basic Recording Recording a New Song ....................................... 53 Titling a Song at the Start of Recording .............. 54 Chapter 8 Chapter 4 Advanced Piano Playing Advanced Recording Recording with the Internal Metronome .............. 56 Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately ... 58 Recording the Left and Right Parts Together (Setting a Split Point)........................................... 60 Re-Recording One Part....................................... 62 Changing the Default Tempo .............................. 63 Video Synchronized Recording ........................... 65 CD Synchronized Recording ............................... 69 Chapter 9 Media Management Managing Albums................................................ 70 Making Copies of Albums.................................... 70 Deleting Albums .................................................. 72 Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?.........101 Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service (IDC Registration) ..............................................101 Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet ...........101 Accessing the Internet .......................................103 Checking Your Account Information ..................104 Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet.........105 Setting the Disklavier for the Internet Connection.........................................................107 Initializing Internet Settings ................................108 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices Hooking Up Audio Equipment............................109 Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission ....................................110 Hooking Up MIDI Devices ................................. 112 Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Reception .......................................................... 113 Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Transmission ..................................................... 115 Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing Data Transmission ............................................ 116 Chapter 12 English Creating a New Album .........................................73 Renaming an Album ............................................74 Rearranging the Order of Albums ........................75 Managing Songs ..................................................76 Making Copies of Songs ......................................77 Deleting Songs.....................................................78 Renaming a Song ................................................79 Rearranging the Order of Songs..........................80 Converting Song Format......................................81 Changing the Counter Display .............................82 Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form (Strip XP) .............................................................83 Managing Playlists ...............................................84 Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist ...................85 Deleting a Playlist ................................................86 Creating a New Playlist........................................87 Renaming a Playlist .............................................88 Managing Media ..................................................89 Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a Medium ................................................................90 Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium ...........91 Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier .......................................................92 Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]..............96 Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional) .................97 Making Backups of Songs ...................................98 Restoring the Backups.........................................99 Other Settings Tuning the Tone Generator (TG Master Tune).............................................. 118 Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the Number Keypad on the Remote Control ........... 119 Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized Access............................................................... 122 Adjusting the Brightness of the Display............. 124 Switching the Languages for the Screen .......... 125 Resetting the Disklavier .................................... 126 Diagnosing the Disklavier (Maintenance Mode) ......................................... 128 Updating the Disklavier ..................................... 129 Chapter 13 Internal Tone Generator Voices Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice List..................................................................... 131 Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice List..................................................................... 134 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting .................. 136 Chapter 15 Error Messages ................... 139 Chapter 16 Glossary ................................. 140 Chapter 17 Specifications General Specifications ...................................... 143 Function & Controls........................................... 144 Appendix Software License Notice ....A-1 MIDI Data Format ..............A-21 MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART v Chapter 1 Introduction Features English The Disklavier E3 offers the valuable features that open up your musical possibility to explore. Here are brief explanations of such features: Advanced Features for Your Listening Pleasure • Special music CDs, contain over 17 hours of fantastic music, let you start listening on the day the Disklavier E3 arrives at your home. • DisklavierRadio™; you can listen to over 11 music channel by streaming broadcasts over the Internet. • Yamaha’s innovative Silent Piano™ function lets you listen to songs or play the piano more quietly than on the acoustic piano, or privately at any time*. Convenient Recording Features to Preserve Your Musical Memories • Total 128 megabytes of internal memory comes with the Disklavier E3 to preserve your valuable data. • Connecting external USB devices to the Disklavier E3 allows you to record your performance directly onto them, or even make backups of your valuable data in the internal memory. • Video synchronization features offer great listening experience with sights. You can see as well as hear performances with perfectly synchronized audio and video. • Your valuable music data on the floppy disk can be played back with the optional floppy disk drive (UDFD01). Simple and Easy-to-use Features Enhancing Your Performance • The remote control, with clear and logical layout of buttons, lets you quickly enjoy the features of the Disklavier E3. • The display on the front panel employs an organic electro-luminescent display which makes it brighter and more easily readable than ever. * Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. Items Supplied with the Disklavier Check that the following items are supplied with your Disklavier: • 1 Control unit • 1 Stereo headphones*3 • 1 Control unit suspension bracket*1 • 2 Sample PianoSoft CD software • 4 Screws for control unit suspension bracket installation (4 10)*1 • 1 Operation manual • 3 Screws for control unit suspension (5 12)*1 • 1 Music book “50 greats for the Piano” • 4 Screws for optional USB floppy disk drive installation (3 6)*1 *1 Only for grand pianos • 2 Monitor speakers*2 *3 Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function • 1 PianoSoft CD song list *2 Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers • 1 Monitor speaker installation kit*2 • 2 Speaker cords*2 • 1 Remote control • 2 Batteries for remote control 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Names of Parts and Their Functions ■ Control Unit — Front Panel 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 [ON/OFF] button Turns on or shuts down the Disklavier. Press once to turn it on, and once again to shut it down. 1 10 11 Cursor/[ENTER] buttons Cursor: Used to select options and parameters. 10 Press this button inclining slightly upward/downward/left/ right. USB port Used to connect a USB flash memory, etc. 2 Remote control sensor When using the remote control, point it toward this sensor. 12 3 [ENTER]: Used to execute the selection. CD drive Insert a PianoSoft·PlusAudio or other audio or audio/MIDI CD here. 4 Press straight the center of this button. CD eject button Used to open the CD drive. 5 [PLAY/PAUSE] button ( pages 20 and 22) Used to start and pause playback. 6 Display Shows various information. 11 Dial Used to adjust the volume, and to set parameter values. 12 [STOP] button ( page 22) Used to stop playback and recording. 7 [RECORD] button ( page 53) Used to engage the record standby mode before recording starts. 8 [SELECT] button Used to select media. 9 2 Chapter Introduction 1 ■ Control Unit — Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 English 7 8 9 10 11 USB TO DEVICE port Used to connect a USB flash memory, an optional USB floppy disk drive, etc. MIDI OUT terminal Used to connect external MIDI equipment for outputting MIDI data. 2 LAN port Used to connect to the Internet. 11 MIDI IN terminal Used to connect external MIDI equipment for inputting MIDI data. 1 OUTPUT jacks Used to connect the speaker cord from the monitor speakers.* 10 3 * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. ANALOG MIDI IN jacks Used to connect the audio equipment such as an external CD changer. 4 OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks Used to connect the microphone/line input of a camcorder. 5 OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks Used to connect the audio output of a camcorder. 6 7 TO PIANO connectors Used to connect the piano. DC-IN 12V connector Used to connect to the power supply unit. 8 USB TO HOST port Used to connect the USB cable from a computer. 9 3 Chapter 1 Introduction ■ Remote Control 1 13 2 14 15 16 3 17 4 18 5 19 20 6 21 7 22 8 9 23 24 10 25 26 11 12 27 1 [ON/STANDBY] button Turns on the Disklavier or puts it in the standby mode. 5 [RECORD] button ( page 53) Used to engage the record standby mode before recording starts. Number keypad Used for direct album/song selection and to enter a start time for song playback. [PLAY] button ( page 20) Used to start playback. 2 6 [REVERSE]/[FORWARD] buttons In the play mode: used to fast preview and review. In the pause mode: used to fast forward and reverse. 7 [SYSTEM] button Used to access the system menu. 3 [VOICE] button ( page 44) Used to access the voice function. 4 4 Cursor buttons Used to select options and parameters. 8 Chapter Introduction 9 [BACK] button Used to cancel the selection, and return to the previous screen. 1 20 [PAUSE] button ( page 22) Used to pause playback. [STOP] button ( page 22) Used to stop playback and recording. 21 [VOLUME] buttons ( page 27) Used to adjust the volume. [–] lowers the volume, [+] raises the volume. 10 [TRANSPOSE] buttons Used to transpose song playback. [–] transposes down, [+] transposes up, and [0] resets the transposition value to 00. 12 [INTERNET] button Used to access the Internet menu. English 11 [TEMPO] buttons Used to change the playback tempo. [–] decreases the tempo, [+] increases the tempo, and [0] resets the tempo to 00. [ENTER] button Used to execute the selection. 22 [FUNC.] button Used to access the function menu. 23 24 [SELECT] button Used to select media. [+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons Used to select parameters, adjust setting values, and execute or cancel the selected functions. 25 13 [SEARCH] button Used to access the search function. [BALANCE] button Used to adjust the TG, audio and voice balance. 26 14 15 [SETUP] button Used to access the setup menu. [METRONOME] button Used to access the metronome function. 16 [REPEAT] button Used to select one of the repeat modes: ALL, RPT, RND, or OFF. 17 27 Color buttons Green: Used to execute the shortcut assigned to the number keypad. Yellow: Used to switch character types when titling albums and songs. Red: Used to switch the Disklavier to the acoustic mode*. Blue: Used to switch the Disklavier to the quiet mode*. * Only for grand pianos equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. 18 [A-B] button Used to enter A and B points for the A-B repeat mode. [PART SELECT] buttons For L/R and ensemble songs, these buttons are used to choose which part will play: left-hand part, right-hand part, or both parts. They are also used to select a part for recording. 19 5 Chapter 1 Introduction ■ Monitor Speaker* LOW 1 2 LINE 2 3 LOW/HIGH volume controls Adjust the base/treble sound volume. LINE1/2 volume controls Adjust the sound volume for each line input. Power indicator Lights up while the speaker is turned on. Note: For normal use, turn down the LINE2 volume completely, and turn up the LINE1 volume at the three o’clock position. 1 2 * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. 6 1 HIGH 3 Chapter Introduction 1 ■ Silent Piano™ Control Box* (Grand piano) 2 3 English 1 4 PHONES jacks Used to connect the headphones. You can use two headphones simultaneously. [VOLUME] knob / [QUIET] switch Used to adjust the volume of the headphones while in the headphone mode. Pushing this switch activates the quiet mode. 1 3 4 [REVERB] knob Used to adjust the amount of reverb. [QUIET] indicator Lights up while the quiet mode is activated. 2 (Upright piano) 1 [REVERB] knob Used to adjust the amount of reverb. 1 2 3 [VOLUME] knob Used to adjust the volume of the headphones while in the headphone mode. 3 PHONES jacks Used to connect the headphones. You can use two headphones simultaneously. 2 * Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function 7 Chapter 1 Introduction Basic Disklavier Terminology The following is a list of several basic Disklavier words that you may need to know before proceeding with operational procedures in this manual. For additional Disklavier terminology, see the glossary provided in Chapter 16. PianoSoft·Plus PianoSoft·Plus software contains prerecorded ensemble songs featuring instrumental accompaniment that can be played back on the Disklavier. See your Disklavier dealer for a PianoSoft catalog. Ensemble Song An ensemble song contains the same left- and right-hand parts as an L/R song, and extra tracks that are played by the internal XG tone generator. Accompanying tracks can include acoustic bass, drums, strings, vibes, etc. Internal Flash Memory The Disklavier has a total of 128 megabytes of internal flash memory that allow you to store song data without a floppy disk. L/R Song In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel either part, and practice that part yourself. When recording an L/R song, you can record the two parts simultaneously or separately. MIDI An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other. PianoSoft The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a library of prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha for use with the Disklavier series. Many titles are available, and among the many musical styles included are classical, jazz, and popular. The disk includes songs for listening enjoyment, piano study disks for the piano student, and accompaniment disks for vocal and instrumental practice. PianoSoft is sometimes used as a generic term for PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus. 8 PianoSoft·PlusAudio CD software made by Yamaha containing audio and MIDI signals for playing back on the Disklavier. SmartPianoSoft Software made by Yamaha containing MIDI signals for playing back along with standard audio CDs. Song A “song” usually means a short piece of music with lyrics. However, in the Disklavier manuals the term “song” is used to refer to any piece of music. Tone Generator An electronic device that generates instrument voices. The Disklavier has an internal XG tone generator that can produce nearly 700 instrumental and percussion voices. Voice The sounds produced by a tone generator expressing various instruments. XG Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM (General MIDI) format. With greater polyphony, more voice, and effects, it improves song compatibility between MIDI devices. When a song in the Yamaha XG format is played on another XG compatible tone generator or synthesizer, it will play and sound as the original composer/creator intended. Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting the Control Unit *1 *2 Note: The cables should be connected to the control unit when the Disklavier is installed. If, however, it is not, carefully connect them to the appropriate connectors or jacks on the rear panel of the control unit. English Make sure that the cables extending from the piano is connected to the appropriate connectors or jacks on the rear panel of the control unit. Note: For grand piano models, be sure to mount the control unit to the underside of the bass side key bed. *1 Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. *2 Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. Connecting the AC Power Cable 1 Connect the power cord extending from the power supply unit of the piano to the DC-IN 12V connector of the control unit. 2 Connect the AC power cable extending from the piano to the AC wall outlet. Important: Make sure that the voltage of the AC wall outlet matches that marked on the Disklavier’s Serial No. plate. 9 Chapter 2 Getting Started Using the Remote Control The Disklavier is equipped with a remote control which allows convenient control from almost anywhere in the room. This chapter provides notes on handling the remote control. ■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Before the remote control can be used, the two batteries supplied with the Disklavier must be installed. Remove the battery cover from the rear of the remote control, install the batteries, and then replace the cover. A diagram inside the battery compartment shows which way the batteries should be installed. Make sure you insert them correctly. ■ Battery Replacement When the remote control fails to work from a distance, replace the batteries. • Replacement batteries should be UM-3, AA, R6P, or LR6 type. • Do not use new and old dry batteries together. • Do not use different types of batteries (alkaline and manganese batteries, batteries made by different manufacturers or different battery products made by the same manufacturer) together. • Remove spent batteries immediately from the remote control. Otherwise, batteries will overdischarge, causing them to leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. • Dispose of batteries in accordance with the applicable regulations and ordinances. • If the remote control is not to be used for a prolonged period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible damage by battery leakage. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked electrolyte or letting it come into contact with skin or clothing. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 10 Important: Be sure to read the section on “Handling Batteries” on page iii for details on the safe handling of dry batteries. Chapter Getting Started 2 ■ Using the Remote Control To use the remote control, point it at the remote control sensor on the control unit. Approx. 5 m English 30° 30° 30° 30° Turning On the Disklavier 1 Make sure that the main switch on the power supply unit is turned on. (Grand piano) Power supply unit (located on the bottom) ON OFF MAINS (Upright piano) Power supply unit (located on the rear) 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit. While the control unit is in the standby mode, you can also turn on the Disklavier by pressing [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control. See Chapter 2 “Getting Started – Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode)” on page 15. The following message appears on the display, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit lights green. After several seconds, the loading screen will appear, and last selected song will be loaded. PLEASE WAIT Your Disklavier is now ready for use. Setting the Internal Calendar [SYSTEM] “TimeZone” and “Clock Adj.” The Disklavier has an internal calendar that can be set from 1/1/1985 00:00:00 to 12/31/2084 23:59:59. Set the calendar accurately so that the Disklavier displays the correct current time during the stop mode. Time is displayed in 24-hour format. ■ Time Zone 1 Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. The system menu screen appears. !"#$%{ 12 Setting the correct time is also important for engaging timercontrolled programs. See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Using the Timer Play” on page 36. Chapter Getting Started 2 Select “TimeZone” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ 2 ] !"#$%{ 3 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the time zone. Examples of Time Zone The chart below shows the correspondence between the time zone setting on the Disklavier and actual time zone used in each area. 4 English The time zone setup screen appears. Setting Actual Time Zone GMT-6 Mexico (Mexico City) GMT-5 Panama, Peru GMT-4 Chile GMT-3 Argentina, Brazil (Rio de Janeiro) GMT+0 U.K. GMT+1 Central Europe (Paris, Berlin) GMT+2 Eastern Europe (Athens) GMT+3 Russia (Moscow) GMT+4 U.A.E. GMT+7 Indonesia (Jakarta), Thailand (Bangkok) GMT+8 China (Beijing, Shanghai, Hong Kong), Singapore GMT+9 South Korea (Seoul) GMT+10 Australia (Canberra, Sydney) Note: The time zone listed here should be used only as a guide. For more details, contact your local observatories. Press [ENTER]. The time zone is set, and the display returns to the system menu. Proceed to the calendar setting. 13 Chapter 2 Getting Started ■ Calendar 1 Select “Clock Adj.” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] !"#$%{ The current date and time appear. 2 Press [ENTER]. The time setup screen appears with the cursor flashing on the hours display. }{ 3 Select year, month, date, hours, minutes, and seconds with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set a value. }{ 4 Press [ENTER]. The date and time are stored in the internal calendar, and the display returns to the current time screen. 5 Press [BACK] on the remote control. The display returns to the system menu screen. 14 Chapter Getting Started 2 Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode) Press [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control. The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit lights red. Note: Press [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control to turn the Disklavier back on. English See you again Shutting Down the Disklavier Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit. Note: Be sure to wait 5 seconds before turning the Disklavier back on. The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit turns off. See you again Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media Compact Disc The Disklavier can play songs on commercial audio CDs and data CDs (such as PianoSoft·PlusAudio). • The audio CDs should be formatted in CD-DA. • The data CDs should be formatted in ISO 9660 Level 1. USB Flash Memory You can use commercially available USB flash memories to store song data. The USB flash memory should be formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 file system. Note: If the external medium contains a number of albums or songs, it may take some time for the Disklavier to recognize them. Note: Do not insert or remove the USB media while reading or writing data. Make sure that reading or writing has finished before doing so. USB Hard Disk You can use commercially available USB hard disk drives to store song data or make a backup of song data. The USB hard disk drive should be formatted in FAT32 file system. Floppy Disk (Optional) With the optional USB floppy disk drive, you can use 3.5” 2DD or 2HD floppy disks to store song data. The floppy disk should be formatted in MSDOS. 15 Chapter 2 Getting Started Compatible File Format The Disklavier can handle these three types of file format: SMF0 Standard MIDI File format 0 for playback and recording. The name of the file should have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.” SMF1 Standard MIDI File format 1 for playback only. The name of the file should have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.” E-SEQ Format developed by Yamaha, for playback only. The name of the file should have an extension as “.FIL” or “.fil.” Basic Precautions for Using CDs ■ Handling CDs In order to protect data stored on compact discs from damage or loss, handle them with care, and observe the following precautions. • Do not touch the surface of a CD. • Do not expose CDs to extreme temperatures or humidity. The working temperature range is between 4°C and 52°C (40°F and 125°F). • Wipe CDs with a clean, dry cloth before playback. • Remove the CD from the CD drive before turning off the Disklavier. ■ Loading a CD 1 Press the CD eject button on the control unit to open the CD tray. CD CD eject button 2 16 Place a CD on the tray, and then close the tray. Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Types of Playable Software When piano songs such as those contained in PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus software are played back on the Disklavier, the piano parts are actually played by the Disklavier keyboard, and the keys move up and down as though they were being played by an invisible performer. The ensemble parts (contained in PianoSoft·Plus software) are played by the internal tone generator and are heard from the monitor speakers*. * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. English PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus PianoSoft·PlusAudio PianoSoft·PlusAudio songs are recorded using two channels, an analog MIDI channel for the piano parts and an audio channel for instrumentals and vocals. When they are played back on the Disklavier, the piano parts area played by the Disklavier keyboard as with PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs, and all other instrumental and vocal parts are heard from the monitor speakers* just like a normal stereo system. SmartPianoSoft SmartPianoSoft contains a recorded piano accompaniment to the commercial CDs, and the acoustic accompaniment will play back matching with the commercial CD. You can also record your own accompaniment for your favorite commercial CDs at home; play your Disklavier as you listen to a CD, and SmartPianoSoft will match the music together during playback, essentially adding you to famous performances. Standard Audio CDs Standard audio CDs contain two audio channels (L and R), and are both heard from the monitor speakers* just like a normal stereo system. In other words, the Disklavier can be used to play CDs in place of a stereo system. 17 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Selecting Medium and Their Contents [SELECT] 1 Insert a desired medium. CD CD eject button USB flash memory USB port 2 Press [SELECT]. The media selection screen appears with the current selected medium highlighted. =MEDIA SELECT= or Control unit 3 Remote control Memory CD Select a desired medium with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]). ] The following media are available: 18 Medium Description Memory Internal flash memory CD Audio CD or data CD USB1, USB2 USB flash memory or USB HDD (USB1 indicates the first inserted one, and USB2 indicates the second.) See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Listening to the DisklavierRadio™” on page 26. Playlist Playlist in the internal flash memory D-Radio DisklavierRadio™ FromToPC Network folder in the internal flash memory See Chapter 9 “Media Management – Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier” on page 92. Chapter Basic Song Playback 4 Press [ENTER] or [ 3 ]. The album selection screen appears. =ALBUM SELECT= or 01:50 Greats for t English 5 Select a desired album with the cursor buttons ([ ][ ]). ?=] =ALBUM SELECT= Note: You can also select albums directly using the number keypad on the remote control. See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Using the Number Keypad” on page 20. 01:50 Greats for t Album number Album title To return to the media selection screen, press [ 6 Press [ENTER] or [ Note: The maximum number of the selectable albums in a medium is 99. ]. ]. The song selection screen appears. =SONG SELECT= or 7 001:Invention 1 Select a desired song with the cursor buttons ([ =SONG SELECT= 001:Invention 1 Song number ?=] Song title To return to the album selection screen, press [ 8 ][ ]). Note: The maximum number of the selectable songs in an album is 999. Note: You can also select songs directly using the number keypad on the remote control. See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Using the Number Keypad” on page 20. ]. Press [ENTER]. The selected song is loaded. 19 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Using the Number Keypad Album or song selection screen Number button You can also select albums or songs directly with the number keypad on the remote control. Press the corresponding number button, then press [ENTER]. For example, to select album number 5, first press [0], then [5], then [ENTER]. =ALBUM SELECT= 0-9/ENT 05: To select song number 36, first press [0], then [3], then [6], then [ENTER]. 036: Starting Playback [PLAY] Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the remote control. [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit lights green, and the numerical value of the counter advances. or Control unit Remote control =Memory= A02-001 <00:01> LR SO V+00 Piano Sonate At the end of the song, the Disklavier selects the next song automatically and continues playback. After playback the last song in the album, playback stops. 20 Note: If you enter a number higher than the existed, the last album or song appears. Chapter Basic Song Playback 3 ■ Song Playback Screen Here are a few things that you will often see during playback. 1 2 3 4 5 6 English 7 1 Media The selected medium is displayed here. Album/Song Number The number of the selected album and song is displayed here. 2 Display Description Axx-yyy xx: album number (01 to 99) yyy: song number (001 to 999) Pxx-yyy xx: playlist number (01 to 99) yyy: song number (001 to 999) 5 Song Format The format of the selected song is displayed here. Display Description S0 SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 S1 SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1 ES E-SEQ format 6 Volume The current volume setting is displayed here. Song Title The title of the selected song is displayed here. If the title is long, it scrolls across the display. 7 Counter Playing time is indicated in one of two formats. 3 Display Description xx:yy Minutes (xx) and seconds (yy) xxx-y Measures (xxx) and beats (y) Song Type The type of the selected songs is displayed here. 4 Display Description LR PianoSoft XP PianoSoft recorded on the PRO model PS SmartPianoSoft SK SmartKey YM PianoSoft·PlusAudio AU Stereo audio 21 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Stopping Playback During playback [STOP] Press [STOP]. or Control unit Remote control Playback stops, and the song returns to the beginning. [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit turns off, and the counter is reset to “00:00” or “001-1.” Pausing Playback During playback 1 [PAUSE] Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, or [PAUSE] on the remote control. or Control unit Remote control Playback pauses. [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes, and the counter stops counting. 2 Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the remote control to continue playback. or Control unit 22 Remote control Chapter Basic Song Playback 3 Fast Preview & Review During playback [FORWARD] or [REVERSE] During playback, fast preview and review allow you to quickly search through a song while listening to the sound. This is useful for locating a desired position within a song. English ■ Fast Preview 1 Note: No sound is produced by the piano when fast-previewing or reviewing PianoSoft·PlusAudio CDs. To preview, hold [ ] on the control unit or press [FORWARD] on the remote control. or Control unit 2 Remote control Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on the remote control again to return to normal playback. If a song is previewed all the way to the end, it will be paused at the end of the song. ■ Fast Review 1 To review, hold [ ] on the control unit or press [REVERSE] on the remote control. or Control unit 2 Remote control Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on the remote control again to return to normal playback. If a song is reviewed all the way to the beginning, it will be paused at the beginning of the song. 23 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Fast Forward & Reverse Stop or pause mode [FORWARD] or [REVERSE] In the stop or pause mode, fast forward and reverse allow you to quickly locate a desired position in a song. Reverse can also be used to return a song to the beginning, ready to play again. ■ Fast Forward 1 In the stop or pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or press [FORWARD] on the remote control. =Memory= or Control unit Remote control LR SO V+00 <00:15> FORWARD [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter shows the current position. 2 Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on the remote control again to return to the pause mode. If you fast forward a song all the way to the end, it will be paused at the end of the song. ■ Fast Reverse 1 In the pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or press [REVERSE] on the remote control. =Memory= or Control unit Remote control LR SO V+00 <02:22> REWIND [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter shows the current position. 2 Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on the remote control again to return to the pause mode. If you reverse a song all the way to the beginning, it will be paused at the beginning of the song. 24 Chapter Basic Song Playback 3 Searching a Specific Section of a Song During playback or stop/pause mode [SEARCH] Playback can be started from a specified point in a song. Instead of using fast forward or preview, you can use this function to go directly to a desired point within a song. 1 English If the current song uses the minutes and seconds time format, you specify the point in minutes and seconds. If it uses the measures and beats time format, you specify the point in measures and beats. Press [SEARCH] on the remote control. The song search screen appears with the counter flashing. =Memory= A02-001 <00:00> 0-9/SEARCH Flashes The song will be paused at the exact point as you press [SEARCH]. 2 Enter the time that you want to search for with the number keypad. Note: If you enter a value higher than the entire song time, the search goes to the end of the song. For example, to search for 2:56 (minutes and seconds), first press [0], then [2], [5], and [6]. =Memory= A02-001 <02:56> 0-9/SEARCH For example, to search for 52-3 (measures and beats), first press [0], then [5], [2], and [3]. =Memory= A02-001 <052-3> 3 0-9/SEARCH Press [SEARCH] again. The position of the song goes to the specified point. 25 Chapter 3 Basic Song Playback Listening to the DisklavierRadio™ Media selection screen “D-Radio” You can listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels of music contents. 1 Select “D-Radio” in the media selection screen. To select a medium, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. 01:Complimentary C 2 Press [ ] or [ ] or [+/YES] or [–/NO] to select a channel. or 3 Press [ENTER] or [ selected channel. =RADIO SELECT= 02:Classical and S ] to begin the broadcast of the The DisklavierRadio™ screen appears. Channel Number Medium or V+00 My Funny Val Song Title Press [ ] twice to stop the broadcast and return to the media selection screen. ×2 26 Volume =D-Radio= CH-08: Jazz Channel Title 4 To enjoy the DisklavierRadio™, first you need to connect to the Internet. See Chapter 10 “Internet Direct Connection (IDC) – Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet” on page 101. The channel selection screen appears. =RADIO SELECT= Chapter Basic Song Playback 3 ■ Muting the Sound 1 Press [PAUSE] or [STOP]. “MUTE” appears on the upper right of the screen. =D-Radio= CH-08: Jazz English My Funny Val or 2 MUTE Note: Streaming broadcasts continue during muting. Therefore, the song broadcasted when releasing muting may differ from the one when muting. Press [PAUSE] or [STOP] again to release muting. or Adjusting the Volume [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] You can adjust volume with the control unit or with the remote control as described below. Since all piano songs are recorded at the maximum volume level of 0, volume can be decreased down to –10, the softest volume at which the piano can play. For ensemble songs, the volume of the piano and internal XG tone generator are adjusted simultaneously, so it is a good idea to first balance the volume of the piano and XG tone generator. For songs on PianoSoft·PlusAudio, you should first balance the volume of the MIDI piano and audio parts. 1 Note: This setting does not affect manual playing. See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback” on page 32. Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control. The main volume setting screen appears. =BALANCE= VOLUME-/+ MAIN VOLUME -01 2 Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume. Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the volume. Note: When the volume is set to –10, there may be a slight delay in sound production following key strokes, and the Disklavier may skip some notes. Furthermore, at this volume setting, touch strength does not affect note dynamics. 27 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback Changing the Playback Tempo [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] You can speed up or slow down the playback tempo. Slowing down the playback tempo can be useful when practicing a difficult piano part. Note: You cannot change the playback tempo of songs on audio CDs. These tempo settings remain in effect until recording is started, another medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off. 1 Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] on the remote control. Tempo changes to songs that you have recorded yourself can be made permanent. See Chapter 8 “Advanced Recording – Changing the Default Tempo” on page 63. The tempo setting screen appears. =Memory= TEMPO-/0/+ TEMPO +01% 2 Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] to adjust the tempo. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the tempo. Playback tempo can be adjusted from –50% to +50% in 1% increments. Press [TEMPO 0] to set to the original tempo. Playing Back Songs in a Different Key (Transposition) [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] Playback can be transposed up or down by up to two octaves. This is useful, for example, when you want to sing along (karaoke) in a different key from the original recording. Transposition changes remain in effect until recording is started, another medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off. 28 Note: This function cannot be used to transpose songs from external devices connected to the OMNI IN jacks, or on audio CDs. Chapter Advanced Song Playback 1 4 Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] on the remote control. The transposition setting screen appears. =Memory= TRANS-/0/+ TRANS +01key Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] to change the key. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the key. English 2 Playback can be transposed in half-step increments up or down two octaves (–24 key to +24 key). Press [TRANSPOSE 0] to set to the original key. Repeating Song Playback [REPEAT] There are three repeat modes (ALL, RPT, RND) as described below. You can use these functions for entertainment or study purpose. Repeat mode settings remain in effect until recording is started, another medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is tuned off. 1 Press [REPEAT] on the remote control. The repeat setting screen appears. =Memory= REPEAT ALL 2 REPEAT Press [REPEAT] to select repeat modes. The following options are available: Option Description ALL Repeats all songs on the selected album. RPT Repeats selected song. RND Shuffles the order of songs on the selected album and repeats the cycle. OFF Plays back songs normally. 29 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback 3 Press [PLAY] to start repeat playback. 4 To cancel the repeat mode, press [REPEAT] until “OFF” appears on the screen. Repeating a Specific Section of a Song (A-B Repeat) During playback [A-B] In the A-B repeat, playback is repeated between two specified points in a song: point A and point B. This function is useful when practicing or memorizing a difficult section of a song. Once specified, points A and B are saved until another song is selected, recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off. 1 To set point A, play back a song and press [A-B] on the remote control when the desired point is reached. Point A is set. The A-B repeat setting screen appears with the “B” flashing. =Memory= A-B Flashes 2 Note: You cannot set point B that is beyond the selected song. To set point B, press [A-B] again. Point B is set. =Memory= <02:22> A-B A-B Playback starts from point A, continues up to point B and, returns to point A and playback starts repeatedly. Point B Point A SONG 1 SONG 2 Start Cycle 30 SONG 3 Chapter Advanced Song Playback 3 To cancel the A-B repeat, press [A-B] so that “OFF” flashes on the screen. =Memory= A-B 4 Note: The A-B repeat is cancelled if you escape from the A-B repeat setting screen by other operations. Flashes English Pressing [BACK] also cancels the point setting, and returns to the song playback screen. Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] This could be useful, for example, when listening carefully to one part, and also when you practice only the left- or right-hand part while the Disklavier plays the other. ■ Cancelling the Piano Part 1 Select the desired song. 2 Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] on the remote control to cancel a part. To select a song, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. The part cancellation screen appears with the corresponding part canceled. =Piano Part= L/R L=ON R=OFF P=ON Notes of displays: 3 Note: For the SmartKey song, “ON”, “OFF” and “G” appear sequentially each time you press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]. Display Description L Left hand part R Right hand part P Pedal part ON Plays part OFF Cancels part G Plays part with guide (only for SmartKey song) --- No plays on part To replay the cancelled part, press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] again so that “ON” appears on the screen. =Piano Part= L/R L=ON R=ON P=ON 4 Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen. 31 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback ■ Cancelling the Pedal Part 1 On the part cancellation screen, press [ =Piano Part= ] to select “P=.” L/R L=ON R=OFF P=ON 2 Press [–/NO] to cancel a pedal part. =Piano Part= L/R L=ON R=OFF P=OFF 3 To replay the pedal part, press [+/YES] with the cursor is on “P=.” 4 Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen. Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback [BALANCE] Besides adjusting the overall volume, the volume balance among the different sound sources as described below can be adjustable. 32 TG: Adjusts the volume of the ensemble sound reproduced by the tone generator (TG) of the Disklavier. Audio: Adjusts the volume of the accompaniment or standard audio sound pre-recorded in the software (CDs). Voice: Adjusts the volume of the ensemble voice when you play using the voice function. Note: You cannot adjust the volume balance during the DisklavierRadio™ playback. See Chapter 5 “Advanced Piano Playing – Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice” on page 44. Chapter Advanced Song Playback 4 ■ Adjusting the TG Balance 1 Press [BALANCE] on the remote control. The TG balance setting screen appears. =BALANCE= 2 English TG BALANCE 100 -/+ Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the tone generator. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the volume. Tone generator volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127. ■ Adjusting the Audio Balance 1 Press [BALANCE] twice on the remote control. The audio balance setting screen appears. =BALANCE= ×2 2 -/+ AUDIO BALANCE 100 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the audio. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the volume. Audio volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127. 33 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback ■ Adjusting the Voice Balance 1 Press [BALANCE] three times on the remote control. The voice balance setting screen appears. =BALANCE= 2 -/+ VOICE BALANCE 100 ×3 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the voice. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the volume. Voice volume can be adjusted in a range of 0 to 127. Adjusting the Pitch of Audio During playback [FUNC.] You can temporarily adjust the pitch of the song contains audio (PianoSoft·PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft) or an audio CD for your listening pleasure. Pitch adjustments are effective until another medium or album is selected, recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off. 1 During the song playback, press [FUNC.] on the remote control. The audio pitch setting screen appears. =CD= -+ENT AudioPitch=+00cent 2 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pitch. =CD= -+ENT AudioPitch=+01cent Audio pitch can be adjusted in a range of –50 cent to +50 cent (one semitone as 100 cents). 34 Note: This function cannot be used to adjust the pitch of external audio CDs connected to the OMNI IN jacks. Chapter Advanced Song Playback 4 Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio During playback [FUNC.] You can temporarily adjust the L/R balance of an audio CD. Balance adjustments are effective until another song is selected, recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off. During the song playback, press [FUNC.] several times. English 1 The audio pan setting screen appears. =CD= -+ENT AudioPan=Center 2 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pan. =CD= -+ENT AudioPan=Left The following pan settings are available: Option Description Left Audio of the L channel is output to both of the L and R channels. Center Audio of the L channel is output to the L channel, and the R channel is output to the R channel. Right Audio of the R channel is output to both of the L and R channels. 35 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback Using the Timer Play [SETUP] “TimerPlay” You can program your Disklavier to start or stop playback of a song at various specified times. All you need to do is register up to a maximum of 99 timer settings, and your Disklavier will perform them unattended. This function is called “timer play.” The following describes how to play back the first album in the internal flash memory at 8:15 AM. 1 Note: The control unit must be turned on in advance in order for the timer play to function. The timer play cannot turn on/off the control unit. Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “TimerPlay” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The timer play setting screen appears. Timer switch =TimerPlay= _?]-+ >TimerPlay=OFF 01[### ##:## ---] Program Day Time Function Album number selection 3 Confirm that the cursor is on the timer switch, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to switch the timer play on and off. =TimerPlay= -+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[### ##:## ---] 36 Note: The internal calendar must be set in advance in order for the timer play to function. See Chapter 2 “Getting Started – Setting the Internal Calendar” on page 12. Chapter Advanced Song Playback 4 Press [ ] and [ 4 ] to select the desired program number. The cursor moves to the function parameter. English 5 Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the function parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired function. =TimerPlay= -+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[### ##:## PLAY -----] The following functions are available: PLAY Starts playback of songs. STOP Stops playback of songs. RND Starts playback of songs at random. OFF Turns off the Disklavier (standby mode). When “PLAY” or “RND” is selected, the album selection parameter appears. 6 Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album selection parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired album. =TimerPlay= -+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[### ##:## PLAY Mem01] The following selections are available: Mem01 Mem99 Albums (01 - 99) in the internal flash memory. Lst01 Lst99 Playlists (01 - 99) created in the internal flash memory. Radio The last DisklavierRadio™ channel you have listened to. ----- Current selected song. Note: You cannot select “Radio” if you select “RND” in step 5. Note: When “Radio” is selected, the Disklavier will connect to the Internet one minute prior to the time you have set, and the channel selection screen appears. DisklavierRadio™ will begin to play at the designated time. 37 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback 7 Press [ ] to move the cursor to the day parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired day. =TimerPlay= _?=]-+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[M-F ##:## PLAY Mem01] The following day settings are available: 8 ALL The timer play functions on every day of the week. MON The timer play functions only on Monday. TUE The timer play functions only on Tuesday. WED The timer play functions only on Wednesday. THU The timer play functions only on Thursday. FRI The timer play functions only on Friday. SAT The timer play functions only on Saturday. SUN The timer play functions only on Sunday. M-F The timer play functions on Monday thru Friday. M-S The timer play functions on Monday thru Saturday. Press [ ] to move the cursor to the hour parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set hours. =TimerPlay= -+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[M-F 08:00 PLAY Mem01] 9 Press [ ] to move the cursor to the minute parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set minutes. =TimerPlay= -+ >TimerPlay=ON 01[M-F 08:15 PLAY Mem01] 10 38 Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen. Chapter Advanced Song Playback 4 ■ About Song Playback Screen When the song playback is stopped — with the timer play function is set to ON and the current time is displayed — “T” flashes to the right side of the current time. English Indicates that the timer play is on. Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a Song [SETUP] “Playback” When there is a blank part created at the beginning of the recorded song, turning on this function automatically skips the unwanted part and starts playback from the actual beginning of the song. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “Playback” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ =SETUP MENU= (2/3) *Network *Playback *Reverb *Shortcut ] Note: The “Reverb” option appears only on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. The playback setting screen appears with the cursor flashing. -+ =Playback= >SkipSpace=OFF >KeyMotion=ON 3 Note: The “KeyMotion” option appears only on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. =Playback= >SkipSpace=ON >KeyMotion=ON -+ 39 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback 4 Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen. Video Synchronized Playback You can enjoy piano playback with the video recorded on the DVD recorder. 1 Perform the video synchronized recording in advance. 2 Make sure that the OMNI IN setting is set to “AutoDetect”. 3 Turn down the volume completely on the TV if you connect the audio output of the DVD recorder to the TV. Turn down the volume completely on the camcorder if you use the camcorder only. 4 Start playback on the DVD recorder. Start playback on the camcorder if you use the camcorder only. The Disklavier automatically searches and selects the song paired with the video, and then starts playback as well. PIANO005.MID If the piano playing is not synchronized with the video Adjust the offset time for synchronization. See Chapter 11 “Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission” on page 110. If noises (synchronized signal) are heard during playback Turn down the signal level and re-record. See Chapter 11 “Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission” on page 110. 40 For details on video synchronized recording, see Chapter 8 “Advanced Recording – Video Synchronized Recording” on page 65. Note: Be sure to rewind the video cassette to locate the beginning of the recording. It may take some time before piano playback starts if you start playback halfway through the video. Note: When using the song copied to the USB flash memory, it may take some time until the Disklavier recognizes the information for synchronization. See “Setting for Video Synchronized Recording” on page 65. Note: When searching for songs for video synchronized playback from a USB flash memory, you can search from a maximum of 150 songs per USB flash memory. It is therefore recommended that you copy songs for video synchronized playback onto the internal memory. When saving onto a USB flash memory, it is recommended that you do not exceed a total of 150 saved songs per memory. Note: You cannot operate the Disklavier using the control unit or remote control during video synchronized playback. If you want to stop playback of the song, stop playback on the DVD recorder (or the camcorder). Chapter Advanced Song Playback 4 Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback) Insert a CD Select a SmartPianoSoft song [PLAY] 1 Insert a desired CD that you want to synchronize with the SmartPianoSoft song. 2 Select a desired SmartPianoSoft song. 3 Press [PLAY]. To record the piano performance to add, see Chapter 8 “Advanced Recording – CD Synchronized Recording” on page 69. English You can add a Disklavier piano performance you recorded or on commercially available SmartPianoSoft software to the playback of songs on your favorite CDs. To select a song, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Playback begins with the CD playback. =Memory= A01-038 <00:03> My (SPS)V+00 Favorite SmartKey™ Playback Select a SmartKey song [PLAY] Special SmartKey software uses all the “SmartKey” features to create an exciting way in which non-players can learn to play simple melodies, one note at a time, without the need for written music. SmartKey software does this by partially depressing the piano key to signal which note should be played. The Disklavier then waits for you to press this key before it continues to the next note in the melody (If you miss the movement of the key, the Disklavier will repeat the movement until you press the key). When you press the key, the Disklavier will reward you with ear tickling phrases, incredible harmonies, and lush arpeggios to give you the aural and visual image of a complete high-quality performance. In short, it SHOWS you which key to play, WAITS for you to play that key before it continues, and REWARDS you with music. It is like having an eternally patient music teacher showing your fingers which notes to play. 1 Select a desired SmartKey song. To cancel the SmartKey playback, see Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part” on page 31. To select a song, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. 41 Chapter 4 Advanced Song Playback 2 Press [PLAY]. Playback stops, and the key to play next moves slightly. Key moves slightly The key to play flashes in the counter. Pachelbel=s Flashes 3 Play the key that the keyboard indicates. This will continue until the song is finished. Notice that the Disklavier patiently waits for you to play the right key before proceeding to the next key. Also, notice that if you happen to miss the cue, it will gently remind you what the key is every few seconds until you play the right key. ■ Key Notation As a reference, “C3” is middle “C”, which means “C4” is an octave above middle “C” and so on. C 2D 2 F 2G 2 A 2 C 3D 3 F 3G 3A 3 C 4 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 Middle C 42 Chapter 5 Advanced Piano Playing Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal Metronome [METRONOME] 1 Press [METRONOME] on the remote control. The metronome setting screen appears and the metronome starts to click. Note: The tempo parameter displayed on the metronome setting screen indicates the number of beats in a minute, and one beat represents a quarter. When you play a song written in different measure unit from quarter note, change the setting (e.g.When playing a song in 3/2, set beat to 6/4). English The internal metronome helps you playing along the meter (beat) and the tempo you set. Also the volume of the metronome can be adjusted. =METRONOME= -+ TEMPO=117bpm =4/4 VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER 2 To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ] =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =4/4 VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm. 3 To change the beat, move the cursor to the beat parameter (“”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER The following beat settings are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4. 43 Chapter 5 Advanced Piano Playing 4 To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ] =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps. 5 To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ] =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME= SOUND=TG Note: The sound parameter does not appear when the quiet or headphone mode is activated on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. The metronome sound is fixed to “TG.” The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG 6 To cancel this function, press [METRONOME] again. Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice [VOICE] The Disklavier’s [VOICE] lets you assign a voice from the internal XG tone generator to accompany the piano while you play. You will hear in unison the piano sound coming from the Disklavier and an ensemble voice produced by the internal XG tone generator. This is sometimes referred to as voice layering or unison. The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11 drum kits for playing the keyboard. 1 Press [VOICE] on the remote control. The voice selection screen appears, and the voice function is activated. ][ 44 For details on voice groups and voices, see Chapter 13 “Internal Tone Generator Voices” on page 131. Chapter Advanced Piano Playing 2 5 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group. Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the voice parameters. 3 English ][ To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the voice parameter (“Voice”), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ][!" If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance setting screen. 4 To inactivate this function, press [VOICE] again. See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback” on page 32. Note: The voice function is inactivated if you escape from the voice selection screen by other operations. 45 Chapter 6 The Silent Piano™ Function This chapter describes useful functions for piano playing, silencing the acoustic piano. (Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function) What is the Silent Piano™ Function? The Disklavier incorporates Yamaha’s innovative Silent Piano™ function that keeps the hammers from striking the strings, effectively silencing the acoustic piano. Sound information is sent to the digital piano tone generator, and output through the monitor speakers* or stereo headphones. Additionally, the optical sensor system registers every nuance of a player’s performance with no interference whatsoever to the player’s touch of the keys. * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. When you play back songs in normal mode, the acoustic piano plays the piano parts, providing live piano performance, and the accompanying sounds are output through the monitor speakers*. When you engage the Silent Piano™ function, the acoustic piano is silenced and the piano parts are played by the digital piano tone generator. This enables you to adjust the volume of not only the accompanying sounds but of the piano as well as that you can enjoy listening to songs quietly through the monitor speakers* or silently through stereo headphones. Quiet Mode and Headphone Mode There are two modes to the Silent Piano™ function; quiet mode and headphone mode. You can select either mode to suit your surroundings. Quiet Mode In the quiet mode, sound is output through the monitor speakers*. By adjusting the volume, you can listen to songs or play the keyboard more quietly than on the acoustic piano. * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. Headphone Mode In the headphone mode, sound is output through the stereo headphones. Using headphones allows you to listen to songs or play the piano privately at any time, day or night. 46 Note: For grand pianos, connecting headphones to the Silent Piano™ control box activates the headphone mode. For upright pianos, connecting headphones in the quiet mode activates the headphone mode. Chapter The Silent Piano™ Function 6 Playing the Digital Piano (Quiet Mode) For grand piano: [QUIET] or blue button For upright piano: Slide the center pedal Put the Disklavier in the quiet mode when you listen to songs or play the piano more quietly than on the acoustic piano. When the quiet mode is activated, you are essentially playing the digital piano. English ■ For Grand Pianos Note: Even though the quiet mode is activated, the keying sound of the keyboard remains. Push the [QUIET] switch on the Silent Piano™ control box, or press the blue button on the remote control to play the digital piano. The [QUIET] indicator on the Silent Piano™ control box lights green and the quiet mode is activated. [QUIET] indicator To disengage the quiet mode, push the [QUIET] switch on the Silent Piano™ control box again, or press the red button on the remote control. ■ For Upright Pianos Press the center pedal and slide it to the left. To disengage the quiet mode, set the center pedal to the original position. 47 Chapter 6 The Silent Piano™ Function Using the Headphones (Headphone Mode) For grand piano: Connect the headphones For upright piano: Slide the center pedal Connect the headphones Put the Disklavier in the headphone mode when you listen to songs or play the piano privately at any time, day and night. ■ For Grand Pianos Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack on the Silent Piano™ control box. The [QUIET] indicator on the Silent Piano™ control box lights green and the headphone mode is activated. ■ For Upright Pianos 48 1 Press the center pedal and slide it to the left. 2 Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack on the Silent Piano™ control box. Caution: To prevent damage to your hearing, refrain from raising the volume to excessive levels, and do not use the headphones for extended periods of time. Note: Even though the headphone mode is activated, the keying sound of the keyboard remains. Chapter The Silent Piano™ Function 6 Adjusting the Volume in the Quiet Mode [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] In the quiet mode, volume can be adjusted with the remote control. Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control. English 1 The main volume setting screen appears. =BALANCE= VOLUME-/+ MAIN VOLUME -01 2 Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to adjust the volume. Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0. Adjusting the Volume in the Headphone Mode [VOLUME] In the headphone mode, volume can be adjusted with the [VOLUME] knob on the Silent Piano™ control box. Turn the knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Note: Turning the knob fully counterclockwise mutes the sound of the digital piano. ■ For Grand Pianos [VOLUME] knob ■ For Upright Pianos [VOLUME] knob 49 Chapter 6 The Silent Piano™ Function Selecting the Voice in the Quiet/Headphone Mode [VOICE] In the quiet or headphone mode, you can select the digital piano sound (voice) that expresses various instruments to your preference. The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11 drum kits for playing the keyboard. 1 For details on voice groups and voices, see Chapter 13 “Internal Tone Generator Voices” on page 131. Press [VOICE] on the remote control. The voice selection screen appears, and the voice function is activated. ][ 2 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group. Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the voice parameters. =VOICE= ?=-+ Group=02<ChromaticPerc> Voice=040<Celesta >[XG ] 3 To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the voice parameter (“Voice”), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =VOICE= ?=-+ Group=02<ChromaticPerc> Voice=041<Glocken >[XG ] See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback” on page 32. If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance setting screen. 4 50 To inactivate this function, press [VOICE] again. Note: The voice function is inactivated if you escape from the voice selection screen by other operations. Chapter The Silent Piano™ Function 6 Applying the Reverb Effect to the Digital Piano [SETUP] “Reverb” 1 Note: The reverb effect setting is saved even though the Disklavier is turned off. English A piano sounds differently depending on the size of the room, or the material of the building in which it is played. The reverberation is the major reason for this difference. Using the reverb functions of the Disklavier and simulating the reverberation in a concert hall, gives you the feeling of the being at a live performance. Note: Reverb is off when the [REVERB] knob is turned fully counterclockwise. Turn the [REVERB] knob clockwise to turn the reverb effect on. For Grand Pianos [REVERB] knob For Upright Pianos [REVERB] knob 2 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 3 Select “Reverb” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] =SETUP MENU= _(2/3)] *Network *Playback *Reverb *Shortcut The reverb setting screen appears. =Reverb= >Type=Hall1 -+ 51 Chapter 6 The Silent Piano™ Function 4 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired reverb effect. The following reverb settings are available: Type Description Room Simulates the reverb of a medium-sized room Hall1 Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall Hall2 Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall 5 Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu. 6 Adjust the reverb depth with the [REVERB] knob. Note: The default setting for the reverb effect is “Hall1.” Turn the knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease the reverb effect. Inactivating the Key Movement during Playback During playback [FUNC.] During playback of a song, key normally move in accordance with the playback of the respective note’s key. In the quiet or headphone mode, you can select an option of stopping this key movement. This enables you, for example, to play along with the song being played back, to add your own improvisation, or to create a four-hand duet. 1 During the song playback in the quiet or headphone mode, press [FUNC.] several times. The key motion setting screen appears. =Memory= -+ENT KeyMotion=ON 2 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the setting. =Memory= KeyMotion=OFF 52 -+ENT Note: Key movement can only be inactivated in the quiet or headphone mode. Otherwise, the keys will always move during playback, with the exception of L/R song playback, in which you can cancel either the left- or right-hand piano part. Note: You can change the setting for key movement from the “Playback” option in the setup menu. Chapter 7 Basic Recording A song that you play on the Disklavier can be recorded and the recorded song can be easily saved for the selected medium. Furthermore, you can title your new recording for simple distinguish before recording. Recording a New Song [RECORD] 1 Select a destination medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. The recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the control unit lights red and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green. =Memory= A01-039 <00:00> Note: Up to 999 songs can be recorded in a medium. English You can save a new song that you play for an album. To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Note: You cannot select “CD” as the destination medium. S0 LR 99% (New Song) The level appears in the format section as soon as you play a keyboard or press a pedal. 3 Press [PLAY]. [PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing. The Disklavier is now ready for you to play. 4 Start playing your song. Recording will start automatically as soon as you touch a key. The counter starts to advance. =Memory= A01-039 <00:01> S0 LR 99% (New Song) 5 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The recorded song is loaded. 53 Chapter 7 Basic Recording Titling a Song at the Start of Recording [RECORD] [FUNC.]×2 Title a new song before you start recording. 1 Select a destination medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. 3 Press [FUNC.] twice in the recording standby screen. To rename the existing song, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Renaming a Song” on page 79. =Memory= [A-Z] ×2 Enter a title to a new song. =Memory= Chopin [a-z] You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on next page. 5 Press [PLAY] after title determined. Recording begins. 54 To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. The song title editing screen appears. 4 Chapter Basic Recording 7 ■ Entering Characters How to Enter Characters with the Remote Control The following illustration shows how to enter characters with the remote control. English Number keypad Overwrites a number. [SEARCH] button Overwrites a dot (.). [REVERSE] button Deletes a character. The characters on the right of the deleted one move to the left for one character space. [FORWARD] button Inserts a space. [ ]/[ ] buttons Moves the cursor left and right. [+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons Selects the character. Pressing these keys simultaneously overwrites a space. Yellow button Switches the character types. The character type cycles as follows each time you press this button: [A-Z]: letters (upper case) [a-z]: letters (lower case) [etc]: symbols [0-9]: numbers Available Characters The following table shows which characters are available. Character Type Letters (Upper Case) [A-Z] Letters (Lower Case) [a-z] Symbols [etc] Numbers [0-9] Characters Space A B C D E F G H I J K L N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Space a b c d e f g h i j k l n o p q r s t u v w x y z Space ! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? _ @ Space 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M m 9 55 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording This chapter describes further functions for the advanced piano recording such as playing and measuring the current playing song tempo with the metronome, recording the left-hand part and the right-hand part separately. Recording with the Internal Metronome [METRONOME] [RECORD] You can use the metronome to record songs. Songs recorded with the metronome will be in the measures and beats format. All metronome parameters are reset when the Disklavier is switched off. 1 Press [METRONOME] on the remote control. The metronome setting screen appears. =METRONOME= -+ TEMPO=117bpm =4/4 VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER 2 To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ] =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =4/4 VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm. 3 To change the beat, move the cursor to the beat parameter (“”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER The following beat settings are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4. 56 Note: The tempo parameter displayed on the metronome setting screen indicates the number of beats in a minute, and one beat represents a quarter. When you play a song written in different measure unit from quarter note, change the setting (e.g. When playing a song in 3/2, set beat to 6/4). Chapter Advanced Recording 4 To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. 8 ] =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER English The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps. 5 To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =METRONOME= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME= SOUND=TG ] Note: The sound parameter does not appear when the quiet or headphone mode is activated on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. The metronome sound is fixed to “TG.” The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG 6 Press [RECORD] in the metronome setting screen. The metronome recording setting screen appears. =Memory= _?=]-+ TEMPO=125bpm =3/4 VOLUME= SOUND=TG 7 Press [PLAY] Recording begins immediately. [PLAY/PAUSE], [REC] and [SELECT] on the control unit flash simultaneously at the first beat of the metronome. 8 Start playing your song. 9 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The recorded song is loaded. 57 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately [RECORD] [FUNC.] When recording an L/R song, the left- and right-hand parts can be recorded separately. Either part can be recorded first, and the pedals can be recorded with the first part. While you record the second part, the first part will play back for monitoring. If the left-hand or right-hand part is difficult to play at normal speed, the first part can be recorded at a slow tempo, and then the tempo changed afterwards to record the second part at the normal song speed. This section describes how to record the left-hand part first then the right-hand part second. 1 Select a destination medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. 3 The part selection screen appears. L=REC R=OFF 4 LR Make sure that the left-hand part is set to be recorded (“L=REC”), then press [PLAY]. This Disklavier is now ready for you to play the left-hand part. 5 Start playing your song. Recording will start as soon as you touch a key. 6 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The L/R song with the left-hand part recorded is saved onto the selected album. Next, record the right-hand part overwriting the left-hand part that you have just recorded. 58 To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen. =Memory= In the case you want to title your new song before recording, see Chapter 7 “Basic Recording – Titling a Song at the Start of Recording” on page 54, to rename the title after recording, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Renaming a Song” on page 79. If you want to record your L/R song using the metronome, see Chapter 8 “Advanced Recording – Recording with the Internal Metronome” on page 56. Chapter Advanced Recording Press [RECORD]. 8 Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song with the lefthand part that you have just recorded, then press [ENTER]. 9 Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen. English 7 8 The part selection screen appears. =Memory= L=PLY R=OFF LR The part that has already been recorded is displayed as “L=PLY.” 10 Press [PART SELECT R] to record the right-hand part. =Memory= L=PLY R=REC LR The part set to “REC” will be recorded. 11 Press [PLAY]. Playback of the left-hand recorded part starts immediately, so be sure that you are ready to play the right-hand part along with it. 59 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording 12 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The following screen appears. =Memory= ENT Save to Disk? *SAVE *NEW *CANCEL The following table gives a description of each of the options. Option Description SAVE The second part is saved with the first part under the current song number, overwriting the previously saved first part. NEW The second part is saved under a new song number. The first part is kept under the previous song number. CANCEL The second part is discarded. The first part is kept under the previous song number. 13 Press [ ] and [ [ENTER]. ] to select an option, then press The right-hand part is saved as indicated or canceled. Recording the Left and Right Parts Together (Setting a Split Point) [RECORD] [FUNC.] You can also record an L/R song by playing the left- and right-hand parts simultaneously. In this case, a keyboard split point is set, and the notes played on the left-hand side of the split point are saved as the left-hand part, and notes played on the right-hand side of the split point are saved as the right-hand part. 1 Select a destination medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. 3 The part selection screen appears. L=REC R=OFF 60 To select a medium or album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen. =Memory= LR In the case you want to title your new song before recording, see Chapter 7 “Basic Recording – Titling a Song at the Start of Recording” on page 54, to rename the title after recording, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Renaming a Song” on page 79. If you want to record your L/R song using the metronome, see Chapter 8 “Advanced Recording – Recording with the Internal Metronome” on page 56. Chapter Advanced Recording 4 8 Press [PART SELECT R] to set both parts to record. The split point setting screen appears. =Memory= -+ LR=REC SPLIT=C3 English The above display shows that the default keyboard split point is note C3, or middle C. In this case, note C3 and notes below are saved as the left-hand part and notes above C3 are saved as the right-hand part, as shown in the following figure. C3 Left-hand part 5 Right-hand part To change the split point, press a key on the keyboard or [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a different key. or The split point can be set from note A-1 to note C7. 6 Press [PLAY]. The Disklavier is now ready for you to play. 7 Starts playing your song with the left- and right-hand parts and the pedal part simultaneously. Recording will start as soon as you touch a key. 8 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The recorded song is loaded. 61 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording Re-Recording One Part [RECORD] Select the L/R song [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] You can re-record the only one part left-hand or the right-hand of the existing L/R song. 1 Select a desired medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. 3 Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song that you want to re-record, then press [ENTER]. 4 Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] to select the part to re-record. The part set to “REC” will be re-recorded. 5 Press [PLAY]. Recording will start immediately, so be sure that you are ready to play the part. 6 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. The following screen appears. =Memory= ENT Save to Disk? *SAVE *NEW *CANCEL 62 To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Chapter Advanced Recording 8 The following table gives a description of each of the options. Option Description SAVE The re-recorded part is saved with the other existing part under the current song number. NEW The re-recorded part is saved under a new song number. The existing parts are kept under the current song number. English CANCEL The re-recorded part is discarded. The existing parts are kept under the current song number. 7 Press [ ] and [ [ENTER]. ] to select an option, then press The re-recorded part is saved as indicated or canceled. Changing the Default Tempo [RECORD] Select the song [FUNC.]×3 This function allows you to change the default tempo of a song and save the change. It should not be confused with the playback tempo function described in Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Changing the Playback Tempo” in which tempo changes are lost when the Disklavier is turned off. The tempo of a song can be changed many times. This function can be used when recording a very complex song that is difficult to play at a fast tempo. First, record the song at a tempo you can manage, then change the tempo afterwards. For example, you could record a difficult left-hand part at a slow tempo, use this function to change the tempo, then record the right-hand part at the normal tempo. If a song’s time format is minutes and seconds, tempo changes are specified as a percentage of the original tempo. If a song’s time format is measures and beats, tempo changes are specified in beats per minute. 1 Select a desired medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. To select a medium or album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. 63 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording 3 Press [ ] and [ ] to select the song in which you want to change the tempo, then press [ENTER]. 4 Press [FUNC.] three times. ×3 For measures and beats, the current song tempo (bpm) is shown. =Memory= -+ TEMPO=117bpm =4/4 VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER For minutes and seconds, the current song tempo is shown as “000%.” =Memory= TEMPO=+000% 5 -+ Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the tempo. [+/YES] increases the tempo, and [–/NO] decreases the tempo. For measure and beats, the tempo range is from 30 bpm to 400 bpm. For minutes and seconds, the tempo range is from –75% to +242%. 6 Press [STOP] to save the tempo change. The following screen appears. =Memory= ENT Save to Disk? *SAVE *NEW *CANCEL The following table gives a description of each of the options. Option Description SAVE The song is saved at its new tempo under the current song number. NEW The song is saved at its new tempo under a new song number. The original song is kept under the previous song number. CANCEL The song with a new tempo is discarded. The original song is kept under the previous song number. 64 Note: You cannot change the beat setting on the prerecorded songs. Note: The sound parameter does not appear when the quiet or headphone mode is activated on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. Chapter Advanced Recording 7 Press [ ] and [ 8 ] to select an option, then press [ENTER]. English To change the tempo again or to reset the original tempo, repeat steps 1 to 6. Video Synchronized Recording [SETUP] “AudioI/O” Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder By recording a song played on the Disklavier synchronized with the video recording, later on, you can enjoy piano playback with the video. First set up the camcorder, the DVD recorder, and the Disklavier, and then start recording by following the procedures below. For details on video synchronized playback, see Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Video Synchronized Playback” on page 40. ■ Setting for Video Synchronized Recording 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The audio I/O setting screen appears. ] 65 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording 3 Select “OMNI IN” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to “Auto Detect”. ] 4 Select “OMNI OUT” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to “SYNC”. ]), ][ 5 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. 6 Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder to the control unit. Camcorder (for shooting) DVD recorder (for recording and playback) TV (for displaying) To A/V output Video connector (yellow) To video input A/V cord (supplied with the camcorder) RCA cord (not supplied) Control unit 66 To video input To video output To audio input To audio output Video cord (not supplied) RCA cord (not supplied) Note: Confirm the shape of input/output connectors on the camcorder and the DVD recorder, and prepare the cables fit to them. Chapter Advanced Recording 8 ■ Starting Video Synchronized Recording 1 Select a destination medium and album. 2 Press [RECORD]. To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. English The video synchronized recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashed in green. =Memory=(SYNC) SO LR 99% A01-005 <00:00> (New Song) 3 Set the camcorder to video shooting mode. 4 Select the video input on the DVD recorder which the camcorder is connected to, then start recording on the DVD recorder. 5 Press [PLAY]. [PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing, and the counter starts to advance. =Memory=(SYNC) SO LR 99% A01-005 <00:00> (New Song) 6 Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing your song. 7 Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. 8 Stop recording on the DVD recorder. Note: This step is necessary for synchronization of the song and the video playback, and should not be omitted. 67 Chapter 8 Advanced Recording ■ Using the Camcorder only If your camcorder has both mic input and audio output, you can perform video synchronized recording using the camcorder only. 1. Set the Disklavier following the procedures 1 to 5 on page 65. 2. Connect a camcorder to the control unit. Camcorder To mic/line input RCA cord with resistance (not supplied) To audio output RCA cord (not supplied) Control unit 3. Select a destination medium and album. 4. Press [RECORD]. 5. Start recording on the camcorder. 6. Press [PLAY]. 7. Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing your song. 8. Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song. 9. Stop recording on the camcorder. 68 Chapter Advanced Recording 8 CD Synchronized Recording Insert an audio CD [RECORD] You can record a Disklavier piano performance along with the playback of songs on commercial CDs. Select a destination medium and album, then song in the selected album. 2 Insert an audio CD and select the song that you want to synchronize with. 3 Press [RECORD]. Note: The Disklavier recognizes the destination album by selecting the song in it. Note that the selected song is not overwritten by this procedure. English 1 To select a medium and album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. The SPS recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green. =Memory=(SPS) A01-038 <00:00> LR 99% (New Song) 4 Select the desired part of a song, then press [PLAY] to start synchronizing. Recording begins with the CD playback. 5 Start playing the Disklavier along with the CD playback. 6 Press [STOP] to stop recording. The recorded song is loaded. To play back the performance recorded with this feature, see Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)” on page 41. 69 Chapter 9 Media Management This chapter describes how to manage contents inside the media, such as managing albums, songs and playlists. Managing Albums Album selection screen [FUNC.] You can use the album function menu for creating, deleting and copying albums inside a medium. 1 Press [FUNC.] in the album selection screen. To select a album, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. The album function menu screen appears. (1/2) =ALBUM MENU= *CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum *NewAlbum *RenameAlbum 2 Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ] Note: Available functions vary depending on the medium you selected. About playlists, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Managing Playlists” on page 84. The following functions are available: - CopyAlbum - DeleteAlbum - NewAlbum - RenameAlbum - SortAlbum - AddToPList - DeleteList - NewList - RenameList Making Copies of Albums Album selection screen [FUNC.] “CopyAlbum” You can make copies of the album to the different medium. This function is available for albums on [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. 70 Note: Up to 99 albums can be saved in a medium. Chapter Media Management 1 9 Select “CopyAlbum” in the album function menu, then press [ENTER]. (1/2) =ALBUM MENU= *CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum *NewAlbum *RenameAlbum The CopyAlbum screen appears. 2 English ! { Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ! { 3a To copy to the new album, press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. !" # { 3b To add to the existing album, press [ ] to move the cursor to the album, and press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the album, then press [ENTER]. { “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. ! { 71 Chapter 9 Media Management 4 Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel. =CopyAlbum= Executing... =CopyAlbum= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen. Deleting Albums Album selection screen [FUNC.] “DeleteAlbum” You can delete the albums. This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. 1 Select “DeleteAlbum” in the album function menu, then press [ENTER]. (1/2) =ALBUM MENU= *CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum *NewAlbum *RenameAlbum The DeleteAlbum screen appears. 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. 3 Press [+/YES] to delete the album, [–/NO] to cancel. =DeleteAlbum= Executing... =DeleteAlbum= Completed. Press any button. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen. 72 ANY Chapter Media Management 9 Creating a New Album Album selection screen [FUNC.] “NewAlbum” You can create a new album into the selected medium. This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1] and [USB2]. Select the “NewAlbum” in the album function menu, then press [ENTER]. Note: If you enter the same title as the album already exists, the new album is titled in the form of “album title xx” (“xx” indicates the number). English 1 Note: Up to 99 albums can be created in a medium. (1/2) =ALBUM MENU= *CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum *NewAlbum *RenameAlbum The NewAlbum screen appears. ENT =NewAlbum= 03:(no title) 2 Press [ENTER]. The album title editing screen appears. =NewAlbum= 3 [A-Z] Enter a title to a new album. =NewAlbum= Pops [a-z] You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. 73 Chapter 9 Media Management 5 Press [+/YES] to create a new album, [–/NO] to cancel. =NewAlbum= Executing... =NewAlbum= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen. Renaming an Album Album selection screen [FUNC.] “RenameAlbum” You can rename the albums which already named. This function is available only for albums on [Memory]. 1 Select “RenameAlbum” in the album function menu, then press [ENTER]. (1/2) =ALBUM MENU= *CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum *NewAlbum *RenameAlbum The RenameAlbum screen appears. 2 Press [ENTER]. The album title editing screen appears. 3 Enter a new title to the selected album. =RenameAlbum= Jazz Selection [a-z] You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55. 74 Chapter Media Management 4 9 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. English 5 Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel. =RenameAlbum= Executing... =RenameAlbum= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return the album selection screen. Rearranging the Order of Albums Album selection screen [FUNC.] “SortAlbum” You can rearrange the order of albums that you selected. This function is available only for albums on [Memory]. 1 Select “SortAlbum” in the album function menu, then press [ENTER]. } The SortAlbum screen appears. =SortAlbum= ENT 06:Favorite Latin Select 07:Free Flight 2 Press [ ] and [ position. ] to move the albums to the desired =SortAlbum= ENT 06:Favorite Latin Select 07:Free Flight =SortAlbum= ENT 07:Free Flight 06:Favorite Latin Select 75 Chapter 9 Media Management 3 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =SortAlbum= OK? YES/NO 08:Mike Garson Trio-Live 06:Favorite Latin Select 4 Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel. =SortAlbum= Executing... =SortAlbum= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen. Managing Songs Song selection screen [FUNC.] You can use the song function menu for managing the copy or the deletion songs inside the album. 1 Press [FUNC.] in the song selection screen. To select the song, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. The song function menu screen appears. (1/2) =SONG MENU= *CopySong *DeleteSong *RenameSong *SortSong 2 Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ] Note: Available functions vary depending on the medium you selected. Note: If there is no available function or no song, the song function menu screen does not appear although pressing [FUNC.]. The following functions are available: - CopySong - DeleteSong - RenameSong - SortSong - AddToPList - ConvertSong - Counter - Strip XP 76 About playlists, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Managing Playlists” on page 84. Chapter Media Management 9 Making Copies of Songs Song selection screen [FUNC.] “CopySong” You can copy songs stored on an album to another. This function is available for song in the album on [Memory], [CD](CDROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. Select “CopySong” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. Note: Up to 999 songs can be saved in an album. English 1 Note: Copy-protected songs, such as PianoSoft songs, cannot be copied to a removable medium. (1/2) =SONG MENU= *CopySong *DeleteSong *RenameSong *SortSong The CopySong screen appears. }{ a { 2 Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =CopySong= 001:MoaArt {USB1 >01:/ 3 }{-+ENT Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album, and press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a destination album. }{-+ENT =CopySong= 001:MoaArt {USB1 >02:/MyFolder 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. a { 77 Chapter 9 Media Management 5 Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel. =CopySong= Executing... =CopySong= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Deleting Songs Song selection screen [FUNC.] “DeleteSong” You can delete songs stored on an album. This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2], [Playlist] and [FromToPC]. 1 Select “DeleteSong” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. (1/2) =SONG MENU= *CopySong *DeleteSong *RenameSong *SortSong The DeleteSong screen appears. ENT =DeleteSong= 001:Mo=Art 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. = 3 Press [+/YES] to delete the song, [–/NO] to cancel. =DeleteSong= Executing... =DeleteSong= Completed. Press any button. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. 78 ANY Chapter Media Management 9 Renaming a Song Song selection screen [FUNC.] “RenameSong” You can rename the songs which already named. This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. Select “RenameSong” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. English 1 (1/2) =SONG MENU= *CopySong *DeleteSong *RenameSong *SortSong The RenameSong screen appears. ENT =RenameSong= 006:Toccata 2 Press [ENTER]. The song title editing screen appears. =RenameSong= Toccata 3 [A-Z] Enter a new title to the selected song. You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =RenameSong= OK? YES/NO 006:Toccata and Fugue 79 Chapter 9 Media Management 5 Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel. =RenameSong= Executing... =RenameSong= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Rearranging the Order of Songs Song selection screen [FUNC.] “SortSong” You can rearrange the order of songs in an album. This function is available only for songs in the album on [Memory] and [Playlist]. 1 Select “SortSong” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. (1/2) =SONG MENU= *CopySong *DeleteSong *RenameSong *SortSong The SortSong screen appears. =SortSong= ENT 006:Toccata and Fugue 007:Admiration 2 Press [ ] and [ position. ] to move the songs to the desired =SortSong= ENT 006:Toccata and Fugue 007:Admiration 80 =SortSong= ENT 007:Admiration 006:Toccata and Fugue Chapter Media Management 3 9 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =SortSong= OK? YES/NO 008:Interaction 006:Toccata and Fugue English 4 Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel. =SortSong= Executing... =SortSong= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Converting Song Format Song selection screen [FUNC.] “ConvertSong” The song format can be converted to other format. This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. 1 Note: The converted song will be newly added to the end of the album. Select “ConvertSong” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. } The ConvertSong screen appears. -+ENT =ConvertSong= 001:Song For Students SMF0 E-SEQ 81 Chapter 9 Media Management 2 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a song format. -+ENT =ConvertSong= 001:Song For Students SMF0 Piano1 This following options are available: 3 Option Song Format E-SEQ E-SEQ format SMF0 SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 SMF1 SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1 Piano1 E-SEQ format to play on all Disklavier in correct tempo Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =ConvertSong=OK? YES/NO 001:Song For Students SMF0 Piano1 4 Press [+/YES] to convert, [–/NO] to cancel. =ConvertSong= Executing... =ConvertSong= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Changing the Counter Display Song selection screen [FUNC.] “Counter” The counter display of a song can be changed from “measures and beats”(metronome) to “minutes and seconds” or vice versa. This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. 82 Chapter Media Management 1 9 Select “Counter” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. } The CounterChange screen appears. English ENT =CounterChange= 001:Song For Students TIME METRONOME TIME: minutes and seconds display METRONOME: measures and beats display 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =CounterChange=OK?YES/NO 001:Song For Students TIME METRONOME 3 Press [+/YES] to change, [–/NO] to cancel. =CounterChange= Executing... =CounterChange= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form (Strip XP) Song selection screen [FUNC.] “Strip XP” Some Disklavier pianos record highly precise control information (XP events) that becomes part of the MIDI song files. This data is used to achieve accurate playback on the Disklavier PRO model, but is not used when the file is played back on general MIDI devices. When you edit the song with external MIDI devices (for example a software sequencer), the relationship between the note data and the XP event as well as the actual performance may not be maintained. There may be cases in which songs edited in this manner cannot be played back normally, depending on the instrument’s settings. In such cases, use the Strip XP function to remove the XP event to convert the song to standard MIDI format before using it for playback. Strip XP also makes it possible to reduce the size of MIDI files when desired. Note: Once the XP event is stripped, the original data cannot be restored. Before converting valuable music data, be sure to backup the original data. 83 Chapter 9 Media Management 1 Select “Strip XP” in the song function menu, then press [ENTER]. } The Strip XP screen appears. 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. 3 Press [+/YES] to execute, [–/NO] to cancel. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the song selection screen. Managing Playlists By creating lists of your favorite songs, you can program your Disklavier to automatically play back a series of songs. At the initial factory settings, no playlist is created in the internal flash memory. First create your own playlist, then play back that list. 84 To create a playlist, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Creating a New Playlist” on page 87. Chapter Media Management 9 Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist Media selection screen “Memory” Album or song selection screen [FUNC.] “AddToPList” This function is available only for songs/albums on [Memory]. Select “AddToPList” in the album or song function menu, then press [ENTER]. } Note: You cannot add songs on media other than [Memory] directly to the playlist. First, copy songs to the internal flash memory. English 1 Note: Up to 999 songs can be added to a playlist. The AddToPList screen appears. { 2 Note: If “New Playlist” is selected in step 2, the title of added album is copied to that playlist. Select a destination playlist with [+/YES] and [–/NO]. Note: If you select “New Playlist” and add songs to it, the playlist is titled as “My Playlist.” 3 Note: The new playlist created in this procedure can be selected from “Playlist” in the media selection screen. Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. ! { 4 Press [+/YES] to add, [–/NO] to cancel. =AddToPList= Executing... =AddToPList= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album or song selection screen. 85 Chapter 9 Media Management Deleting a Playlist Media selection screen “Playlist” Album selection screen [FUNC.] “DeleteList” You can delete the playlists which already registered. 1 Select “DeleteList” in the album function menu for the playlist, then press [ENTER]. (1/1) =ALBUM MENU= *DeleteList *NewList *RenameList The DeleteList screen appears. ENT =DeleteList= 02:My Best Collection 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =DeleteList= OK? YES/NO 02:My Best Collection 3 Press [+/YES] to delete the playlist, [–/NO] to cancel. =DeleteList= Executing... =DeleteList= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the playlist. 86 Note: Even if you delete the playlist, songs or albums added to that playlist remain in the internal flash memory. Chapter Media Management 9 Creating a New Playlist Media selection screen “Playlist” Album selection screen [FUNC.] “NewList” You can create a new playlist for playing back your favorite songs in your selected order. Select “NewList” in the album function menu for the playlist, then press [ENTER]. (1/1) =ALBUM MENU= *DeleteList *NewList *RenameList Note: If you enter the same title as the playlist already exists, the new playlist is titled in the form of “playlist title [xx]” (“xx” indicates the number). English 1 Note: Up to 99 playlists can be created. The NewList screen appears. ENT =NewList= 03:(no title) 2 Press [ENTER]. The playlist title editing screen appears. =NewList= 3 [A-Z] Enter a title to a new playlist. =NewList= My Best [a-z] You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =NewList= OK? YES/NO 03:My Best Collection 87 Chapter 9 Media Management 5 Press [+/YES] to create a new playlist, [–/NO] to cancel. =NewList= Executing... =NewList= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the playlist. Renaming a Playlist Media selection screen “Playlist” Album selection screen [FUNC.] “RenameList” You can rename a playlist which already registered. 1 Select “RenameList” in the album function menu for the playlist, then press [ENTER]. (1/1) =ALBUM MENU= *DeleteList *NewList *RenameList The RenameList screen appears. ENT =RenameList= My Best Collection 2 Press [ENTER]. The playlist title editing screen appears. 3 Enter a new title to the selected playlist. You can enter up to 64 characters. Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 55. 88 Note: The new playlist created in this procedure can be selected from “Playlist” in the media selection screen. Chapter Media Management 4 9 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =RenameList= OK? YES/NO My Best Hit Collection English 5 Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel. =RenameList= Executing... =RenameList= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the playlist. Managing Media Media selection screen [FUNC.] You can use the media function menu for copying or deleting entire contents inside the media. 1 To select a media, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Press [FUNC.] in the media selection screen. The media function menu screen appears. =MEDIA MENU= *CopyAll *DeleteAll 2 Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ] Note: Available functions vary depending on the medium you selected. Note: If there is no available functions, the media function menu screen does not appears although pressing [FUNC.]. The following functions are available: - CopyAll - DeleteAll - Format - Refresh 89 Chapter 9 Media Management Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a Medium Media selection screen [FUNC.] “CopyAll” You can copy the entire contents in a medium to the another medium. The function is available for [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. To select a medium, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. 1 Select “CopyAll” in the media function menu, then press [ENTER]. =MEDIA MENU= *CopyAll *DeleteAll The CopyAll screen appears. =CopyAll= USB1 Memory 2 Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =CopyAll= USB1 Memory 3 -+ENT Note: Confirm that the destination medium has enough space to store the contents. -+ENT Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =CopyAll= OK? YES/NO USB1 Memory 4 Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel. =CopyAll= Executing... =CopyAll= Completed. Press any button. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the media selection screen. 90 ANY Note: If the maximum number of the albums in the destination medium exceeds 99, copying stops. Chapter Media Management 9 Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium Media selection screen [FUNC.] “DeleteAll” You can delete the entire contents in a medium. This function is available for [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC]. Select “DeleteAll” in the media function menu, then press [ENTER]. English 1 To select a medium, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. =MEDIA MENU= *CopyAll *DeleteAll The DeleteAll screen appears. ENT =DeleteAll= Media=Memory 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =DeleteAll= OK? YES/NO Media=Memory 3 Press [+/YES] to delete, [–/NO] to cancel. =DeleteAll= Executing... =DeleteAll= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the media selection screen. 91 Chapter 9 Media Management Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier You can copy song files from a Windows or Macintosh computer to a special folder on the Disklavier called [FromToPC] and then play them on the Disklavier. 1 Connect the control unit to a LAN (local area network) to which a personal computer with a song file is also connected. Personal computer Router LAN Control unit Note: Copy-protected files, such as PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs, cannot be copied to the [FromToPC] folder. Note: Do not copy the files other than Disklavier song files. Note: Do not access the [FromToPC] folder while the Disklavier is engaged in another operation (such as file copying or deleting). Note: It is necessary to configure the Disklavier properly for network communications by enabling it to get a DHCP IP address automatically (recommended) or by assigning an appropriate address manually. The procedure is the same as the one used for setting up the Disklavier for Internet communications. Please follow the instructions in Chapter 10 “Internet Direct Connection (IDC) – Setting the Disklavier for the Internet Connection” on page 107. Note: Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection. For details, see Chapter 10 “Internet Direct Connection (IDC) – Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet” on page 101. Note: For information about configuring a personal computer for network communications, please refer to the documentation that came with the computer. 92 Chapter Media Management 9 ■ For Windows 2 On the computer screen, click [Start] and then select [My Network Places]. The [My Network Places] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is shown in the [My Network Places] window. Note: The folder or icon name differs depending on the version of your operating system. Double-click the [Dkv*******] icon. English 3 Note: [Dkv******] differs depending on each Disklavier. The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is shown in the [Dkv******] folder. 4 Double-click the [FromToPC] icon. The [FromToPC] folder opens. 5 Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder. 6 Refresh the contents in the folder. See Chapter 9 “Media Management – Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]” on page 96. ■ For Windows: In case that you cannot find the [Dkv******] icon 1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control. 2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen. 3. Select “Information” to display the information of network settings. 4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and memorize that name. 5. Open the [My Network Places] on the computer, and then click the [Search] icon on the top of the window. 6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the [Computer name] box, and then click [Search] to start searching. 7. Open [Dkv******] and confirm that the [FromToPC] folder is shown under that. 8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder. 93 Chapter 9 Media Management ■ For Mac OS X 10.3 or 10.4 2 Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then click the [Network] icon in the left side of the window. The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv] icon is shown in the [Network] window. 3 Click the [Dkv] icon. Note: [Dkv******] differs depending on each Disklavier. The [Dkv] folder opens. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is shown in the [Dkv] folder. 4 Click the [Dkv******] icon. 5 In the first dialog that appears, select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu and click [OK]. 6 Click [OK] again in the next dialog that appears. Note: If the user ID and password are required during the process, enter any name for the ID and leave the space for the password blank. Connection process completes and the [FromToPC] icon appears in the left side of the window. 7 Click the [FromToPC] icon. The [FromToPC] folder opens. 94 8 Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder. 9 Refresh the contents in the folder. See Chapter 9 “Media Management – Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]” on page 96. Chapter Media Management 9 ■ For Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6 2 Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then select [Go] and then [Network] from the menu bar. Note: [Dkv******] differs depending on each Disklavier. The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is shown in the [Network] window. Click the [Dkv*******] icon. The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is shown in the [Dkv******] folder. 4 Note: If the user ID and password are required during the process, enter any name for the ID and leave the space for the password blank. English 3 Click the [FromToPC] icon. The [FromToPC] folder opens. 5 Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder. 6 Refresh the contents in the folder. See Chapter 9 “Media Management – Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]” on page 96. ■ For Macintosh: In case that you cannot find the [Dkv******] icon 1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control. 2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen. 3. Select “Information” to display the information of network settings. 4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and memorize that name. 5. Select [Go] and then [Connect to Server] from the menu bar on the computer. 6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the address field, and then click [Connect]. Use syntax “smb://” when entering the name (“smb://Dkv******”). 7. Select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu in the first window appears and click [OK]. Click [OK] again in the next window that appears. 8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder on the left side of the finder window. 95 Chapter 9 Media Management Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC] Media selection screen “FromToPC” [FUNC.] “Refresh” You must refresh the contents in the [FromToPC] folder after copying song files from a personal computer, in order to play them on the Disklavier. 1 Select “Refresh” in the media function menu, then press [ENTER]. The Refresh screen appears. ENT =Refresh= Media=FromToPC 2 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =Refresh= OK? YES/NO Media=FromToPC 3 Press [+/YES] to refresh, [–/NO] to cancel. =Refresh= Executing... =Refresh= Completed. Press any button. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the media selection screen. 96 ANY To select a medium, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Chapter Media Management 9 Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional) Select the floppy disk [FUNC.] “Format” In the case of using the unformatted floppy disk on the floppy drive (optional) or deleting the entire contents on the floppy disk, format the floppy disk. Connect the floppy drive (optional) to the USB port on the control unit. 2 Insert a floppy disk to the floppy drive. 3 Select “Format” in the media function menu, then press [ENTER]. English 1 Important: Formatting a floppy disk erases all data that stored in the disk, so make sure that the disk you are going to format does not contain the data you want to keep. To select a medium, see Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Selecting Medium and Their Contents” on page 18. Note: If you are formatting a floppy disk, make sure that the floppy disk’s erasure protection tab is set to “unprotected.” The Format screen appears. ENT =Format= Media=FD 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =Format= Media=FD 5 OK? YES/NO Press [+/YES] to format, [–/NO] to cancel. =Format= Executing... =Format= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the media selection screen. 97 Chapter 9 Media Management ■ Floppy Disk Accidental Erasure Protection Floppy disks have an erasure protection tab located on the reverse side of the disk in the bottom right-hand corner. When formatting a disk, make sure that its erasure protection tab is set to “unprotected.” Protected When the tab window is open, formatting and recording are not possible. Unprotected When the tab window is closed, formatting and recording are possible. Making Backups of Songs [SYSTEM] “Backup” You can make a backup copy of the songs and playlists. In order to protect your valuable music data, Yamaha strongly recommends that you backup your memory on regular basis. If the floppy disk is inserted to the optional floppy disk drive, eject it before you start making backups. 1 2 \ Connect an external USB medium to the USB port on the control unit. Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. The system menu screen appears. !"#$%{ 98 Note: Be sure to use the USB medium described in Chapter 2 “Getting Started – Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media” on page 15. Note: Make sure that the USB medium has enough space to save the backup data. Chapter Media Management 3 Select “Backup” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ 9 ] !"#$%{ English The Backup screen appears. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =Backup= OK? YES/NO Backup song data? 5 Press [+/YES] to make a backup, [–/NO] to cancel. = =Backup= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the system menu screen. Restoring the Backups [SYSTEM] “Restore” You can restore the current condition of the internal memory to the previous condition that you made a backup copy. 1 Connect an external USB medium in which you made backup last time to the USB port on the control unit. 2 Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. To make a backup, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Making Backups of Songs” on page 98. The system menu screen appears. !"#$%{ 99 Chapter 9 Media Management 3 Select “Restore” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] !"#$%{ The Restore screen appears. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =Restore= OK? YES/NO Restore this data? Date:2007-10-22 15:42:00 5 Press [+/YES] to restore, [–/NO] to cancel. = =Restore= Completed. Press any button. After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the system menu screen. 100 ANY Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) By connecting to the Internet, you can enjoy a streaming broadcast or download update programs directly. What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)? English Internet Direct Connection (IDC) is a feature that allows you to connect your Disklavier directly to the Internet. Internet Direct Connection users are able to listen to a streaming broadcast (DisklavierRadio™), and receive valuable information such as product updates. Your Disklavier can be upgraded remotely as new technologies and services are developed through the IDC service. Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service (IDC Registration) To use the IDC service, initial registration is required using an Internetconnected computer. Please register at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Once you have an IDC account, you will interact with that account using the remote control. To use the full IDC service, you are required to enter your registered ID (e-mail address) and password with the remote control. Note: If you have already registered for the IDC service with any other instrument (such as the Clavinova), you do not need to register again. You can use your ID and password obtained through that registration. Note: Some IDC service functions do not require an ID and password. Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet You can connect the Disklavier to a full-time online Internet connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. ■ Preparations • To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. • Use a computer to obtain and configure Internet service. You cannot obtain Internet service or configure router settings on a local area network using the Disklavier itself. • Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to connect the control unit and a router. • Before connecting the LAN cable, make sure to turn off (or shut down) the Disklavier. 101 Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) ■ Connecting the Control Unit to the Internet Connection example 1: Using a modem with router function Modem (with router function) Other device (such as computer) LAN cable Note: Some types of modems (such as ADSL modems or cable modems) have multiple ports for connecting two or more devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). If your modems have only one port, an optional router or hub is required in order to connect several devices simultaneously. Note: Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection. Control unit Connection example 2: Using a modem without router function Modem (without router function) Router Other device (such as computer) LAN cable Control unit 102 Note: Depending on the contract with your Internet provider, you may not be able to connect two or more devices (for example, a computer and the Disklavier) to the Internet. Please check your contract or contact your Internet provider for further information. Chapter Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 10 For further information on the Internet connection (only a wired LAN connection is supported), visit the Yamaha Disklavier website: http://services.music.yamaha.com/radio/ ■ Notes on Network Security English The Disklavier E3 attempts to achieve a balance between security and usability in its network implementation. However, a determined hacker may be able to defeat these security measures and utilize the network of the purchaser in an unauthorized manner. Since each network is different, only the purchaser can determine whether the security measures discussed here will adequately protect their network. The purchaser acknowledges that connection to the Internet and use of the Disklavier E3 Internet features is done at the risk of the purchaser. In no event shall Yamaha, its subsidiaries or Yamaha’s and/or its subsidiaries’ directors, officers, or employees be responsible for unauthorized access, loss or alteration of the data of the purchaser or be liable for any damage from intrusions. Accessing the Internet [INTERNET] Once you have established an IDC account and successfully connected your Disklavier to the Internet, you can access a special Disklavier website where you can access the DisklavierRadio™, and download software updates. Note: Free contents that do not require an ID and password are available. D-Radio Select this to listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels of music content. You can enjoy listening to piano performances that play continuously. See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback – Listening to the DisklavierRadio™” on page 26. Note: The service contents are subject to change without prior notice. MyAccount Select this to log in to the IDC service. You can also refer to the help information from this option. Update Select this to update the Disklavier using Internet connection. 103 Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 1 Press [INTERNET] on the remote control. The Internet menu screen appears. (1/1) =Internet= *D-Radio *MyAccount *Update 2 Select a desired menu with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ] Perform operations on the screen that appears. Checking Your Account Information [INTERNET] “MyAccount” You can confirm your current account information of IDC service. You can also log out from the IDC service. Login Select this to log in to the IDC service. You need to enter your ID and password. Logout If you wish to use another IDC account or prevent the current account from being used by others, select this to log out from the IDC service. Account Information Select this to confirm your account information. Subscription Status Select this to confirm your DisklavierRadio™ subscription status. 1 Press [INTERNET] on the remote control. The Internet menu screen appears. =Internet= (1/1) *D-Radio *MyAccount *Update 104 Note: ID and password are not required for free contents (such as free channel of DisklavierRadio™). Chapter Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 2 Select “MyAccount” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ 10 ] (1/1) =Internet= *D-Radio *MyAccount *Update English The MyAccount screen appears. ] 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [ENTER]. ][ ]), Perform operations on the screen that appears. Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet [INTERNET] “Update” You can download the update program directly from the Internet and update the firmware of the Disklavier. 1 Press [INTERNET] on the remote control. The Internet menu screen appears. (1/1) =Internet= *D-Radio *MyAccount *Update 105 Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 2 Select “Update” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] (1/1) =Internet= *D-Radio *MyAccount *Update The update screen appears if there is any update program available. ] You can scroll the screen up or down with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]). 3 ] Following the instructions on the screen, select the option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. =Update= -----------------------*Update Fir *Cancel The download process of the update program starts. =Update= Now Downloading... 50% ( 1 / 1 ) 4 Shut down the Disklavier with [ON/OFF] on the control unit after the download process is completed. ] The update program is now prepared. Update the firmware following the procedures in Chapter 12 “Other Settings – Updating the Disklavier” on page 129. 106 Chapter Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 10 Setting the Disklavier for the Internet Connection [SETUP] “Network” You can change various settings related to the Internet connection. In most cases, you do not have to change the default factory settings. Information To use the Internet connection, inquire of your Internet service provider. Use DHCP Select the method to determine several addresses. If your router has DHCP server function, we recommend that you to select “DHCP” or “DHCP+DNS.” English Note: For information about DNS server address, IP address, subnet mask and gateway server address, inquire of your internet service provider. You can confirm the information of network settings. DNS1/DNS2 Enter the address of the primary and secondary DNS server. These settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “DHCP+DNS” or “MANUAL.” IPAddr./SubMask/Gateway Enter the address of the control unit, subnet mask and gateway server. These settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “MANUAL.” Proxy/Proxy Port Enter the name and the port number for the proxy server. These settings are necessary only when a proxy server is located in your local network. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “Network” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. =SETUP MENU= (2/3) *Network *Playback *Reverb *Shortcut ][ ][ ] Note: The “Reverb” option appears only on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. The network setting screen appears. ] 107 Chapter 10 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ [ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. ] If you select “Information” on the network setting screen, the current network setting appears. To return to the network setting screen, press [ENTER] after confirming. 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. Initializing Internet Settings [SETUP] “Reset” If you want to initialize the Internet settings, first you must reset the Disklavier to its initial factory setting. However, cookies are still remain after parameter resetting. To delete cookies, perform the appropriate operation on the reset screen. For details on cookies, see Chapter 16 “Glossary” on page 140. See Chapter 12 “Other Settings – Resetting the Disklavier” on page 126. 108 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices Hooking Up Audio Equipment AV amplifier To audio inputs RCA cord (not supplied) English If you connect the Disklavier to an audio system, you can hear the sound played/played back on the Disklavier from the connected audio system, and the sound played back on the connected audio system from the Disklavier. CD player, etc. To audio outputs RCA cord (not supplied) Control unit 109 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission [SETUP] “AudioI/O” You can select the kind of the incoming/outgoing audio signals. The following options should be set up in advance. OMNI IN Selects the appropriate option to match the incoming data input to the OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks. Auto Detect: Select this to have the Disklavier detect the input signal automatically. Audio: Select this when you play back audio from a connected CD player, etc. and reproduce the sound from the monitor speakers*. OFF: Select this when you cancel the data reception from the OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks. * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. OMNI IN Vol Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127. OMNI OUT Selects the desired data to be output from the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks. Output: Select this when you output the same audio signals as the ones for the monitor speakers*1. Output+PianoTG*2: Select this when you output the ensemble part and the digital piano sound. Note that the digital piano sound is also output in the acoustic mode. *1 Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. *2 Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function PianoTG*2: Select this when you output only the digital piano sound. SYNC: Select this when you output the SMPTE signal used for video synchronization playback. OFF: Select this when you cancel the data transmission from the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks. OMNI OUT Vol Adjust the volume of the outgoing audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127, or to “M-Volume.” When you set to “M-Volume”, the OMNI OUT volume works with the main volume. ANALOG MIDI IN Vol Note: “M-Volume” is the next increment on the OMNI OUT Vol setting above 127. OMNI OUT Vol parameter [–/NO] 127 [+/YES] 110 000 ~ Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the ANALOG MIDI IN jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127. M-Volume Chapter Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 11 A-MIDI IN Offset For some display devices, the video images may be displayed a little bit later than the piano playing when playing back the video synchronized software that contains the analog MIDI signal. To eliminate this delay, you can adjust the offset time that leads the actual playback of the piano. A delay is applied to the incoming analog MIDI signal. The offset time can be set in a range of –500 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance the piano playing. English SYNC IN Offset Adjusts the length of the offset time that leads the actual playback of the entire recording. The offset time can be set in a range of –500ms to +500ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance the piano playing. SYNC OUT Level Adjusts the output level of the SMPTE signal. For normal use, the adjustment of this option is not required. If noises (synchronized signal) are output from the OUTPUT jacks during video synchronized playback, turn down the level and re-record. OUTPUT Offset For some speakers or digital amplifiers, the audio from the Disklavier may be output a little bit later than the acoustic piano playing. To eliminate this delay, you can adjust the offset time for the sound output. This setting is applied to the outgoing audio signal from the OUTPUT jacks and OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks. Decrease this value to advance the sound output. The offset time can be set in a range of –100 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance the piano playing. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The audio I/O setting screen appears. ] 111 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. ][ ]), Hooking Up MIDI Devices MIDI (an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic device (synthesizers, etc.) to interact and work in synchronization with other MIDI compatible device. The Disklavier enables you to enjoy a variety of MIDI features by connecting a MIDI device or computer to the Disklavier’s control unit. MIDI device (sequencer, synthesizer, etc.) or computer To USB port USB cable (not supplied) Control unit 112 To MIDI input MIDI cable (not supplied) Note: When you use the USB connection, it is required to install the USB driver to the connected device. In such a case, visit the following website and download the driver. http://download.yamaha.com/ Note: Be sure to use the commercially available MIDI cable with the Lshaped connector on the control unit end. To MIDI output Chapter Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 11 Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Reception [SETUP] “MIDI” The Disklavier can play back the MIDI data being received from the connected MIDI device as well as the software loaded or stored in the Disklavier itself. The following options should be set up in advance. Selects the terminal/port used for the data reception. MIDI: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI IN terminal. USB: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port. English MIDI IN Port Piano Rcv Ch The MIDI data consists of multi channels that are respectively assigned to a certain instrument’s part. This option assigns the desired channel(s) to the piano part(s) that is (are) played back on the Disklavier’s keyboard. 01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part. 1+2: Select this when the “01” and “02” channels are assigned to the piano parts. Prg: Select the smallest number channel assigned to the piano group voice (see page 131) to be played on the Disklavier. Prg(All): Select all channels assigned to the piano group voice (see page 131) to be played on the Disklavier. MIDI IN Delay When the Disklavier receives two kinds of data (strong and weak note) at the same time, the weak note sounds a little bit later than the strong one due to the characteristics of the Disklavier’s mechanism. To eliminate this delay in the sound reproduction so that the notes are sounded in accurate timing at 500 milliseconds after the data reception, usually a delay is applied to the incoming MIDI data. ON: Select this when you apply this delay to the incoming MIDI data. OFF: Select this when you do not apply this delay. 113 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ][ ]), 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. ][ ]), 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The MIDI setting screen appears. ] 114 Chapter Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 11 Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Transmission [SETUP] “MIDI” The Disklavier can transmit the information of piano playing/ensemble part playback on the Disklavier as the MIDI data to the connected MIDI device to reproduce the sound with its sound generator, etc. or to record the MIDI data. The following options should be set up in advance. English MIDI OUT Port Selects the terminal/port used for the data transmission. MIDI: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI OUT terminal. USB: Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port. MIDI OUT Selects one of the following parts to be transmitted to the connected MIDI device. ESBL Out: Select this when you transmit the ensemble part played back on the Disklavier. KBD Out: Select this when you transmit the piano part played on the Disklavier. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ][ ]), (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The MIDI setting screen appears. ] 115 Chapter 11 Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. ][ ]), Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing Data Transmission [SETUP] “MIDI” Besides the MIDI OUT options, more detailed setups for the keyboard playing data transmission are available. The following options should be set up in advance. KBD OUT CH Assigns the piano part to the desired channels. 01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part. Local Selects whether you reproduce or not the piano part playing with the Disklavier’s internal tone generator. 116 ON: Select this when you reproduce the piano part with the Disklavier’s internal tone generator. OFF: Select this when you reproduce the song (played on the Disklavier) on the external MIDI device. This option inactivates the internal tone generator to prevent both the internal and external tone generator sound at the same time. Chapter Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices 1 11 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune English 2 Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([ then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ][ ]), 3 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting. ][ ]), 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The MIDI setting screen appears. ] 117 Chapter 12 Other Settings Tuning the Tone Generator (TG Master Tune) [SETUP] “M–Tune” The internal XG tone generator has already been tuned to match the acoustic piano (A3=440 Hz). However, you can re-tune the internal XG tone generator in accordance with the pitch of the acoustic piano by following the procedure below. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “M-Tune” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune The TG Master Tune setting screen appears. =TG Master Tune= >Tune= 000cent 3 -+ Playing the keyboard, press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to tune the pitch of the internal XG tone generator. The same note will sound simultaneously on the XG tone generator’s digital piano and on the acoustic piano as soon as you play the keyboard. The pitch of the internal XG tone generator can be adjusted in a range of –50 cent to +50 cent. 118 Note: For models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function, be sure to switch the Disklavier to the acoustic mode before tuning. Chapter Other Settings 4 Note: To reset to the default factory pitch settings, see Chapter 12 “Other Settings – Resetting the Disklavier” on page 126. Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. English Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the Number Keypad on the Remote Control [SETUP] 12 “Shortcut” You can assign the number keypad of the remote control ([1] thru [9] and [0]) a series of procedures for often used functions. ■ Assigning Functions 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. =SETUP MENU= (1/3)] *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “Shortcut” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ =SETUP MENU= _(2/3)] *Network *Playback *Reverb *Shortcut ][ ] Note: The “Reverb” option appears only on models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. The shortcut setting screen appears. =Shortcut= 1[----2[----- 3 Press [ ] and [ ?-+ ] ] ] to select the desired number. =Shortcut= 3[----4[----- ?=-+ ] ] 119 Chapter 12 Other Settings 4 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired function. =Shortcut= ?=]-+ 3[----] 4[PLAY Mem01 --- ] The following functions are available: Option Description PLAY Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist. RPT Starts repeat playback of a song or songs in the selected album or playlist. RND Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist at random. RADIO Starts playback of the selected DisklavierRadio™ channel. BLNC Adjusts the volume balance among the different sound sources (tone generator or audio). POWER Turns on and off the Disklavier. QUIET Activates and inactivates the quiet mode*. When functions other than “POWER” and “QUIET” are selected, the detailed setting parameter appears. 5 Press [ ] to move the cursor to the detailed setting parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired setting. You can set two sets of parameter depending on the function you have selected. =Shortcut= _?=]-+ 3[----] 4[PLAY Mem02 --- ] When “PLAY” is selected: Option 1 Option 2 Description Mem01 Mem99 --- Starts playback from the first song in the album selected for option 1. 001 - 999 Starts playback from the song selected for option 2 in the album selected for option 1. --- Starts playback from the first song in the playlist selected for option 1. 001 - 999 Starts playback from the song selected for option 2 in the playlist selected for option 1. Lst01 Lst99 120 * Only for grand pianos. Chapter Other Settings 12 When “RPT” is selected: Option 2 Description Mem01 Mem99 --- Starts repeat playback of all songs in the album selected for option 1 from the first song. 001 - 999 Starts repeat playback of the song selected for option 2 in the album selected for option 1. --- Starts repeat playback of all songs in the playlist selected for option 1 from the first song. 001 - 999 Starts repeat playback of the song selected for option 2 in the playlist selected for option 1. Lst01 Lst99 English Option 1 When “RND” is selected: Option Description Mem01 Mem99 Starts playback of songs in the selected album at random. Lst01 Lst99 Starts playback of songs in the selected playlist at random. When “RADIO” is selected: Option Description CH01 CH99 Starts playback of the selected DisklavierRadio™ channel. When “BLNC” is selected: Option 1 Option 2 Description TG UP Raises the volume of the tone generator. DOWN Lowers the volume of the tone generator. UP Raises the volume of the audio. DOWN Lowers the volume of the audio. AUDIO When “POWER” or “QUIET” is selected: Details settings are not required. 6 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. 121 Chapter 12 Other Settings ■ Using the Shortcut Holding the green button on the remote control, press the corresponding number button on the number keypad to execute the assigned function. + Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized Access [SETUP] “Passcode” You can enter the 4-digit passcode to prevent unauthorized access from the commercially available external remote controller, or you can also set the MAC address of the external remote controller to allow it to access your Disklavier without entering the passcode. Note: These settings are not required for the use of the remote control of this unit. In case of using an external remote controller, refer to the user’s guide for that remote controller. ■ Setting the Passcode Note: If changes are inappropriately made for these settings, the external remote controller may not function properly. In such cases, enter “####” to reset the passcode setting. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. =SETUP MENU= (1/3)] *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “Passcode” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ =SETUP MENU= _(3/3) *Passcode *Reset The passcode setting screen appears. =Passcode= >Passcode=#### 3 122 Press [ ] and [ ]-+ ] to move the cursor left and right. ] Chapter Other Settings 4 Enter the 4-digit code with the number keypad. =Passcode= _?-+ >Passcode=1234 >MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:## Note: You can also use [+/YES] and [–/NO] on the remote control, or the dial on the control unit to enter the code. English 5 12 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. ■ Setting the MAC Address If you feel inconvenient to enter the passcode each time you access from the external remote controller, you can set the MAC address of the external remote controller. This will allow the external remote controller with the registered MAC address to access your Disklavier without entering the passcode. 1 With the passcode properly set, press [ “MAdr1.” ] to select =Passcode= ?=]-+ >Passcode=1234 >MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:## 2 Press [ 3 Enter the address with [+/YES] and [–/NO]. ] and [ ] to move the cursor left and right. Note: You can also use the dial on the control unit to enter the address. =Passcode= _?=]-+ >Passcode=1234 >MAdr1=01:AB:23:C#:##:## You can set up to three addresses. 4 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. 123 Chapter 12 Other Settings Adjusting the Brightness of the Display [SETUP] “Display” You can adjust the brightness of the display. You can also set the display to dim after the elapse of a certain time if there is no operation. 1 Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. The system menu screen appears. =STSTEM MENU= (1/2)] *Clock Adj. *TimeZone *Backup *Restore 2 Select “Display” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] =STSTEM MENU= _(2/2) *Language *Maintenance *Display The display setting screen appears. =Display= ?=-+ENT *Brightness=100% *Dim light=OFF 3 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the brightness. =Display= ?=-+ENT *Brightness=80% *Dim light=OFF The following brightness settings are available: 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%. 124 Chapter Other Settings 4 12 Note: The brightness of the display will return to its original setting when you press any buttons, insert media, or eject media. To set the time for the display to dim, press [ ] to move the cursor to the dim light parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO]. =Display= ?=-+ENT *Brightness=100% *Dim light=1min. English The following time settings are available: OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min. If there is no operation for the time set above, the display dims to half the brightness of its original setting. 5 Press [ENTER] to complete the operation. Switching the Languages for the Screen [SYSTEM] 1 “Language” Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. The system menu screen appears. !"#$%{ 2 Select “Language” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. ][ ][ ] =SYSTEM MENU= (2/2) *Language *Maintenance *Display The language setting screen appears. =Language= Language=English -+ENT 125 Chapter 12 Other Settings 3 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the language. 4 Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. 5 Press [+/YES] to set the language, and return to the system menu screen. Resetting the Disklavier [SETUP] “Reset” If you want to return your Disklavier to its initial factory settings, follow the procedure below. 1 Press [SETUP] on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. (1/3) =SETUP MENU= *TimerPlay *AudioI/O *MIDI *M-Tune 2 Select “Reset” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ]), then press [ENTER]. =SETUP MENU= (3/3) *Passcode *Reset The reset screen appears. -+ENT =Reset= >Reset=Parameter 126 ][ ][ ] Important: If you reset your Disklavier, depending upon the option you select, you may lose all parameters or all data in the internal memory, or both of these. For normal use, you do not have to reset. If you must reset your Disklavier, Yamaha strongly recommends that you backup your songs in the internal memory. However, you cannot backup your various parameter settings. To make a backup copy of the songs which are in the internal memory, see Chapter 9 “Media Management – Making Backups of Songs” on page 98. Chapter Other Settings 3 Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the option that you want to reset. English 4 12 Option Description Parameter Reset all parameters, excluding the clock setting and the Internet setting. Memory Reset the internal memory. Factory Init. Reset the Disklavier to its initial factory setting. DeleteCookies Delete the contents of all saved cookies. Press [ENTER]. “OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen. =Reset= OK? YES/NO >Reset=Factory Init. 5 Press [+/YES] to reset, [–/NO] to cancel. =Reset= Executing... =Reset= Completed. Press any button. ANY After a while, the completion message appears. Press any button to return to the setup menu screen. 127 Chapter 12 Other Settings Diagnosing the Disklavier (Maintenance Mode) [SYSTEM] “Maintenance” The piano diagnostics may be required as the occasion demands. In such a case, follow the instructions of your Yamaha dealer and perform the following procedure. 1 Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control. The system menu screen appears. !"#$%{ 2 Select “Maintenance” with the cursor buttons ([ [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER]. =SYSTEM MENU= (2/2) *Language *Maintenance *Display The maintenance screen appears. Maintenance Mode (ENT) 3 Press [ENTER]. The maintenance options appears. (Grand piano) 1.Post Delivery Check 2.Program Versions 3.Pedal Calibration (Upright piano) 128 ][ ] Chapter Other Settings 4 Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ then press [ENTER]. ][ ]), Note: Do not execute these options with no instructions from the service personnel. English The selected option is executed. 5 12 Press [STOP] to complete the operation. Updating the Disklavier Shut down the Disklavier [PLAY/PAUSE] and [ON/OFF] You can update the Disklavier firmware using update program (saved on the CD-ROM or USB flash memory, or downloaded via Internet). You can download the update program from the following website: http://download.yamaha.com/ 1 Make sure that Disklavier is shut down. 2 Holding [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, press [ON/OFF]. + CTRL system v2.20 *UPDATE (ENT) Note: For this operation you have to insert the CD-ROM or USB flash memory in which the update program is saved or download update program via Internet, and shut down the Disklavier. Note: Depending on the version or specification of the Disklavier, the actual indications for the version and module names may differ from ones depicted here. Hold The current version information of each module appears one after the other. 3 Make sure that the update program is prepared, then press [ENTER] on the control unit. The starting screen appears. 4 Press [ENTER] on the control unit again. After a while, the update confirmation message of each module appears. v3.00 v2.20 MC -SURE? (PLAY,STOP) 129 Chapter 12 Other Settings 5 Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update. The update process of the first module takes approximately 3 minutes. MC v2.20 v3.00 DO NOT REMOVE DISK! When the update of the first module completes, the following confirmation message appears. Confirmation message of the second module v3.00 v2.10 CTRL-SURE? (PLAY,STOP) Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update of the second module. The update process of the second module takes approximately 3 minutes. A total of four modules needs to be updated. Repeat this step to complete the update. Confirmation message of the third module v3.00 v2.01 APE -SURE? (PLAY,STOP) The update process of the third module takes approximately 2 minutes. Confirmation message of the fourth module v3.00 v2.10 CSP -SURE? (PLAY,STOP) The update process of the fourth module takes approximately 2 minutes. The closing screen appears when the update for all modules completes. 6 130 Restart the Disklavier. Important: DO NOT turn off this unit during update. Important: Be sure to update all the modules. Chapter 13 Internal Tone Generator Voices The following table lists the basic voices for the internal GM/XG and TG3 tone generator. Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice List Display Name Voice # Display Name Voice # 043 Orgel 086 Display Name OrgFlute 001 GrandPno 044 Vibes 087 TrmOrgFl 002 GrndPnoK 045 VibesK 088 ReedOrgn 003 MelloGrP 046 HardVibe 089 Puff Org 004 PianoStr 047 Marimba 090 Acordion 005 Dream 048 MarimbaK 091 Accordlt 006 BritePno 049 SineMrmb 092 Harmnica 007 BritPnoK 050 Balafon2 093 Harmo 2 008 E.Grand 051 Log Drum 094 TangoAcd 009 EIGrPnoK 052 Xylophon 095 TngoAcd2 010 Det.CP80 053 TubulBel 04 Guitar 011 ElGrPno1 054 ChrchBel 096 NylonGtr 012 ElGrPno2 055 Carillon 097 NylonGt2 013 HnkyTonk 056 Dulcimer 098 NylonGt3 014 HnkyTnkK 057 Dulcimr2 099 VelGtHrm 015 E.Piano1 058 Cimbalom 100 Ukulele 016 El.Pno1K 059 Santur 101 SteelGtr 017 MelloEP1 03 Organ 102 SteelGt2 018 Chor.EP1 060 DrawOrgn 103 12StrGtr 019 HardEl.P 061 DetDrwOr 104 Nyln&Stl 020 VX El.P1 062 60sDrOr1 105 Stl&Body 021 60sEl.P 063 60sDrOr2 106 Mandolin 022 E.Piano2 064 70sDrOr1 107 Jazz Gtr 023 El.Pno2K 065 DrawOrg2 108 MelloGtr 024 Chor.EP2 066 60sDrOr3 109 JazzAmp 025 DX Hard 067 EvenBar 110 CleanGtr 026 DXLegend 068 16+2”2/3 111 ChorusGt 027 DX Phase 069 Organ Ba 112 Mute.Gtr 028 DX+Analg 070 70sDrOr2 113 FunkGtr1 029 DXKotoEP 071 CheezOrg 114 MuteStlG 030 VX El.P2 072 DrawOrg3 115 FunkGtr2 031 Harpsi. 073 PercOrgn 116 Jazz Man 032 Harpsi.K 074 70sPcOr1 117 Ovrdrive 033 Harpsi.2 075 DetPrcOr 118 Gt.Pinch 034 Harpsi.3 076 LiteOrg 119 Dist.Gtr 035 Clavi. 077 PercOrg2 120 FeedbkGt 036 Clavi.K 078 RockOrgn 121 FeedbGt2 037 ClaviWah 079 RotaryOr 122 GtrHarmo 038 PulseClv 080 SloRotar 123 GtFeedbk 039 PierceCl 081 FstRotar 124 GtrHrmo2 02 ChromaticPerc 082 ChrchOrg 040 Celesta 083 ChurOrg3 125 041 Glocken 084 ChurOrg2 126 JazzRthm 042 MusicBox 085 NotreDam 127 VXUprght English Voice # 01 Piano 05 Bass Aco.Bass 131 Chapter 13 Internal Tone Generator Voices Voice # 132 Display Name Voice # 128 FngrBass 178 129 FingrDrk 130 FlangeBa 179 131 Ba&DstEG 180 132 FngrSlap 181 133 FngBass2 182 134 ModAlem 135 PickBass 136 MutePkBa 137 Fretless 138 Display Name Timpani Voice # Display Name 227 Tp&TbSec 228 BrssSec2 Strings1 229 HiBrass S.Strngs 230 MelloBrs SlowStr 231 SynBras1 ArcoStr 232 QuackBr 183 60sStrng 233 RezSynBr 184 Orchestr 234 PolyBrss 185 Orchstr2 235 SynBras3 186 TremOrch 236 JumpBrss Fretles2 187 VeloStr 237 AnaVelBr 139 Fretles3 188 Strings2 238 AnaBrss1 140 Fretles4 189 S.SlwStr 239 SynBras2 141 SynFretl 190 LegatoSt 240 Soft Brs 142 Smooth 191 Warm Str 241 SynBras4 143 SlapBas1 192 Kingdom 242 ChorBrss 144 ResoSlap 193 70s Str 243 VelBras2 145 PunchThm 194 Str Ens3 244 AnaBrss2 146 SlapBas2 195 Syn.Str1 147 VeloSlap 196 ResoStr 245 SprnoSax 148 SynBass1 197 Syn Str4 246 Alto Sax 149 SynBa1Dk 198 SS Str 247 Sax Sect 150 FastResB 199 Syn.Str2 248 HyprAlto 151 AcidBass 200 ChoirAah 249 TenorSax 152 Clv Bass 201 S.Choir 250 BrthTnSx 153 TeknoBa 202 Ch.Aahs2 251 SoftTenr 154 Oscar 203 MelChoir 252 TnrSax 2 155 SqrBass 204 ChoirStr 253 Bari.Sax 156 RubberBa 205 VoiceOoh 254 Oboe 157 Hammer 206 SynVoice 255 Eng.Horn 158 SynBass2 207 SynVox2 256 Bassoon 159 MelloSB1 208 Choral 257 Clarinet 160 Seq Bass 209 AnaVoice 161 ClkSynBa 210 Orch.Hit 258 162 SynBa2Dk 211 OrchHit2 259 Flute 163 SmthBa 2 212 Impact 260 Recorder 164 ModulrBa 08 Brass 261 PanFlute 165 DX Bass 213 Trumpet 262 Bottle 166 X WireBa 07 Ensemble 09 Reed 10 Pipe Piccolo 214 Trumpet2 263 Shakhchi 06 Strings 215 BriteTrp 264 Whistle 167 Violin 216 WarmTrp 265 Ocarina 168 SlowVln 217 Trombone 169 Viola 218 Trmbone2 266 SquareLd 170 Cello 219 Tuba 267 Square 2 171 Contrabs 220 Tuba 2 268 LMSquare 172 Trem.Str 221 Mute.Trp 269 Hollow 173 SlwTrStr 222 Fr.Horn 270 Shmoog 174 Susp Str 223 FrHrSolo 271 Mellow 175 Pizz.Str 224 FrHorn2 272 SoloSine 176 Harp 225 HornOrch 273 SineLead 177 YangChin 226 BrasSect 274 Saw.Lead 11 Synth Lead Chapter Internal Tone Generator Voices Voice # Display Name Voice # Display Name Voice # Display Name Saw 2 325 Halo Pad 375 BelChoir 276 ThickSaw 326 SweepPad 376 Echoes 277 DynaSaw 327 Shwimmer 377 EchoPad2 278 DigiSaw 328 Converge 378 Echo Pan 279 Big Lead 329 PolarPad 379 EchoBell 280 HeavySyn 330 Celstial 380 Big Pan 13 Synth Effects WaspySyn 282 PulseSaw 331 381 SynPiano Rain 382 Creation 283 Dr. Lead 284 VeloLead 332 ClaviPad 383 Stardust 333 HrmoRain 384 Reso Pan 285 Seq Ana 334 AfrcnWnd 385 Sci-Fi 286 CaliopLd 335 Caribean 386 Starz 287 Pure Pad 336 SoundTrk 14 Ethnic 288 Chiff Ld 337 Prologue 387 Sitar 289 Rubby 338 Ancestrl 388 DetSitar 290 CharanLd 339 Crystal 389 Sitar 2 291 DistLead 340 SynDrCmp 390 Tambra 292 WireLead 341 Popcorn 391 Tamboura 293 Voice Ld 342 TinyBell 392 Banjo 294 SynthAah 343 RndGlock 393 MuteBnjo 295 VoxLead 344 GlockChi 394 Rabab 296 Fifth Ld 345 ClearBel 395 Gopichnt 297 Big Five 346 ChorBell 396 Oud 298 Bass &Ld 347 SynMalet 397 Shamisen 299 Big&Low 348 SftCryst 398 Koto 300 Fat&Prky 349 LoudGlok 399 T.Koto 301 SoftWurl 350 XmasBell 400 Kanoon 12 Synth Pad 351 VibeBell 401 Kalimba 302 NewAgePd 352 DigiBell 402 Bagpipe 303 Fantasy2 353 AirBells 403 Fiddle 304 Warm Pad 354 BellHarp 404 Shanai 305 ThickPad 355 Gamelmba 405 Shanai2 306 Soft Pad 356 Atmosphr 406 Pungi 307 SinePad 357 WarmAtms 407 Hichriki 308 Horn Pad 358 HollwRls 309 RotarStr 359 NylonEP 408 TnklBell 310 PolySyPd 360 NylnHarp 409 Bonang 311 PolyPd80 361 Harp Vox 410 Gender 312 ClickPad 362 AtmosPad 411 Gamelan 313 Ana Pad 363 Planet 412 S.Gamlan 314 SquarPad 364 Bright 413 Rama Cym 315 ChoirPad 365 FantaBel 414 AsianBel 316 Heaven2 366 Smokey 415 Agogo 317 ltopia 367 Goblins 416 SteelDrm 318 CC Pad 368 GobSyn 417 GlasPerc 319 BowedPad 369 50sSciFi 418 ThaiBell 320 Glacier 370 Ring Pad 419 WoodBlok 321 GlassPad 371 Ritual 420 Castanet 322 MetalPad 372 ToHeaven 421 TaikoDrm 323 Tine Pad 373 Night 422 Gr.Cassa 324 Pan Pad 374 Glisten 423 MelodTom English 275 281 13 15 Percussive 133 Chapter 13 Internal Tone Generator Voices Voice # Display Name Voice # Display Name Voice # Display Name 424 Mel Tom2 459 Feed 485 Punch 425 Real Tom 460 Dog 486 Heart 426 Rock Tom 461 Horse 487 FootStep 427 Syn.Drum 462 Bird 2 488 MchinGun 428 Ana Tom 463 Ghost 489 LaserGun 429 ElecPerc 464 Maou 490 Xplosion 430 RevCymbl 465 Tel.Dial 491 FireWork 466 DoorSqek FretNoiz 467 DoorSlam 432 BrthNoiz 468 Scratch 433 Seashore 469 Scratch2 434 Tweet 470 WindChm 435 Telphone 471 Telphon2 436 Helicptr 472 CarEngin 437 Applause 473 Car Stop 438 Gunshot 474 Car Pass 475 CarCrash 16 Sound Effects 431 18 SFX Voice 450 CuttngNz 476 Siren 451 CttngNz2 477 Train 452 Str Slap 478 Jetplane 453 Fl.KClik 479 Starship 454 Rain 480 Burst 455 Thunder 481 Coaster 456 Wind 482 SbMarine 457 Stream 483 Laughing 458 Bubble 484 Scream Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Drum Voice List Voice # Display Name 17 Drum Kit 439 StandKit 440 Stnd2Kit 441 Room Kit 442 Rock Kit 443 ElectKit 444 AnalgKit 445 Jazz Kit 446 BrushKit 447 ClascKit 448 SFX Kit1 449 SFX Kit2 Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice List Voice # Display Name Display Name Dulcimer 03 Organ Voice # Display Name 031 Dist.Gtr 032 GtrHarmo 001 GrandPno 002 BritePno 017 003 E.Grand 018 PercOrgn 033 Aco.Bass 004 HnkyTonk 019 RockOrgn 034 FngrBass 005 E.Piano1 020 ChrchOrg 035 PickBass 006 E.Piano2 021 ReedOrgn 036 Fretless 007 Harpsi. 022 Acordion 037 SlapBas1 008 Clavi. 023 Harmnica 038 SlapBas2 024 TangoAcd 039 SynBass1 040 SynBass2 02 ChromaticPerc 134 Voice # 016 01 Piano 009 Celesta 04 Guitar 010 Glocken 025 011 MusicBox 012 Vibes 013 014 015 DrawOrgn 05 Bass NylonGtr 06 Strings 026 SteelGtr 041 Violin 027 Jazz Gtr 042 Viola Marimba 028 CleanGtr 043 Cello Xylophon 029 Mute.Gtr 044 Contrabs TubulBel 030 Ovrdrive 045 Trem.Str Chapter Internal Tone Generator Voices Voice # Display Name Voice # Display Name 046 Pizz.Str 091 PolySyPd 047 Harp 092 ChoirPad 048 Timpani 093 BowedPad 094 MetalPad 07 Ensemble Strings1 095 Halo Pad 050 Strings2 096 SweepPad 051 Syn.Str1 052 Syn.Str2 097 Rain 053 ChoirAah 098 SoundTrk 054 VoiceOoh 099 Crystal 055 SynVoice 100 Atmosphr 056 Orch.Hit 101 Bright 102 Goblins 13 Synth Effects 057 Trumpet 103 Echoes 058 Trombone 104 Sci-Fi 059 Tuba 060 Mute.Trp 105 Sitar 061 Fr.Horn 106 Banjo 062 BrasSect 107 Shamisen 063 SynBras1 108 Koto 064 SynBras2 109 Kalimba 110 Bagpipe 09 Reed 14 Ethnic 065 SprnoSax 111 Fiddle 066 Alto Sax 112 Shanai 067 TenorSax 068 Bari.Sax 113 TnklBell 069 Oboe 114 Agogo 070 Eng.Horn 115 SteelDrm 071 Bassoon 116 WoodBlok 072 Clarinet 117 TaikoDrm 118 MelodTom 10 Pipe 15 Percussive 073 Piccolo 119 Syn.Drum 074 Flute 120 RevCymbl 075 Recorder 16 Sound Effects 076 PanFlute 121 FretNoiz 077 Bottle 122 BrthNoiz 078 Shakhchi 123 Seashore 079 Whistle 124 Tweet 080 Ocarina 125 Telphone 126 Helicptr 11 Synth Lead 081 SquareLd 127 Applause 082 Saw.Lead 128 Gunshot 083 CaliopLd 084 Chiff Ld 085 CharanLd 086 Voice Ld 087 Fifth Ld 088 Bass &Ld 12 Synth Pad 089 NewAgePd 090 Warm Pad English 049 08 Brass 13 Internal TG3 Tone Generator Drum Voice List Voice # Display Name 17 Drum Kit 129 StandKit 135 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting If you are having difficulty operating the Disklavier, see if any of the symptoms listed below apply to your problem and follow the recommended remedy. Power Symptom The Diskalvier does not turn on. Remedy Make sure that the main switch on the power supply unit is turned on. Make sure that the AC power cable is securely connected to a suitable AC wall outlet. If the Disklavier still cannot be turned on, disconnect it from the AC wall outlet, and consult your Disklavier dealer. Control Unit Symptom The control unit does not appear to work correctly. The control unit becomes hot. Remedy Turn off the control unit, wait 5 seconds, then turn it back on. If the problem continues, consult your Disklavier dealer. Although the chassis of the control unit may become hot while the Disklavier is turned on (also in the standby mode), this is not a malfunction. Remote Control Symptom You cannot control the Disklavier using the remote control. Remedy Make sure that you are pointing the remote control at the control unit’s remote control sensor. Make sure that you are within the remote control’s specified operating range (approx. 5 m). Make sure that the remote control’s batteries have been installed correctly. Check the condition of the remote control’s batteries. Monitor Speakers* Symptom No sound is heard from the monitor speakers. * Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. 136 Remedy Make sure that the POWER switches on both monitor speakers are turned on. Make sure that the monitor speakers are connected to the OUTPUT jacks on the control unit with the supplied speaker cords. Make sure that the overall volume is adequately turned up. Make sure that the volume of the internal tone generator, audio and voice are adequately turned up. Certain model does not come with the monitor speakers. In such a case, prepare active speakers equivalent to the monitor speakers. Chapter Troubleshooting 14 Playback Symptom None of the playback functions can be used. The Disklavier does not read a song file. Songs are not played back in the normal song order. The playback order differs from the order on another device. When selecting a song using the remote control’s number keypad, but the last song on the album is selected. When specifying a search time using the remote control’s number keypad, but the end of the song is selected. If a time value higher than the total length of the song is specified, the end of the song will be selected. Some notes drop out during playback. When a piano song is played back at a low volume, complex note trills and faint pianissimo passages sometimes drop out. In such case, increase the Disklavier’s volume level. PianoSmart™ playback cannot be performed. Make sure that an appropriate SmartPianoSoft song, which is paired with the song on commercial CDs, is selected. The pedals do not operate during playback. Make sure that the pedal part is not canceled. English Songs are played back at the wrong tempo or in the wrong key. Remedy Insert a medium that contains songs into the Disklavier. The maximum number of the readable files in an album is 999. Make sure that the name of the SMF song has an extension as “.MID” or “.mid” and the E-SEQ song has “.FIL” or “.fil.” Reset the tempo or transposition changes. Once the tempo or transposition have been changed, they will affect playback of all songs on an album, until another medium or album is selected, the recording standby mode is engaged, the Disklavier is turned off, or they are reset. Make sure that the random repeat mode is off. The playback order depends on the recording software or other factors. Naming the file starting from numbers such as 01, 02, etc. may solve the problem. If a song number higher than the last song number on the album is specified, the last song will be selected. Tone Generator Symptom The ensemble parts cannot be heard during ensemble song playback. The pitch of the Disklavier and the internal tone generator do not match. Remedy Make sure that the TG balance is set to an appropriate level and readjust it. Use the TG Master Tune function to tune the internal tone generator. Recording Symptom You cannot re-record. Remedy Re-recording is not possible on protected songs such as PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs. 137 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Media Symptom The Disklavier does not read a CD-R/RW disc. Remedy The audio CD should be formatted in CD-DA, and the data CD in ISO 9660 Level1. The Disklavier may not read a CD-R/RW disc other than this format. Connection with External Devices Symptom The Disklavier cannot send or receive MIDI data with other MIDI instruments. A MIDI loop was accidentally created when you connected a computer to the MIDI OUT terminal on your Disklavier, so that song data is sent back and forth between the computer and the Disklavier. Remedy Make sure that the MIDI cables or USB cable are connected properly. Configure the setting for the MIDI OUT terminal to “KBD OUT.” Video Synchronized Recording/Playback Symptom Synchronized songs are not played back. Remedy Make sure that the audio channels of the DVD recorder are correctly connected to the Disklavier. Make sure that the input and output of the DVD recorder are correctly connected to the Disklavier. Make sure that the “OMNI IN” option on the Disklavier is set to “AutoDetect.” Make sure that the “OMNI OUT” option on the Disklavier is set to “SYNC.” Noises are heard during recording. Turn down the volume of the TV connected to the DVD recorder. Disconnect the left side connector of the RCA cord from the OMNI OUT (L) jack on the Disklavier. This will not affect the functionality of video synchronized recording. Noises are heard during playback. The level of the synchronized signal (SMPTE) from the Disklavier may be too high. Turn down the level with the “SYNC OUT Level” option and re-record. The piano playback is not synchronized with the video The video picture may be delayed on the projection picture. device. Adjust the offset time with the “SYNC IN Offset” to match the piano playing and the video picture. The beginning of the piano performance is dropped out It may take some time until the Disklavier recognizes when you play back the synchronized song. the synchronized signal and the piano begins to play back. Select the synchronized song in advance, and then start playback on the DVD recorder. Note that you should wait for a while before playing the piano after recording begins on the DVD recorder. 138 Chapter 15 Error Messages While operating your Disklavier, an error message may appear in the display. If an error message appears, refer to the table below for an explanation of the message. Media Selection / Playback Situation Remedy NO MEDIA! You selected the medium that has not been inserted. Insert the medium or select another medium. DIFFERENT CD! Your CD is not paired with the selected SmartPianoSoft song. Insert appropriate CD that is paired with the SmartPianoSoft song. Error Messages Situation Remedy CANNOT EXECUTE. NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE You tried to copy a song to the medium that has no disk space. Try another medium or delete songs on the media to make disk space. CANNOT EXECUTE. NO DESTINATION MEDIUM You selected the destination medium that has not been inserted when copying the album. Insert the destination medium and select it. DISK WRITE PROTECTED! You tried to copy songs or albums to the medium with the protection tab set to “protected”. Set the protection tab of the medium to “unprotected”. CANNOT EXECUTE. PROTECTED FILE You tried to copy the protected song file to the removable medium such as a USB flash memory. You cannot copy the protected file to the removable medium. Deleted all songs in this album You tried to delete the album with sub folders on the external medium. CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE MORE THAN 99 ALBUMS You tried to create a new album on the medium that already contains 99 albums. No more than 99 albums can be created on the medium. CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE MORE THAN 999 SONGS You tried to create a new song in the album that already contains 999 songs. No more than 999 songs can be created in the album. CANNOT EXECUTE. SAME TITLE EXISTS You tried to rename an album as same as the album that already exists. Enter the different title to an album. You tried to rename a playlist as same as the playlist that already exists. Enter the different title to a playlist. Error Messages Situation Remedy SELECT REC TRACK You tried to start re-recording with no part selected. Select the part to record before starting re-recording. Error Messages Situation Remedy SAME TIME EVENT EXISTS! CHANGE THE TIME You tried to set two different programs with the same time for timer playback. You cannot set two different program with the same time. English Error Messages File Operation Recording Timer Play 139 Chapter 16 Glossary This glossary provides basic definitions of terms used frequently in Disklavier manuals. Continuous Pedal General MIDI (GM) See “Incremental Pedal.” An addition to the MIDI standard that simplifies the transfer of MIDI song files between instruments of different manufacturers. A MIDI song recorded using a GM compatible tone generator should play back correctly when used with any GM compatible tone generator. The standard specifies that a GM compatible tone generator must support 24-note polyphony, 16 parts, and 128 standard voices. Cookie A computer data file that stores certain information for use when revisiting a website. In the case of the Disklavier, cookies are used to store ID and password for the IDC service. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time a connection is made to the Internet. DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses. Ensemble Song A song which contains piano parts and accompanying instrumental voices. An ensemble song contains the same left- and right-hand parts as an L/R song, and in addition, up to 13 accompanying instrument tracks. These extra tracks are played by the internal XG tone generator. The accompanying tracks may be used for acoustic bass, drums, strings, vibes, etc. Half Pedal See “Incremental Pedal.” Headphone Mode A mode of the Silent Piano™ function in which sound is output through connected stereo headphones so that you can listen to songs or play the piano without disturbing people around you. Incremental Pedal Piano pedals are not always completely up or down and may be held somewhere in-between. Using incremental pedal data (also called continuous or half pedal data) the Disklavier precisely records the up and down movement of the piano pedals. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. E-SEQ Song Format IP Address A song file format developed by Yamaha for saving songs. A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. Floppy Disk The magnetic storage medium that the Disklavier uses to save songs. With the optional USB floppy drive, you can use the 3.5 inch 2DD and 2HD floppy disks commonly used for computers. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards. 140 L/R Song In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel either part, and then play that part yourself. When recording an L/R song, you can record the two parts simultaneously or separately. Chapter Glossary MIDI Router An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other. A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, to allow all of them access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Modem Sequencer English A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. 16 A sequencer can be used with the Disklavier to play back and record MIDI data. Piano Parts Refer to the left- and right-hand piano parts of a song. The left-hand piano part is recorded onto track 1 and the right-hand piano part is recorded onto track 2. Server PianoSoft™ Silent Piano™ Function The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a library of prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha specifically for use with the Disklavier. Yamaha’s innovative function that keeps the hammers from striking the strings, effectively silencing the acoustic piano. Sound information is sent to the digital piano tone generator, and output through the monitor speakers (quiet mode) or stereo headphones (headphone mode). PianoSoft·Plus™ PianoSoft·Plus disks contain Ensemble songs that can be played on the Disklavier. A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. SmartPianoSoft™ Polyphony The maximum number of voices (or sounds) that can be produced at a time from MIDI instruments. Software made by Yamaha containing MIDI signals for playing back along with standard audio CDs. SMF Provider Abbreviation for Standard MIDI File. A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. SMF Song Format A song file format supported by MIDI sequencers and music software. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Quiet Mode A mode of the Silent Piano™ function in which sound is output through the monitor speakers, enabling you to freely adjust the volume of the piano. Song Normally, a short piece of music with lyrics. However, for clarity in Disklavier manuals, the term is used to refer to any piece of music of any genre. Standard MIDI File A file of MIDI data that can be read and used by a number of different MIDI devices and computers. Subnet Mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks. 141 Chapter 16 Glossary TG Master Tune The function that allows you to tune the internal XG tone generator, and if connected, an external tone generator simultaneously so that their tunings match that of the Disklavier. Tone Generator An electronic device that can generate tones or instrument voices. Transpose Changing the key of a song. For example, a song in the key of C is transposed to the key of D when it is moved up two semitones. USB An interface for connecting an external device with plug and play. The Disklavier supplies with 2 TO DEVICE terminal with USB 1.1 standard and 1 TO HOST terminal. You can use as the external memory media if connected a USB flash memory or a USB hard disk to TO DEVICE terminal. Also the Disklavier enables you to enjoy a variety of MIDI features by connecting a computer to TO HOST terminal. Voice The sounds produced by a tone generator expressing various instruments. Web Page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. Website This refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http:// www.yamaha.com/ ” is referred to as the Yamaha site. XG Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM (General MIDI) format. Its greater polyphony, more voices, and use of effects enhances the compatibility between MIDI devices. When a song in the Yamaha XG format is played on another XGcompatible tone generator or synthesizer, it plays and sounds as the original composer/creator intended. 142 Chapter 17 Specifications General Specifications Key Sensors — Sensor System Drive System Data Storage Removable Media Grand Piano (C6X/C7X/S)*1 Noncontact optical fiber/grayscale shutter sensing system for 88 keys (senses the key position, keying velocity, and key releasing velocity) Hammer Sensors Pedal Sensors Grand Piano Damper & soft pedals: Noncontact optical position-sensing system Noncontact optical fiber shutter sensing system*2 Noncontact optical fiber/ grayscale shutter sensing system Damper & shift pedals: Noncontact optical position-sensing system Sostenuto pedal: Optical ON/OFF detection sensing system*2 Damper & shift pedals: Noncontact digital optical position-sensing system Sostenuto pedal: Optical ON/OFF detection sensing system Keys DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids) Pedals DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids) Internal Memory 128 MB Compact Disc Audio CD (CD-DA), Data CD (ISO 9660 Level1-compliant) USB Flash Memory FAT16 or FAT32 format Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available USB flash memories. USB Hard Disk FAT32 format Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available USB hard disks. Floppy Disk 3.5” 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB) floppy disk*3 File Format Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 0, Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 1, E-SEQ format Song Format PianoSoft (Solo), PianoSoft•Plus, PianoSoft•PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft, SmartKey (CueTIME) Drive Control Unit Monitor Speaker*4 Connectors Piano Tone*5 Ensemble Tone Power Source CD (read only) Dimensions (W H D) 292 49 216 mm (11-1/2” 1-15/16” 8-1/2”) Weight 2.7 kg (5.95 lb) Rated Power Output 20 W 2 with tone and volume controls Drivers 10 cm (3-15/16”) woofer 2, 2.2 cm (7/8”) tweeter 2 Dimensions (W H D) 144 236 167 mm (5-11/16” 9-5/16” 6-9/16”) Weight 4.4 kg (9.70 lb) MIDI MIDI IN, MIDI OUT Audio OUTPUT, ANALOG MIDI IN, OMNI IN, OMNI OUT, PHONES 2*5 Others LAN, USB (1 TO HOST, 2 TO DEVICE) Pitch Control English Upright Piano Set at A=440 Hz, tunable –50 to +50 cents in 1 cent increment Type Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2) Polyphony 32 notes (max.) Voice Piano (digital stereo sampling) Reverb Type Room, Hall1, Hall2 (depth controllable) Type Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2) Polyphony 32 notes (max.) Ensemble Parts 16 parts Voice Module Modes XG, GM Normal Voices 676 voices (480 voices can be used for playing) Drum Voices 21 kits (11 kits can be used for playing) Local AC current, 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz 143 Chapter 17 Specifications Supplied Accessories Control unit (1), control unit suspension bracket (1)*6, screw for control unit suspension bracket installation (4 10) (4)*6, screw for control unit suspension (5 12) (3)*6, screw for USB floppy disk drive installation (3 6) (4)*6, monitor speaker (2)*4, monitor speaker installation kit (1)*4, speaker cord (2)*4, remote control (1), battery for remote control (2), stereo headphone (1)*5, sample PianoSoft CD software (1), operation manual (1), PianoSoft CD song list (1), music book “50 greats for the Piano” (1) Optional Accessories USB floppy disk drive (UD-FD01) Function & Controls Media Select Playback Functions Playback Controls Recording Functions Piano Playing Functions Metronome Utility Functions Network Functions Song Select Cursor buttons (control unit), cursor buttons/numeric section (remote control) Basic Functions Play, stop, pause Song Search Reverse/forward w/ sound (MIDI songs), reverse/forward w/o sound (audio songs), directly by time or measure. Repeat ALL (all songs in current album), RPT (current song), RND (all songs in current album in random order), A-B Part Cancel L (left), R (right), pedal Timer Playback See page 36. Video Synchronization See page 40. SmartKey™ Playback See page 41. PianoSmart™ Playback See page 41. Volume 11 levels (–10 to 0) Tempo –50 to 50% in 1% increment Transposition –24 to +24 semitones (2 octaves) in 1 semitone increment Balance (TG, Audio) 10 to 127 Piano Part Recording L/R overwrite, split Metronome Mode Recording See page 56. Tempo Changing See page 63. Video Synchronization See page 65. Audio CD Synchronization See page 69. XG Voices Approx. 500 voices Range 30 to 400 beats per minute Time Signatures 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4 Volume Controllable Song Copy, delete, rename, sort, add to playlist, type convert, time format convert, strip XP Album Copy, delete, create, rename, sort, add to playlist Playlist Create, delete, rename Backup/Restore See pages 98 and 99. Floppy Disk*3 Format DisklavierRadio™ See pages 26 and 103. FromToPC Folder See pages 92 to 96. Network Update Update Internal memory, CD, USB media (including floppy disk) See page 105. Firmware update with media (CD-ROM or USB flash memory) or via the Internet Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. Note: *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 144 Not available in some areas. Not equipped on some models. Possible for optional floppy disk drive (UD-FD01). Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers. Only for models equipped with the Silent Piano™ function. Only for grand pianos. Appendix Appendix Software License Notice GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. ■ Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. Software License Notice Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. Appendix We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. A-1 Software License Notice ■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term modification.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. A-2 Software License Notice 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Software License Notice 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. Appendix 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. A-3 Software License Notice If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. A-4 Software License Notice GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] ■ Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages — typically libraries — of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Software License Notice To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Appendix For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. A-5 Software License Notice When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. ■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. A-6 Software License Notice 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Software License Notice In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. Appendix These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. A-7 Software License Notice 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. A-8 Software License Notice c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. Software License Notice 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. Appendix 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. A-9 Software License Notice If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. A-10 Software License Notice expat Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. glibc This file contains the copying permission notices for various files in the GNU C Library distribution that have copyright owners other than the Free Software Foundation. These notices all require that a copy of the notice be included in the accompanying documentation and be distributed with binary distributions of the code, so be sure to include this file along with any binary distributions derived from the GNU C Library. All code incorporated from 4.4 BSD is distributed under the following license: Copyright © 1991 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 3. [This condition was removed.] 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. Software License Notice 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Appendix Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: A-11 Software License Notice THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The DNS resolver code, taken from BIND 4.9.5, is copyrighted both by UC Berkeley and by Digital Equipment Corporation. The DEC portions are under the following license: Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. The Sun RPC support (from rpcsrc-4.0) is covered by the following license: Copyright © 1984, Sun Microsystems, Inc. Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part. Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user. SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE. Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement. SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF. In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages. The following CMU license covers some of the support code for Mach, derived from Mach 3.0: Mach Operating System Copyright © 1991, 1990, 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation. A-12 Software License Notice CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS “AS IS” CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to Software Distribution Coordinator School of Computer Science Carnegie Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 or [email protected] any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie Mellon the rights to redistribute these changes. The file if_ppp.h is under the following CMU license: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. The following license covers the files from Intel’s “Highly Optimized Mathematical Functions for Itanium” collection: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Software License Notice Intel License Agreement Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation All rights reserved. Appendix THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. A-13 Software License Notice THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The files inet/getnameinfo.c and sysdeps/posix/getaddrinfo.c are copyright © by Craig Metz and are distributed under the following license: The Inner Net License, Version 2.00 The author(s) grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are met: 0. If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for redistribution (check the version message and/or README), you are not permitted to redistribute that version of the software in any way or form. 1. All terms of the all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed. 2. Redistributions of source code must retain the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer. 3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 4. [The copyright holder has authorized the removal of this clause.] 5. Neither the name(s) of the author(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. If these license terms cause you a real problem, contact the author. libcap Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text describes the licensed conditions under which the contents of this libcap release may be used and distributed: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: A-14 Software License Notice 1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libupnp Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ìAS ISî AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Software License Notice * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Appendix * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. A-15 Software License Notice ntp Copyright Notice jpg “Clone me,” says Dolly sheepishly Last update: 02:45 UTC Tuesday, June 27, 2006 The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution. Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file. Copyright © David L. Mills 1992-2006 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty. openldap The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices, 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and 3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document. The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders. A-16 Software License Notice OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation. Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted. openssl LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]. OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” Software License Notice THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Appendix 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved. A-17 Software License Notice This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 7. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 8. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 9. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 10. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.] A-18 Software License Notice pam Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated the following text describes the licensed conditions under which the contents of this Linux-PAM release may be distributed: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright © 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved. For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, Mike White Software License Notice This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license. The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely. Appendix unzip This software is provided “as is,” without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: A-19 Software License Notice 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions. 2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled. 3. Altered versions — including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versions — must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases — including, but not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP URL(s). 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,” “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and “MacZip” for its own source and binary releases. zlib © 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly [email protected] Mark Adler [email protected] If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code. If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions. A-20 MIDI Data Format If you are familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music software with computergenerated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control your Disklavier. Messages include those that can be received by the piano part and/or those that can be received by an ESBL part. Messages that can be transmitted as well as received are shown as “transmitted.” 1. CHANNEL MESSAGES 1.1 Key On / Key Off Cntrl# 64 (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) Piano Part reception note range = A-1~C7 : C3=60 ESBL part reception note range = C-2~G8 Velocity range = 1~127 (Only the Key On velocity is received) 1.2 1.2.1 Bank Select Cntrl# 0 32 Parameter Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Parameter Modulation Data Range 0...127 Cntrl# 5 Parameter Portamento Time Data Range 0...127 Data Range 0...127 (0-63:off, 64-127:on) 1.2.11 Soft Pedal (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 67 Soft Pedal 0...127 (0-63:off, 64-127:on) 1.2.12 Harmonic Content (ESBL Part) Messages which adjust the resonance set for each Voice. Cntrl# 71 Parameter Harmonic Content Data Range 0...127 (0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63) Depending on the Voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. 1.2.13 Release Time Messages which adjust the envelope release time set for each Voice. Cntrl# 72 Parameter Release Time Data Range 0...127 (0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63) 1.2.14 Attack Time (ESBL Part) Messages which adjust the envelope attack time set for each Voice. Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by RPN/NRPN. Cntrl# 73 Parameter Data Entry MSB Data Entry LSB Data Range 0...127 0...127 Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB. Main Volume (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) Cntrl# 7 Parameter Main Volume Data Range 0...127 1.2.15 Brightness (ESBL Part) Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each Voice. Cntrl# 74 Parameter Brightness Data Range 0...127 (0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63) (ESBL Part) (ESBL Part) Parameter Pan Data Range 0...127 (Piano Part, ESBL Part) Parameter Expression Messages which apply a portamento between the currentlysounding note and the subsequent note. Cntrl# 84 Expression Cntrl# 11 Data Range 0...127 (0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63) 1.2.16 Portamento Control Pan Cntrl# 10 Parameter Attack Time MIDI Data Format (ESBL Part) Data Entry Cntrl# 6 38 1.2.8 Parameter Sostenuto Appendix When the parameter 1.2.9 Portamento = ON, values will adjust the speed of pitch change. A setting of 0 - minimum portamento time, and 127 - maximum portamento time. 1.2.7 Cntrl# 66 (ESBL Part) Portamento Time (ESBL Part) 1.2.6 Data Range 0...127 (0-63:off, 64-127:on) Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound. Modulation Cntrl# 1 1.2.5 Cntrl# 65 (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) Data Range 0: Normal, 63: User voice, 64: SFX, 126: SFX kit, 127: Drum 0...127 (ESBL Part) 1.2.4 Parameter Portamento Portamento (ESBL Part) 1.2.10 Sostenuto You can select the Voice banks with MSB and LSB numbers. MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the play mode. In XG mode, MSB numbers select Voice type (Normal Voice or Drum Voice), and LSB number select Voice banks. In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select Voice banks. (See Normal Voice List Drum Voice List.) A new bank selection will not become effective until the next Program Change message is received. 1.2.3 Data Range 0...127 (0-63:off, 64-127:on) Control Change (ESBL Part) (transmitted) 1.2.2 1.2.9 Parameter Hold1 Data Range 0...127 Hold1 (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) Parameter Portamento Control Data Range 0...127 1.2.17 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 91 Parameter Effect1 Depth Data Range 0...127 A-21 MIDI Data Format 1.2.18 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) $1D $rr $mm $1E $rr $mm $1F $rr $mm (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 93 Parameter Effect3 Depth Data Range 0...127 1.2.19 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level) (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 94 Parameter Effect4 Depth Data Range 0...127 1.2.20 Data Increment / Decrement (for RPN) (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 96 97 Parameter RPN Increment RPN Decrement Data Range 0...127 0...127 1.2.21 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 98 99 Parameter NRPN LSB NRPN MSB Data Range 0...127 0...127 First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry to set the value of the specified parameter. * Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change. Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result. The following NRPN number can be received. NRPN MSB LSB $01 $08 $01 $09 $01 $0A $01 $20 $01 $21 $01 $63 $01 $64 $01 $66 $14 $rr $15 $rr $16 $rr $17 A-22 $rr $18 $rr $19 $rr $1A $rr $1C $rr Data entry MSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE RANGE $mm Vibrato Rate mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm Vibrato Depth mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm Vibrato Delay mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm Filter Cutoff Frequency mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm Filter Resonance mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm EG Attack Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm EG Decay Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm EG Release Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) $mm Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum Filter Resonance mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum EG Attack mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum EG Decay Rate mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number Applies to both Decay1 and 2. $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Fine mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum Instrument Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max) rr : drum instrument note number $mm Drum Instrument Pan mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (random, left center - right) rr : drum instrument note number Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 -max) rr : drum instrument note number Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max) rr : drum instrument note number Drum Instrument Variation Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max) rr : drum instrument note number MSB 14H- 1FH (for Drum) is valid only if the Multi Part parameter PART MODE = DRUMS 1 or DRUMS2 for that channel. (If PART MODE = DRUM, no values will be changed.) 1.2.22 RPN (Registered Parameter Number) (ESBL Part) Cntrl# 100 101 Parameter RPN LSB RPN MSB Data Range 0...127 0...127 The following RPN numbers can be received. RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE RANGE 00H 00H mmH — Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm:00-18H (0-24 chromatic steps) Assignable in chromatic steps up to 2 octaves Default : 02H LSB value is ignored. 00H 01H mmH 11H Fine Tuning mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64-0-+63) 00H 02H mmH — Coarse Tuning mm: 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - +24 chromatic steps) LSB value is ignored. 7FH 7FH — — RPN null Cancels RPN and NRPN numbers 1.2.23 Channel Mode Messages The following Channel Mode Messages can be received. 2nd byte 120 121 123 124 125 126 127 1.2.23.1 3rd byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 16 0 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly All Sound Off (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) ESBL part; Terminates all sounds currently sounding on the specified channel. However, the status of channel messages such as Note On and Hold On is maintained. Piano Part; The status of channel messages is not maintained. 1.2.23.2 Reset All Controllers (ESBL Part) The values of the following controllers will be reset to the defaults. CONTROLLER Pitch Bend Change Channel Aftertouch Polyphonic Aftertouch Modulation Expression Hold l Portamento Sostenuto Soft Pedal VALUE ±O (center) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) 127 (max) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) MIDI Data Format Portamento Control RPN NRPN cancels the Portamento Source Key Number that was received number not specified; internal data will not change number not specified; internal data will not change 1.2.23.3 All Note Off (Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted) [OTHER] 1) Master tuning 2) TG300 System Data Parameter change 3) TG300 Multi Effect Data parameter change 4) TG300 Multi Part Data parameter change 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 11110000 01111111 01111111 00000100 00000001 0sssssss 0ttttttt 11110111 or 11110000 01111111 0xxxnnnn 00000100 00000001 0sssssss 0ttttttt 11110111 1.2.23.4 Omni Off (Piano Part, ESBL Part) Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is received. 1.2.23.5 Omni On (Piano Part, ESBL Part) Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is received. 1.2.23.6 Mono (Piano Part, ESBL Part) Performs the same function as when an All Sounds on message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m = 1). (Piano Part, ESBL Part) 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 0;Off Disklavier keyboard does not play the internal voices. 127;On Program Change (ESBL Part) (transmitted) Messages for Voice selection. With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic Voice numbers, but also variation Voice bank numbers. (ESBL Part) When Multi Part Parameter Rcv PITCH BEND CHANGE=OFF, pitch bend for that part is not received. Polyphonic Aftertouch F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 = Exclusive status = Universal Non-Real Time = ID of target device = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On = End of Exclusive F0 7E XN 09 01 F7 = Exclusive status = Universal Non-Real Time = Device Number, xxx = don’t care = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On = End of Exclusive When General MIDI Mode On is received. the play mode will be changed to XG mode. When this happens, the ESBL part will receive the MIDI messages which compatible with GM System Level 1, and consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this messag, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message. (ESBL Part) (ESBL Part) (PianoPart) (transmitted) Applying further pressure on the key does not output “key aftertouch” information. Instead, key position is transmitted as additional information. General MIDI Mode On 2.1.4 XG Native Parameter Change (ESBL Part) 2. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES 2.1 Parameter Change The Disklavier receives the following parameter change messages. [UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE] 1) Master Volume [UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE] 1) General MIDI Mode On [XG NATIVE] 1) XG System on 2) XG System Data parameter change 3) Multi Effect1 Data parameter change 4) Multi Part Data parameter change 5) Drums Setup Data parameter change MIDI Data Format 1.6 = Exclusive status = Universal Real Time = Device Number, xxx = don’t care = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume = Volume LSB = Volume MSB = End of Exclusive Appendix Pitch Bend Channel Aftertouch F0 7F XN 04 01 SS TT F7 Universal Non-Realtime Messages 11110000 01111110 01111111 00001001 00000001 11110111 or 11110000 01111110 0xxxnnnn 00001001 00000001 11110111 (Piano Part, ESBL Part) 1.5 = Exclusive status = Universal Real Time = ID of target device = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume = Volume LSB = Volume MSB = End of Exclusive (ESBL Part) 1.2.24 Local Control 1.4 F0 7F 7F 04 01 *SS TT F7 When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the System Parameter MASTER VOLUME. * “SS” is the hexadecimal expression of Osssssss; same as for “tt”, “aa”, etc. 1.2.23.7 Poly 1.3 Master Volume (Piano Part, ESBL Part) Terminates all notes currently on for the specified channel. However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue sounding until these are turned off. Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received. and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode (Mode 3). Universal Realtime Messages With the Parameter Change messages as listed below, you can change the characteristic of a Voice, such as by Effect Type or effect parameter, transpose, tuning, and others. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 01001100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd | 11110111 F0 43 1n 4C aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa ddddddd | F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number XG Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low Data End of Exclusive * Any number is OK since the device number for the Disklavier is fixed to “All.” A-23 MIDI Data Format For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes. When sending the parameter change messages consecutively, be sure to leave an appropriate interval (if the time base is 480. ca 5 unit) between the messages. 2.1.4.1 2.2.1 XG System On (ESBL Part) 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 01001100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 00000000 11110111 F0 43 1N 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number XG Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low Data End of Exclusive When this data is received. the Disklavier will switch to XG mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select messages can be received. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message 2.1.4.2 XG System Data parameter change (ESBL Part) 2.2.1.1 Multi Effect1 Data parameter change See tables <1-1> and <1-2>. 2.2.1.2 Multi Part Data parameter change (ESBL Part) See tables <1-1> and <1-4>. 2.2.1.4 2.2.2 Other parameter changes Master Tuning (ESBL Part) F0 43 1n 27 30 00 00 mm ll cc F7 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number Model ID Sub ID2 QS300 Native Bulk Dump 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01001101 0bbbbbbb 0bbbbbbb 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd | | 0ccccccc 11110111 If a Drum Setup Reset parameter change message is received, the Drum Setup parameter values will be initialized. Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter values to be initialized. 2.2.2.1 F0 43 0n 4B bbbbbbb bbbbbbb aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa dd | | ccccccc F7 Master Tune MSB Master Tune LSB End of Exclusive Bulk Dump (ESBL Part) The Disklavier receives the following bulk dump data. [XG NATIVE] 1) XG System Data 2) Multi Effect1 Data 3) Multi Part Data 4) Drums Setup Data [QS300 NATIVE] 1) QS300 User Normal Voice Data Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number QS300 Model ID ByteCount ByteCount Address High Address Mid Address Low Data Checksum End of Exclusive QS300 User Normal Voice Data bulk damp (ESBL Part) This message simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels. A-24 Drums Setup Data bulk dump See tables <1-1> and <1-5>. See tables <1-1> and <1-5>. 2.2 Multi Part Data bulk dump (ESBL Part) Drums Setup Data parameter change 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00100111 00110000 00000000 00000000 0mmmmmmm 0lllllll 0ccccccc 11110111 Multi Effect1 Data bulk dump See tables <1-1> and <1-3>. 2.2.1.3 See tables <1-1> and <1-4>. 2.1.5.1 XG System Data bulk dump (ESBL Part) (ESBL Part) 2.1.5 Checksum End of Exclusive (ESBL Part) See tables <1-1> and <1-3>. 2.1.4.5 Exclusive status YAMAHA ID Device Number XG Model ID ByteCount ByteCount Address High Address Mid Address Low Data (ESBL Part) (ESBL Part) 2.1.4.4 F0 43 0n 4C bbbbbbb bbbbbbb aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa dd | | ccccccc F7 For the Address and Byte Count, refer to the supplementary tables. The Checksum is the value that results in a value of 0 for the lower 7 bits when the Start Address, Byte Count, plus the Checksum itself are added. See tables <1-1> and <1-2>. 2.1.4.3 XG Native Bulk Dump 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01001100 0bbbbbbb 0bbbbbbb 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd | | 0ccccccc 11110111 See tables <2-1> and <2-2>. MIDI Data Format 3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES 3.1 Active Sensing a) Transmission Transmitted. b) Reception Once FE has been received. if no MIDI data is subsequently received for longer than an interval of approximately 300msec. the Disklavier will perform the same function as when ALL SOUNDS OFF. ALL NOTES OFF, and RESET ALL CONTROLLERS messages are received, and will then return to a status in which FE is not monitored. <Table 1-1> Parameter Bass Address Model ID = 4C [XG] Parameter Change Address (H) (M) (L) Description XG SYSTEM 00 00 00 System 00 00 7D Drum setup Reset 00 00 7E XG System On All Parameter Reset 00 00 7F EFFECT1 02 01 00 Effect1 (Reverb, Chorus, Variation) MULTI PART 08 00 00 Multi Part 1 : 08 0F 00 Multi Part 16 DRUM 30 18 00 Drum Setup 1 30 18 00 Drum Setup 2 -------> Address 0B 00 0C 00 : 3n 5B 00 3n 3n Parameter note number 13 note number 14 : note number 91 n: Drum setup number (0, 1) <Table 1-2> MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) [XG] Address (H) 00 00 00 1 1 1 MASTER VOLUME not used TRANSPOSE DRUM SETUP RESET XG SYSTEM ON ALL PARAMETER RESET 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 28 - 58 n 00 00 07 MASTER TUNE Description (H) -102.4 - +102.3 [cent] 1st bit3-0bit15-12 2nd bit3-0bit11-8 3rd bit3-0bit7-4 4th bit3-0bit3-0 0 - 127 Default value 00 04 00 00 -400 7F -24 - +24 [semitones] n=Drum setup number 00=XG system ON (receive only) 00=ON (receive only) 40 Parameter Description REVERB TYPE MSB REVERB TYPE LSB REVERB PARAMETER 1 REVERB PARAMETER 2 REVERB PARAMETER 3 REVERB PARAMETER 4 REVERB PARAMETER 5 REVERB PARAMETER 6 REVERB PARAMETER 7 REVERB PARAMETER 8 REVERB PARAMETER 9 REVERB PARAMETER 10 REVERB RETURN REVERB PAN see Effect Type List 00 : basic type see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) L63...C...R63(1...64...127) Default value (H) 01(=HALL1) 00 Depends on reverb type ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” 40 40 <Table 1-3> MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) [XG] Address (H) 02 01 00 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D Size Data (H) (H) 2 00-7F 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 00-7F 1 01-7F MIDI Data Format Parameter Appendix 04 05 06 7D 7E 7F TOTAL SIZE Size Data (H) (H) 4 0000-07FF A-25 MIDI Data Format TOTAL SIZE 02 01 10 11 12 13 14 15 TOTAL SIZE 02 01 20 0E 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 2 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E TOTAL SIZE 02 01 30 31 32 33 34 35 TOTAL SIZE 02 01 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0F 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 4A 2 4C 2 4E 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 1 1 1 1 1 1 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 TOTAL SIZE 02 01 70 71 72 73 74 75 TOTAL SIZE A-26 1 1 1 1 1 21 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 REVERB PARAMETER 12 REVERB PARAMETER 13 REVERB PARAMETER 14 REVERB PARAMETER 15 REVERB PARAMETER 16 see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” Depends on reverb type ” ” ” ” ” 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 01-7F 00-7F CHORUS TYPE MSB CHORUS TYPE LSB CHORUS PARAMETER 1 CHORUS PARAMETER 2 CHORUS PARAMETER 3 CHORUS PARAMETER 4 CHORUS PARAMETER 5 CHORUS PARAMETER 6 CHORUS PARAMETER 7 CHORUS PARAMETER 8 CHORUS PARAMETER 9 CHORUS PARAMETER 10 CHORUS RETURN CHORUS PAN SEND CHORUS TO REVERB see Effect Type List 00 : basic type see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) L63...C...R63(1...64...127) -dB...0dB... +6dB(0...64...127) 41 (=CHORUS1) 00 Depends on chorus Type ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” 40 40 00 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 CHORUS PARAMETER 12 CHORUS PARAMETER 13 CHORUS PARAMETER 14 CHORUS PARAMETER 15 CHORUS PARAMETER 16 see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” Depends on chorus Type ” ” ” ” ” 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 01-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-01 00-0F,7F VARIATION TYPE MSB VARIATION TYPE LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB VARIATION RETURN VARIATION PAN SEND VARIATION TO REVERB SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS VARIATION CONNECTION VARIATION PART 05 (=DELAY L, C, R) 00 Depends on variation type ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” 40 40 00 00 00 7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH see Effect Type List 00 : basic type see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) L63...C...R63(1...64...127) - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) - dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 0:INSERTION, 1:SYSTEM Part1...16(0...15) 0FF (127) -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 VARIATION PARAMETER 12 VARIATION PARAMETER 13 VARIATION PARAMETER 14 VARIATION PARAMETER 15 VARIATION PARAMETER 16 see Effect Parameter List ” ” ” ” ” Depends on variation type ” ” ” ” ” 40 40 40 40 40 MIDI Data Format <Table 1-4> MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) [XG] Address (H) 08 nn nn nn nn nn nn 00 01 02 03 04 05 Size (H) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00 - 20 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 0F, 7F 00 - 01 nn 06 1 00 - 02 nn 07 1 00 - 03 nn nn nn 08 09 0A 1 2 28 - 58 00 - FF nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 0 - 32 0 - 127 0 - 127 1 - 128 1 - 16,OFF 0:MONO 1:POLY SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON ASSIGN 0:SINGLE 1:MULTI 2:INST (for DRUM) PART MODE 0:NORMAL 1:DRUM 2-3:DRUMS1 - 2 NOTE SHIFT -24 - +24 [semitones] DETUNE -12.8 - +12.7 [Hz] 1st bit3-0bit7-4 2nd bit3-0bit3-0 VOLUME 0 - 127 VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH 0 - 127 VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET 0 - 127 PAN 0/random, 1/L63-64/C-127/R63 NOTE LIMIT LOW C-2 - G8 NOTE LIMIT HIGH C-2 - G8 DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 REVERB SEND 0 - 127 VARIATION SEND 0 - 127 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DEPTH VIBRATO DELAY FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY FILTER RESONANCE EG ATTACK TIME EG DECAY TIME EG RELEASE TIME -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -61 - +63 40 40 (drum part ignores) 40 (drum part ignores) 40 40 40 40 40 nn nn nn nn nn nn 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F MW PITCH CONTROL MW FILTER CONTROL MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL MW LFO PMOD DEPTH MW LFO FMOD DEPTH MW LFO AMOD DEPTH -24 -+24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 40 40 40 0A 00 00 nn 23 nn 24 nn 25 nn 26 nn 27 nn 28 TOTAL SIZE nn 30 nn 31 nn 32 nn 33 nn 34 nn 35 nn 36 nn 37 nn 38 nn 39 nn 3A nn 3B nn 3C nn 3D nn 3E nn 3F 1 1 1 1 1 1 29 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F BEND PITCH CONTROL BEND FILTER CONTROL BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH -24 - +24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 +100 - +100 [%] +100 - +100 [%] +100 - +100 [%] 42 40 40 40 40 40 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 Rcv PITCH BEND Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT) Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE Rcv CONTROL CHANGE Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT) Rcv NOTE MESSAGE Rcv RPN Rcv NRPN Rcv MODULATION Rcv VOLUME Rcv PAN Rcv EXPRESSION Rcv HOLD1 Rcv PORTAMENTO Rcv SOSTENUTO Rcv SOFT PEDAL 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 XG=01, GM=00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 nn nn 1 1 00 - 01 00 - 7F Rcv BANK SELECT SCALE TUNING C 0/OFF,1/ON -64 - +63 [cent] XG=01, GM=00 40 Description ELEMENT RESERVE BANK SELECT MSB BANK SELECT LSB PROGRAM NUMBER Rcv CHANNEL MONO/POLY MODE Default value (H) part10=0, other =2 part10=7F, other=0 00 00 part no. 01 1 (all part) part10=2, other=0 00 (other than Part10) 02 (Part10) 40 08 00 (80) 64 40 40 40 00 7F 7F 00 40 00 Appendix MIDI Data Format 40 41 Parameter A-27 MIDI Data Format nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C# SCALE TUNING D SCALE TUNING D# SCALE TUNING E SCALE TUNING F SCALE TUNING F# SCALE TUNING G SCALE TUNING G# SCALE TUNING A SCALE TUNING A# SCALE TUNING B -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] -64 - +63 [cent] 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 nn nn nn nn nn nn 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F CAT PITCH CONTROL CAT FILTER CONTROL CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH -24 - +24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 40 40 40 00 00 00 nn nn nn nn nn nn 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F PAT PITCH CONTROL PAT FILTER CONTROL PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH -24 - +24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 40 40 40 00 00 00 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 - 5F 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER AC1 PITCH CONTROL AC1 FILTER CONTROL AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 95 -24 - +24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 10 40 40 40 00 00 00 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 - 5F 28 - 58 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER AC2 PITCH CONTROL AC2 FILTER CONTROL AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0 - 95 -24 - +24 [semitones] -9600 - +9450 [cent] -64 - +63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 11 40 40 40 00 00 00 nn nn 67 68 1 1 00 - 01 00 - 7F PORTAMENTO SWITCH PORTAMENTO TIME 0/OFF, 1/ON 0 - 127 00 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 3F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 01 - 7F 01 - 7F PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL PITCH EG ATTACK TIME PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL PITCH EG RELEASE TIME VELOCITY LIMIT LOW VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH -64 -+63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 1 - 127 1 - 127 40 40 40 40 01 7F Parameter Description PITCH COARSE PITCH FINE LEVEL ALTERNATE GROUP PAN REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND VARIATION SEND -64 - +63 -64 - +63 [cent] 0 - 127 0/OFF, 1 - 127 0/random, 1/L63 - 64/C - 127/R63 0 - 127 0 - 127 0 - 127 Default (H) 40 40 Depends on the note ” ” ” ” 7F nn 69 nn 6A nn 6B nn 6C nn 6D nn 6E TOTAL SIZE nn = Part Number (0:1Part, 1:2Part, 2:3Part, ..., 15:16Part) For the DRUM PART, the following parameters have no effect. • • • • • SOFT PEDAL BANK SELECT LSB MONO/POLY SCALE TUNING PORTAMENTO • • • • • PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL PITCH EG ATTACK TIME PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL PITCH EF RELEASE TIME POLY AFTER TOUCH <Table 1-5> MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP) [XG] Address (H) 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr 3n rr A-28 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Size (H) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data (H) 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F MIDI Data Format 3n rr 08 3n rr 09 3n rr 0A 3n rr 0B 3n rr 0C 3n rr 0D 3n rr 0E 3n rr 0F TOTAL SIZE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 01 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F 00 - 7F KEY ASSIGN Rcv NOTE OFF Rcv NOTE ON FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY FILTER RESONANCE EG ATTACK RATE EG DECAY1 RATE EG DECAY2 RATE 0/SINGLE, 1/MULTI 0/OFF, 1/ON 0/OFF, 1/ON -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 -64 - +63 00 Depends on the note 01 40 40 40 40 40 [Note] n: Drum number (0 - 1) rr: note number (0D - 5B) When XG system on or GM mode on messages are received, all Drum Setup parameters are initialized. The Drum Setup Reset message can be used to initialized each Drum Setup parameter. Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter values to be initialized. <Table 2-1> Parameter Bass Address Model ID = 4B [QS300] Bulk Dump Address (H) (M) (L) USER 11 00 00 NORMAL VOICE 00 1F 00 Description User Normal Voice 1 : User Normal Voice 32 <Table 2-2> MIDI Bulk Dump table (USER NORMAL VOICE) [QS300] Address (H) Size Data (H) (H) Parameter 17D 20-7E Voice Name Description Default (H) [Common] 11 nn 00 : 07 08 : 0A 0B 0C 01-03 00-7F not used ” ” 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-01 00-02 00-01 00-3F 00-7F 00-7F 00-3F 00-0F 00-1F 20-60 0E -72 00-05 00-7F 00-03 39-47 39-47 39-47 00-7F 00-3F 00-3F 00-3F Wave Number High Wave Number Low Note Limit Low Note Limit High Velocity Limit Low Velocity Limit High Filter EG Velocity Curve LFO Wave Select LFO Phase Initialize LFO Speed LFO Delay LFO Fade Time LFO PMD Depth LFO CMD Depth LFO AMD Depth Note Shift Detune Pitch Scaling Pitch Scaling Center Note Pitch EG Depth Velocity PEG Level Sensitivity Velocity PEG Rate Sensitivity PEG Rate Scaling PEG Rate Scaling Center Note PEG Rate 1 PEG Rate 2 PEG Rate 3 [Element 1] bit13-bit7 bit6-bit0 0:saw, 1:tri, 2:S&H 0:OFF, 1:ON MIDI Data Format 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 1:Element 1 on, 2:Element 2 on, 3:Element 1 and 2 on Appendix 0D : 3C not used ” ” Element Switch Voice Level 0:100%, 1:50%, 2:20%, 3:10%, 4:5%, 5:0% 0:1/2oct, 1:1oct, 2:2oct, 3:4oct A-29 MIDI Data Format 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 00-3F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-3F 00-07 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 39-47 39-47 39-47 00-7F 00-3F 00-3F 00-3F 00-3F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-06 00-0F 39-47 00-7F 00-0F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 00-7F 39-47 8D : DC DD : 12C 12D : 17C TOTAL SIZE 17D nn=Voice Number (00-1F) A-30 PEG Rate 4 PEG Level 0 PEG Level 1 PEG Level 2 PEG Level 3 PEG Level 4 Filter Resonance Velocity Sensitivity Cutoff Frequency Cutoff Scaling Break Point 1 Cutoff Scaling Break Point 2 Cutoff Scaling Break Point 3 Cutoff Scaling Break Point 4 Cutoff Scaling Offset 1 Cutoff Scaling Offset 2 Cutoff Scaling Offset 3 Cutoff Scaling Offset 4 Velocity FEG Level Sensitivity Velocity FEG Rate Sensitivity FEG Rate Scaling FEG Rate Scaling Center Note FEG Rate 1 FEG Rate 2 FEG Rate 3 FEG Rate 4 FEG Level 0 FEG Level 1 FEG Level 2 FEG Level 3 FEG Level 4 Element Level Level Scaling Break Point 1 Level Scaling Break Point 2 Level Scaling Break Point 3 Level Scaling Break Point 4 Level Scaling Offset 1 Level Scaling Offset 2 Level Scaling Offset 3 Level Scaling Offset 4 Velocity Curve Pan AEG Rate Scaling AEG Scaling Center Note AEG Key on Delay AEG Attack Rate AEG Decay 1 Rate AEG Decay 2 Rate AEG Release Rate AEG Decay 1 Level AEG Decay 2 Level Address Offset High Address Offset Low Resonance Sensitivity 0 (Left)-14 (Right), 15:Scaling bit13-bit7 bit6-bit0 [Element 2] same as [Element 1] ” ” [Element 3] not used ” ” [Element 4] not used ” ” MIDI Data Format XG Normal Voice List Bank Select MSB = 000, LSB = Bank Number Voice names in bold typeface are voices that can be selected in the Disklavier. The Disklavier can produce all the voices listed below, but can only display bank 0 voices. Instrument Group Piano Chromatic Percussion Instrument Group Organ Guitar Program Bank Voice Name # # 17 0 DrawOrgn 32 DetDrwOr 33 60sDrOr1 34 60sDrOr2 35 70sDrOr1 36 DrawOrg2 37 60sDrOr3 38 EvenBar 40 16+2"2/3 64 Organ Ba 65 70sDrOr2 66 CheezOrg 67 DrawOrg3 18 0 PercOrgn 24 70sPcOr1 32 DetPrcOr 33 LiteOrg 37 PercOrg2 19 0 RockOrgn 64 RotaryOr 65 SloRotar 66 FstRotar 20 0 ChrchOrg 32 ChurOrg3 35 ChurOrg2 40 NotreDam 64 OrgFlute 65 TrmOrgFl 21 0 ReedOrgn 40 Puff Org 22 0 Acordion 32 AccordIt 23 0 Harmnica 32 Harmo 2 24 0 TangoAcd 64 TngoAcd2 25 0 NylonGtr 16 NylonGt2 25 NylonGt3 43 VelGtHrm 96 Ukulele 26 0 SteelGtr 16 SteelGt2 35 12StrGtr 40 Nyln&Stl 41 Stl&Body 96 Mandolin 27 0 Jazz Gtr 18 MelloGtr 32 JazzAmp 28 0 CleanGtr 32 ChorusGt 29 0 Mute.Gtr 40 FunkGtr1 41 MuteStlG 43 FunkGtr2 45 Jazz Man 30 0 Ovrdrive 43 Gt.Pinch 31 0 Dist.Gtr 40 FeedbkGt 41 FeedbGt2 32 0 GtrHarmo 65 GtFeedbk 66 GtrHrmo2 Bank 18 : Dark Bank 19 : Dark Bank 20 : Resonant Bank 24 : Attack Bank 24 : Release Bank 27 : Reso Sweep Bank 28 : Muted Bank 32 : Detune 1 Bank 33 : Detune 2 Element 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 Instrument Group Bass Strings Bank 34 : Detune 3 Bank 35 : Octave 1 Bank 36 : Octave 2 Bank 37 : 5th 1 Bank 38 : 5th 2 Bank 39 : Bend Bank 40 : Tutti Bank 41 : Tutti Bank 42 : Tutti Program Bank Voice Name # # 33 0 Aco.Bass 40 JazzRthm 45 VXUprght 34 0 FngrBass 18 FingrDrk 27 FlangeBa 40 Ba&DstEG 43 FngrSlap 45 FngBass2 65 ModAlem 35 0 PickBass 28 MutePkBa 36 0 Fretless 32 Fretles2 33 Fretles3 34 Fretles4 96 SynFretl 97 Smooth 37 0 SlapBas1 27 ResoSlap 32 PunchThm 38 0 SlapBas2 43 VeloSlap 39 0 SynBass1 18 SynBa1Dk 20 FastResB 24 AcidBass 35 Clv Bass 40 TeknoBa 64 Oscar 65 SqrBass 66 RubberBa 96 Hammer 40 0 SynBass2 6 MelloSB1 12 Seq Bass 18 ClkSynBa 19 SynBa2Dk 32 SmthBa 2 40 ModulrBa 41 DX Bass 64 X WireBa 41 0 Violin 8 SlowVln 42 0 Viola 43 0 Cello 44 0 Contrabs 45 0 Trem.Str 8 SlowTrStr 40 Susp Str 46 0 Pizz.Str 47 0 Harp 40 YangChin 48 0 Timpani Element 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 Instrument Group Ensemble Brass Bank 43 : Velo-Switch Bank 45 : Velo-Xfade Bank 64 : Other wave Bank 65 : Other wave Bank 66 : Other wave Bank 67 : Other wave Bank 68 : Other wave Bank 69 : Other wave Bank 70 : Other wave Program Bank Voice Name # # 49 0 Strings1 3 S.Strngs 8 SlowStr 24 ArcoStr 35 60sStrng 40 Orchestr 41 Orchstr2 42 TremOrch 45 VeloStr 50 0 Strings2 3 S.SlwStr 8 LegatoSt 40 Warm Str 41 Kingdom 64 70s Str 65 Str Ens3 51 0 Syn.Str1 27 ResoStr 64 Syn Str4 65 SS Str 52 0 Syn.Str2 53 0 ChoirAah 3 S.Choir 16 Ch.Aahs2 32 MelChoir 40 ChoirStr 54 0 VoiceOoh 55 0 SynVoice 40 SynVox2 41 Choral 64 AnaVoice 56 0 Orch.Hit 35 OrchHit2 64 Impact 57 0 Trumpet 16 Trumpet2 17 BriteTrp 32 WarmTrp 58 0 Trombone 18 Trmbone2 59 0 Tuba 16 Tuba 2 60 0 Mute.Trp 61 0 Fr.Horn 6 FrHrSolo 32 FrHorn2 37 HornOrch 62 0 BrasSect 35 Tp&TbSec 40 BrssSec2 41 HiBrass 42 MelloBrs 63 0 SynBras1 12 QuackBr 20 RezSynBr 24 PolyBrss 27 SynBras3 32 JumpBrss 45 AnaVelBr 64 AnaBrss1 64 0 SynBras2 18 Soft Brs 40 SynBras4 41 ChorBrss 45 VelBras2 64 AnaBras2 Element 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 MIDI Data Format Bank 0 : (GM) Bank 1 : Key Scale Planning Bank 3 : Stereo Bank 6 : Single Bank 8 : Slow Bank 12 : Fast Decay Bank 14 : Double Attack Bank 16 : Bright Bank 17 : Bright Element 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 Appendix Program Bank Voice Name # # 1 0 GrandPno 1 GrndPnoK 18 MelloGrP 40 PianoStr 41 Dream 2 0 BritePno 1 BritPnoK 3 0 E.Grand 1 ElGrPnoK 32 Det.CP80 40 ElGrPno1 41 ElGrPno2 4 0 HnkyTonk 1 HnkyTnkK 5 0 E.Piano1 1 El.Pno1K 18 MelloEP1 32 Chor.EP1 40 HardEl.P 45 VX El.P1 64 60sEl.P 6 0 E.Piano2 1 El.Pno2K 32 Chor.EP2 33 DX Hard 34 DXLegend 40 DX Phase 41 DX+Analg 42 DXKotoEP 45 VX El.P2 7 0 Harpsi. 1 Harpsi.K 25 Harpsi.2 35 Harpsi.3 8 0 Clavi. 1 Clavi. K 27 ClaviWah 64 PulseClv 65 PierceCl 9 0 Celesta 10 0 Glocken 11 0 MusicBox 64 Orgel 12 0 Vibes 1 VibesK 45 HardVibe 13 0 Marimba 1 MarimbaK 64 SineMrmb 97 Balafon2 98 Log Drum 14 0 Xylophon 15 0 TubulBel 96 ChrchBel 97 Carillon 16 0 Dulcimer 35 Dulcimr2 96 Cimbalom 97 Santur Bank 71 : Other wave Bank 72 : Other wave Bank 96 : Other wave Bank 97 : Other wave Bank 98 : Other wave Bank 99 : Other wave Bank 100 : Other wave Bank 101 : Other wave A-31 MIDI Data Format Bank Select MSB = 064, LSB = 000 SFX Voice Instrument Program Bank Group # # Reed 65 0 66 0 40 43 67 0 40 41 64 68 0 69 0 70 0 71 0 72 0 Pipe 73 0 74 0 75 0 76 0 77 0 78 0 79 0 80 0 Synth Lead 81 0 6 8 18 19 64 65 66 82 0 6 8 18 19 20 24 25 40 41 45 96 83 0 65 84 0 64 85 0 64 65 86 0 24 64 87 0 35 88 0 16 64 65 Synth Pad 89 0 64 90 0 16 17 18 64 65 91 0 64 65 66 67 A-32 EleVoice Name ment SprnoSax 1 Alto Sax 1 Sax Sect 2 HyprAlto 2 TenorSax 1 BrthTnSx 2 SoftTenr 2 TnrSax 2 1 Bari.Sax 1 Oboe 2 Eng.Horn 1 Bassoon 1 Clarinet 1 Piccolo 1 Flute 1 Recorder 1 PanFlute 1 Bottle 2 Shakhchi 2 Whistle 1 Ocarina 1 SquareLd 2 Square 2 1 LMSquare 2 Hollow 1 Shmoog 2 Mellow 2 SoloSine 2 SineLead 1 Saw.Lead 2 Saw 2 1 ThickSaw 2 DynaSaw 1 DigiSaw 2 Big Lead 2 HeavySyn 2 WaspySyn 2 PulseSaw 2 Dr. Lead 2 VeloLead 2 Seq Ana 2 CaliopLd 2 Pure Pad 2 Chiff Ld 2 Rubby 2 CharanLd 2 DistLead 2 WireLead 2 Voice Ld 2 SynthAah 2 VoxLead 2 Fifth Ld 2 Big Five 2 Bass &Ld 2 Big&Low 2 Fat&Prky 2 SoftWurl 2 NewAgePd 2 Fantasy2 2 Warm Pad 2 ThickPad 2 Soft Pad 2 SinePad 2 Horn Pad 2 RotarStr 2 PolySyPd 2 PolyPd80 2 ClickPad 2 Ana Pad 2 SquarPad 2 Instrument Program Bank Group # # Synth Pad 92 0 64 66 67 93 0 64 65 94 0 64 65 95 0 96 0 20 27 64 66 Synth 97 0 Effects 45 64 65 66 98 0 27 64 99 0 12 14 18 35 40 41 42 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 100 0 18 19 40 64 65 66 67 101 0 64 96 102 0 64 65 66 67 68 70 71 96 103 0 8 14 64 65 66 67 68 69 104 0 64 EleVoice Name ment ChoirPad 2 Heaven2 2 Itopia 2 CC Pad 2 BowedPad 2 Glacier 2 GlassPad 2 MetalPad 2 Tine Pad 2 Pan Pad 2 Halo Pad 2 SweepPad 2 Shwimmer 2 Converge 2 PolarPad 2 Celstial 2 Rain 2 ClaviPad 2 HrmoRain 2 AfrcnWnd 2 Caribean 2 SoundTrk 2 Prologue 2 Ancestrl 2 Crystal 2 SynDrCmp 2 Popcorn 2 TinyBell 2 RndGlock 2 GlockChi 2 ClearBel 2 ChorBell 2 SynMalet 1 SftCryst 2 LoudGlok 2 XmasBell 2 VibeBell 2 DigiBell 2 AirBells 2 BellHarp 2 Gamelmba 2 Atmosphr 2 WarmAtms 2 HollwRls 2 NylonEP 2 NylnHarp 2 Harp Vox 2 AtmosPad 2 Planet 2 Bright 2 FantaBel 2 Smokey 2 Goblins 2 GobSyn 2 50sSciFi 2 Ring Pad 2 Ritual 2 ToHeaven 2 Night 2 Glisten 2 BelChoir 2 Echoes 2 EchoPad2 2 Echo Pan 2 EchoBell 2 Big Pan 2 SynPiano 2 Creation 2 Stardust 2 Reso Pan 2 Sci-Fi 2 Starz 2 Instrument Program Bank Group # # Ethnic 105 0 32 35 96 97 106 0 28 96 97 98 107 0 108 0 96 97 109 0 110 0 111 0 112 0 64 96 97 Percussive 113 0 96 97 98 99 100 101 114 0 115 0 97 98 116 0 96 117 0 96 118 0 64 65 66 119 0 64 65 120 0 Sound 121 0 Effects 122 0 123 0 124 0 125 0 126 0 127 0 128 0 EleVoice Name ment Sitar 1 DetSitar 2 Sitar 2 2 Tambra 2 Tamboura 2 Banjo 1 MuteBnjo 1 Rabab 2 Gopichnt 2 Oud 2 Shamisen 1 Koto 1 T. Koto 2 Kanoon 2 Kalimba 1 Bagpipe 2 Fiddle 1 Shanai 1 Shanai2 1 Pungi 1 Hichriki 2 TnklBell 2 Bonang 2 Gender 2 Gamelan 2 S.Gamlan 2 Rama Cym 2 AsianBel 2 Agogo 2 SteelDrm 2 GlasPerc 2 ThaiBell 2 WoodBlok 1 Castanet 1 TaikoDrm 1 Gr.Cassa 1 MelodTom 2 Mel Tom2 1 Real Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Syn.Drum 1 Ana Tom 1 ElecPerc 2 RevCymbl 1 FretNoiz 2 BrthNoiz 2 Seashore 2 Tweet 2 Telphone 1 Helicptr 1 Applause 1 Gunshot 1 Program # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 MSB=064 LSB=000 Element CuttngNz CttngNz2 1 2 Str Slap 1 Fl.KClik 1 Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed 1 1 1 2 2 2 Dog Horse Bird 2 1 1 1 Ghost Maou 2 2 Program # 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 MSB=064 LSB=000 Element Tel.Dial DoorSqek Door Slam Scratch Scratch 2 WindChm Telphon2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 CarEngin Car Stop Car Pass CarCrash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Coaster SbMarine 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Laughing Scream Punch Heart FootStep 1 1 1 1 1 MchinGun LaserGun Xplosion FireWork 1 2 2 2 : No Sound MIDI Data Format TG300B Normal Voice List Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = ooo Instrument Group Piano Instrument Group Organ Guitar Program Bank Voice Name # # 17 0 DrawOrgn 1 70sDrOr1 8 DetDrwOr 9 70sDrOr2 16 60sDrOr1 17 60sDrOr2 18 60sDrOr3 24 CheezOrg 32 DrawOrg2 33 EvenBar 40 Organ Ba 126 Slap-2 127 harpsi1 18 0 PercOrgn 1 70sPcOr1 8 DetPrcOr 32 PercOrg2 126 Slap-3 127 harpsi2 19 0 RockOrgn 8 RotaryOr 16 SloRotar 24 FstRotar 126 Slap-4 127 harpsi3 20 0 ChrchOrg 8 ChurOrg2 16 ChurOrg3 24 OrgFlute 32 TrmOrgFl 126 Slap-5 127 clavi1 21 0 ReedOrgn 126 Slap-6 127 clavi2 22 0 Acordion 8 AccordIt 126 Slap-7 127 clavi3 23 0 Harmnica 1 Harmo 2 126 Slap-8 127 celesta1 24 0 TangoAcd 126 Finger-1 127 celesta2 25 0 NylonGtr 8 Ukulele 16 NylonGt3 24 VelGtHrm 32 NylonGt2 40 LequintG 126 Finger-2 127 synbras1 26 0 SteelGtr 8 12StrGtr 9 Nyln&Stl 16 Mandolin 32 SteelGt2 126 Picked-1 127 synbras2 27 0 Jazz Gtr 1 MelloGtr 8 PdlSteel 126 Picked-2 127 synbras3 28 0 CleanGtr 8 ChorusGt 126 FretlsBs 127 synbras4 Element 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 Instrument Group Guitar Bass Program Bank Voice Name # # 29 0 Mute.Gtr 8 FunkGtr1 16 FunkGtr2 126 A-Bass 127 synbass1 30 0 Ovrdrive 126 Choir-1 127 synbass2 31 0 Dist.Gtr 8 FeedbkGt 9 FeedbGt2 126 Choir-2 127 synbass3 32 0 GtrHarmo 8 GtFeedbk 126 Choir-3 127 synbass4 33 0 Aco.Bass 126 Choir-4 127 newagepd 34 0 FngrBass 1 FngBass2 126 Strngs-1 127 synharmo 35 0 PickBass 8 MutePkBa 126 Strngs-2 127 choir pd 36 0 Fretless 1 Fretles2 2 Fretles3 3 Fretles4 4 SynFretl 5 Smooth 126 Strngs-3 127 bowed pd 37 0 SlapBas1 8 ResoSlap 126 Strngs-4 127 soundtrk 38 0 SlapBas2 126 E-Organ1 127 atmosphr 39 0 SynBass1 1 SynBa1Dk 8 AcidBass 9 FastResB 10 TeknoBa 16 ResoBass 126 E-Organ2 127 syn warm 40 0 SynBass2 1 ClkSynBa 2 ModulrBa 3 Seq Bass 8 DX Bass 9 X WireBa 16 RubberBa 17 SynBa2Dk 18 MelloSB1 19 SmthBa 2 126 E-Organ3 127 synfunny Element 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 Instrument Group Strings Ensemble Program Bank Voice Name # # 41 0 Violin 8 SlowVln 126 E-Organ4 127 synecho1 42 0 Viola 126 E-Organ5 127 rain 43 0 Cello 126 E-Organ6 127 synoboe 44 0 Contrabs 126 E-Organ7 127 synecho2 45 0 Trem.Str 8 SlowTrStr 9 Susp Str 126 E-Organ8 127 synsolo 46 0 Pizz.Str 126 E-Organ9 127 synrdorg 47 0 Harp 126 SoftTP-1 127 synbell 48 0 Timpani 126 SoftTP-2 127 squareld 49 0 Strings1 1 Slow Str 8 Orchestr 9 Orchstr2 10 TremOrch 11 ChoirStr 16 S.Strngs 24 VeloStr 126 TP/TRB-1 127 strsect1 50 0 Strings2 1 70s Str 8 LegatoSt 9 Warm Str 10 S.SlwStr 126 TP/TRB-2 127 strsect2 51 0 Syn.Str1 1 Syn Str4 126 TP/TRB-3 127 strsect3 52 0 Syn.Str2 126 TP/TRB-4 127 pizz.str 53 0 ChoirAah 8 S.Choir 9 MelChoir 32 Ch.Aahs2 126 TP/TRB-5 127 violin 1 54 0 VoiceOoh 126 TP/TRB-6 127 violin 2 55 0 SynVoice 8 SynVox2 126 Sax-1 127 cello 1 56 0 Orch.Hit 1 OrchHit2 8 Impact 16 LoFiRave 126 Sax-2 127 cello 2 Element 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 MIDI Data Format Element 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 Appendix Chromatic Percussion Program Bank Voice Name # # 1 0 GrandPno 8 GrndPnoK 16 MelloGrP 126 A-Piano1 127 a.piano1 2 0 BritePno 8 BritPnoK 126 A-Piano2 127 a.piano2 3 0 E.Grand 1 ElGrPno1 2 ElGrPno2 8 ElGrPnoK 126 A-Piano3 127 a.piano3 4 0 HnkyTonk 8 HnkyTnkK 126 A-Piano4 127 e.piano1 5 0 E.Piano1 8 Chor.EP1 16 VX El.P1 24 60sEl.P 25 HardEl.P 26 MelloEP1 32 El.Pno1K 126 A-Piano5 127 e.piano2 6 0 E.Piano2 8 Chor.EP2 16 VX El.P2 24 DX Hard 32 El.Pno2K 126 A-Piano6 127 e.piano3 7 0 Harpsi. 8 Harpsi.3 16 Harpsi.K 24 Harpsi.2 126 A-Piano7 127 e.piano4 8 0 Clavi. 8 Clavi. K 126 E-Piano1 127 hnkytnk 9 0 Celesta 126 E-Piano2 127 e.organ1 10 0 Glocken 126 E-Piano3 127 e.organ2 11 0 MusicBox 126 A-Guitr1 127 e.organ3 12 0 Vibes 1 HardVibe 8 VibesK 126 A-Guitr2 127 e.organ4 13 0 Marimba 8 MarimbaK 17 Balafon2 24 Log Drum 126 A-Guitr3 127 pipeorg1 14 0 Xylophon 126 E-Guitr1 127 pipeorg2 15 0 TubulBel 8 ChrchBel 9 Carillon 126 E-Guitr2 127 pipeorg3 16 0 Dulcimer 1 Dulcimr2 8 Cimbalom 126 Slap-1 127 acordion A-33 MIDI Data Format Instrument Group Brass Reed Pipe A-34 Program Bank Voice Name # # 57 0 Trumpet 1 Trumpet2 24 BriteTrp 25 WarmTrp 126 Sax-3 127 contrabs 58 0 Trombone 1 Trmbone2 126 Sax-4 127 harp 1 59 0 Tuba 1 Tuba 2 126 Brass-1 127 harp 2 60 0 Mute.Trp 126 Brass-2 127 guitar 1 61 0 Fr.Horn 1 FrHorn2 8 FrHrSolo 16 HornOrch 126 Brass-3 127 guitar 2 62 0 BrasSect 8 BrssSec2 126 Brass-4 127 elecgtr1 63 0 SynBras1 1 PolyBrss 8 SynBras3 9 QuackBr 16 AnaBrss1 126 Brass-5 127 elecgtr2 64 0 SynBras2 1 Soft Brs 8 SynBras4 16 AnaBrss2 17 VelBras2 126 Orch-Hit 127 sitar 65 0 SprnoSax 127 a.bass 1 66 0 Alto Sax 8 HyprAlto 127 a.bass 2 67 0 TnrSax 2 8 BrthTnSx 127 e.bass 1 68 0 Bari.Sax 127 e.bass 2 69 0 Oboe 127 slapbas1 70 0 Eng.Horn 127 slapbas2 71 0 Bassoon 127 fretles1 72 0 Clarinet 127 fretles2 73 0 Piccolo 127 flute1 74 0 Flute 127 flute2 75 0 Recorder 127 piccolo1 76 0 PanFlute 127 piccolo2 77 0 Bottle 127 recorder 78 0 Shakhchi 127 panpipes 79 0 Whistle 127 sax1 80 0 Ocarina 127 sax2 Element 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 Instrument Group Synth Lead Synth Pad Program Bank Voice Name # # 81 0 SquareLd 1 Square 2 2 Hollow 3 Mellow 4 SoloSine 5 Shmoog 6 LMSquare 8 SineLead 127 sax3 82 0 Saw.Lead 1 Saw 2 2 PulseSaw 3 ThickSaw 4 Big Lead 5 VeloLead 6 HeavySyn 7 DynaSaw 8 Dr. Lead 16 WaspySyn 127 sax4 83 0 CaliopLd 2 Pure Pad 127 clarint1 84 0 Chiff Ld 127 clarint2 85 0 CharanLd 8 DistLead 127 oboe 86 0 Voice Ld 127 eng.horn 87 0 Fifth Ld 1 Big Five 127 bassoon 88 0 Bass &Ld 1 Big&Low 2 Fat&Prky 127 harmnica 89 0 NewAgePd 1 Fantasy2 127 trumpet1 90 0 Warm Pad 1 ThickPad 2 Horn Pad 3 RotarStr 4 Soft Pad 127 trumpet2 91 0 PolySyPd 1 PolyPd80 127 trmbone1 92 0 ChoirPad 1 Heaven2 127 trmbone2 93 0 BowedPad 127 fr.horn1 94 0 MetalPad 1 Tine Pad 2 Pan Pad 127 fr.horn2 95 0 Halo Pad 127 tuba 96 0 SweepPad 1 PolarPad 8 Converge 9 Shwimmer 10 Celstial 127 brssect1 Element 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Instrument Group Synth Effects Ethnic Program Bank Voice Name # # 97 0 Rain 1 HrmoRain 2 AfrcnWnd 8 ClaviPad 127 brssect2 98 0 SoundTrk 1 Ancestrl 2 Prologue 127 vibe1 99 0 Crystal 1 SynMalet 2 SftCryst 3 RndGlock 4 LoudGlok 5 GlockChi 6 ClearBel 7 XmasBell 8 VibeBell 9 DigiBell 16 ChorBell 17 AirBells 18 BellHarp 19 Gamelmba 127 vibe2 100 0 Atmosphr 1 WarmAtms 2 NylnHarp 3 Harp Vox 4 HollwRls 5 NylonEP 6 AtmosPad 127 symallet 101 0 Bright 127 maletwin 102 0 Goblins 1 GobSyn 2 50sSciFi 127 glocken 103 0 Echoes 1 EchoBell 2 Echo Pan 3 EchoPad2 4 Big Pan 6 SynPiano 127 tubulbel 104 0 Sci-Fi 1 Starz 127 xylophon 105 0 Sitar 1 Sitar 2 2 DetSitar 8 Tambra 16 Tamboura 127 marimba 106 0 Banjo 1 MuteBnjo 8 Rabab 16 Gopichnt 24 Oud 127 koto 107 0 Shamisen 127 sho 108 0 Koto 8 T. Koto 16 Kanoon 127 shakhchi 109 0 Kalimba 127 whistle1 110 0 Bagpipe 127 whistle2 111 0 Fiddle 127 bottle 112 0 Shanai 1 Shanai2 8 Pungi 16 Hichriki 127 breath Element 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 Instrument Group Percussive Sound Effects Program Bank Voice Name # # 113 0 TnklBell 8 Bonang 9 Gender 10 Gamelan 11 S.Gamlan 16 Rama Cym 127 timpani 114 0 Agogo 127 melotom 115 0 SteelDrm 127 deepsnar 116 0 WoodBlok 8 Castanet 127 e.perc1 117 0 TaikoDrm 8 Gr.Cassa 127 e.perc2 118 0 MelodTom 1 Real Tom 8 Mel Tom2 9 Rock Tom 127 taiko 119 0 Syn.Drum 8 Ana Tom 9 ElecPerc 127 taikorim 120 0 RevCymbl 127 cymbal 121 0 FretNoiz 1 CuttngNz 2 Str Slap 3 CttngNz2 127 castanet 122 0 BrthNoiz 1 Fl.KClik 127 triangle 123 0 Seashore 1 Rain 2 Thunder 3 Wind 4 Stream 5 Bubble 127 orchehit 124 0 Tweet 1 Dog 2 Horse 3 Bird 2 127 telphone 125 0 Telphone 1 Tel.Dial 2 DoorSqek 3 DoorSlam 4 Scratch 5 WindChm 6 Scratch2 127 bird 126 0 Helicptr 1 CarEngin 2 Car Stop 3 Car Pass 4 CarCrash 5 Siren 6 Train 7 Jetplane 8 Starship 9 Burst 16 Coaster 127 jam 127 0 Applause 1 Laughing 2 Scream 3 Punch 4 Heart 5 FootStep 127 efctwatr 128 0 Gunshot 1 MchinGun 2 LaserGun 3 Xplosion 127 efctjngl Element 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 MIDI Data Format XG Drum Voice List Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = 000 Drum kit names in bold typeface are those that can be selected in the Disklavier. Bank 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 Program # 1 2 9 17 25 26 33 41 49 1 2 Standard Kit Standard2 Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Note# Note 13 C# -1 Key 3 Alternate 14 D -1 3 15 D# -1 Hi Q 16 E -1 Whip Slap 17 F -1 4 18 F# -1 4 19 G -1 Finger Snap 20 G# -1 Click Noise 21 A Metronome Click 22 A# -1 Metronome Bell 23 B -1 Seq Click L 24 C 0 Seq Click H 25 C# 0 26 D 0 27 D# 0 28 E 29 F 30 F# 0 Castanet 31 G 0 Snare L 32 G# 0 Sticks 33 A Bass Drum L 34 A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2 35 B 0 Bass Drum M Bass Drum M 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H 2 37 C# 1 Side Stick 38 D 1 Snare M 39 D# 1 Hand Clap 40 E 1 Snare H 41 F 1 42 F# 1 43 G 1 44 G# 1 45 A 46 A# 1 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 2 High Tom 51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Tire Screech 54 F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing off 55 G assign -1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch Push Scratch Pull Brush Tap O Brush Swirl L 0 O Brush Swirl H 0 O Snare Roll Brush Slap 0 Floor Tom L 1 1 2 Hi Q Hi Q SD Rock M Snare M SD Rock H Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock BD Analog L BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H Brush Slap L Bass Drum L2 Gran Cassa BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Cassa Mute Analog Side Stick Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock SD Rock L Analog Snare L Brush Slap M Marching Sn M Snare H 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H Brush Tap H Marching Sn H Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Guitar Cutting Noise Dial Tone Guitar Cutting Noise 2 Door Creaking Door Slam String Slap Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 2 Scratch Scratch 2 Windchime Analog HH Closed 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom 1 Snare L 2 Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H 1 Snare Roll 2 Telephone Ring2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Analog HH Closed 2 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Cymbal Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym.Open L Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Closed L FL.Key Click Splash Cymbal Engine Start Crash 56 G# 2 Cowbell 57 A Crash Cymbal 2 58 A# 2 Vibraslap 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst Noise 61 C# 3 Bongo L Coaster 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H 63 D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L 65 F 3 Timbale H 66 F# 3 Timbale L 67 G 3 Agogo H 68 G# 3 Agogo L 69 A Cabasa 70 A# 3 71 B 3 O 72 C 4 73 C# 4 74 D 4 75 D# 4 Claves 76 E 4 Wood Block H 77 F 4 Wood Block L 78 F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull 80 G# 4 2 Triangle Mute 81 A 2 Triangle Open 82 A# 4 Shaker 83 B 4 Jingle Bell 84 C 5 Bell Tree 85 C# 5 Horse Gallop 86 D 5 Bird 2 87 D# 5 88 E 5 89 F 5 90 F# 5 91 G 5 2 Train Jetplane Hand Cym.Closed H Maracas Analog Maracas Starship SbMarine Rain Laughing Thunder Screaming Wind Punch Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps O Guiro Long Guiro Short Feed Analog Claves Dog MIDI Data Format 4 Siren Hand Cym.Open H Appendix 3 Analog Cowbell Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion FireWork Ghost Maou : Same as Standard kit : No sound A-35 MIDI Data Format TG300B Drum Voice List Program # Note# Note Alternate 1 9 17 25 26 33 41 49 57 128 Standard Kit Room Kit Power Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Orchestra Kit SFX Set C/M Kit assign 0 Snare Roll 26 D 0 Finger Snap 27 25 D# C# 0 Hi Q Hi-Hat Closed 28 E 0 Whip Slap Hi-Hat Pedal 29 F 0 7 Scratch Push Hi-Hat Open 30 F# 0 7 Scratch Pull Ride Cymbal 1 31 G 0 Sticks 32 G# 0 Click Noise 33 A 0 Metronome Click 34 A# 0 Metronome Bell 35 B 0 Bass Drum M 36 C 1 Bass Drum H 37 C# 1 Side Stick 38 D 1 Snare M 39 D# 1 Hand Clap 40 E 1 Snare H 41 F 1 Floor Tom L 42 F# 1 43 G 1 44 G# 1 45 A 1 46 A# 1 1 BD Jazz BD Soft SD Power SD Electronic Analog Snare L Gran Cassa Brush Tap Concert SD Brush Slap Castanet High-Q Brush Swirl Concert SD Slap Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Timpani F Scratch Push Timpani F# Scratch Pull Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 SD Power Room Tom 1 Room Tom 1 E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Room Tom 3 Room Tom 3 E Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Analog HH Open Timpani G Sticks Timpani G# Square Click Timpani A Metronome Click Timpani A# Metronome Bell 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Room Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Timpani B Guitar Fret Noise 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Room Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Timpani C Guitar Cutting Down Timpani C# Guitar Cutting Up Room Tom 6 Room Tom 6 E Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 49 C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 2 High Tom 51 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup 54 F# 2 Tambourine 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal 56 G# 2 Cowbell 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 58 A# 2 Vibraslap 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 C 3 Bongo H Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Reverse Cymbal Timpani D Ac Bass Slap Timpani D# FL.Key Click Timpani E Laughing Timpani F Screaming Footsteps 2 Applause Hand Cym.2 Door Creaking Door Slam 3 Bongo L D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Windchime 63 D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M Scratch Engine Start Analog Conga L 64 E 3 Conga L 65 F 3 Timbale H Car Passing 66 F# 3 Timbale L Crash 67 G 3 Agogo H Siren 68 G# 3 Agogo L A 3 Cabasa A# 3 Maracas 71 B 3 Tire Screech Train Jetplane Analog Maracas Helicopter 2 Samba Whistle H Starship 72 C 2 Samba Whistle L Gunshot 73 C# 4 3 Guiro Short Machine Gun 74 D 4 3 Guiro Long Laser Gun D# 4 Hi-Hat Open 2 Footsteps 1 C# 69 Hi-Hat Open 1 Heartbeat Hand Cym.1 61 70 SD Electro Punch Analog Cowbell 62 75 Analog Claves Vibraslap 4 Claves 76 E 4 Wood Block H Dog Laughing 77 F 4 Wood Block L Horse Gallop Screaming 78 F# 4 4 Cuica Mute Bird Tweet Punch 79 G 4 4 Cuica Open Rain Explosion Heartbeat 80 G# 4 5 Triangle Mute Thunder Footsteps 1 81 A 4 5 Triangle Open Wind Footsteps 2 82 A# 4 Shaker Seashore Applause 83 B 4 Jingle Bell Stream Door Creaking 84 C 5 Bell Tree Bubble Door Slam 85 C# 5 Castanet Scratch 86 D 5 6 Surdo Mute 87 D# 5 6 Surdo Open 88 E 5 Windchime 89 F 5 Car Passing 90 F# 5 Crash Engine Start Applause Tire Screech 91 G 5 Siren 92 G# 5 Train 93 A 5 Jetplain 94 A# 5 Helicopter 95 B 5 Starship 96 C 6 Gunshot 97 C# 6 Machine Gun 98 D 6 Laser Gun 99 D# 6 Explosion 100 E 6 Dog 101 F 6 Horse Gallop 102 F# 6 Bird Tweet 103 G 6 Rain 104 G# 6 Thunder 105 A 6 Wind 106 A# 6 Seashore 107 B 6 Stream 108 C 7 Bubble : Same as Standard kit : No sound A-36 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom 1 BD Electronic Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H 1 BD Jazz BD Power MIDI Data Format Effect Type List Effect Type Description Effect turned off. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. NO EFFECT CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 Effect turned off. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Celeste with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. NO EFFECT HALL1 HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE DELAY L, C, R DELAY L, R ECHO CROSS DELAY EARLY REF1 EARLY REF2 GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 SYMPHONIC ROTARY SPEAKER TREMOLO AUTO PAN PHASER1 PHASER2 DISTORTION OVER DRIVE AMP SIMULATOR 3BAND EQ (MONO) 2BAND EQ (STEREO) AUTO WAH (LFO) THRU Effect turned off. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit. A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center). A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R. A program that crosses the feedback of two delays. An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb. An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb. A simulation of gated reverb. A program that simulates gated reverb played backwards. A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb. A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb. A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb. Conventional chorus program that add natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Chorus with stereo input. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Celeste with stereo input. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. A multi-phase version of CELESTE. A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use AC1 (assignable controller) etc. to control the speed of rotation. An effect that cyclically modulates the volume. A program that cyclically moves that sound image to left and right, front and back. Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound. Phaser with stereo input. Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound. Adds mild distortion to the sound. A simulation of a guitar amp. A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing. A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts. Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah. Bypass without applying any effect. MIDI Data Format NO EFFECT HALL1 HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE WHITE ROOM TUNNEL BASEMENT Appendix Exclusive MSB LSB REVERB 00 00 01 00 01 01 02 00 02 01 02 02 03 00 03 01 04 00 10 00 11 00 13 00 CHORUS 00 00 41 00 41 01 41 02 41 08 42 00 42 01 42 02 42 08 43 00 43 01 43 08 VARIATION 00 00 01 00 01 01 02 00 02 01 02 02 03 00 03 01 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 09 01 0A 00 0B 00 14 00 14 01 14 02 41 00 41 01 41 02 41 08 42 00 42 01 42 02 42 08 43 00 43 01 43 08 44 00 45 00 46 00 47 00 48 00 48 08 49 00 4A 00 4B 00 4C 00 4D 00 4E 00 40 00 * MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal. * LCB=0 is the basic effect type. A-37 MIDI Data Format Effect Parameter List No Parameter Range Value HALL1, HALL2, ROOM 1, 2, 3, STAGE 1, 2, PLATE 1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 6 7 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 12 Density 0~3 0-3 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E>R63 1-127 14 15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 16 WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, BASEMENT 1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 6 Width 0.5~10.2m 0-37 7 Height 0.5~20.2m 0-73 8 Depth 0.5~30.2m 0-104 9 Wall Vary 0~30 0-30 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 12 Density 0~3 0-3 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R~E=R~E>R63 1-127 14 15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 16 DELAY L, C, R 1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 3 Cch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 Cch Level 0~127 0-127 7 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 DELAY L, R 1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 3 Feedback Delay1 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 4 Feedback Delay2 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 7 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127 11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 See Table Control table#4 table#5 table#3 table#3 • table#5 table#4 table#5 table#3 table#3 table#11 table#11 table#11 • table#5 • table#3 table#3 • table#3 table#3 No Parameter ECHO 1 Lch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 2 Lch Feedback Level -63~+63 3 Rch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 4 Rch Feedback Level -63~+63 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 6 Lch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 7 Rch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 8 Delay2 Level 0~127 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB CROSS DELAY 1 L->R Delay 0.1~355.0ms 2 R->L Delay 0.1~355.0ms 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 4 Input Select L, R, L&R 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 6 7 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB EARLY REF1, EARLY REF2 1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 3 Diffusion 0~10 4 Initial Delay 0~63 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 Liveness 0~10 12 Density 0~3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 14 15 16 GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE 1 Type TypeA, TypeB 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 3 Diffusion 0~10 4 Initial Delay 0~63 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 Liveness 0~10 12 Density 0~3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 14 15 16 • : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3> See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table” A-38 Range Value See Table Control 1-3350 1-127 1-3550 1-127 1-10 1-3550 1-3550 0-127 1-127 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 • table#3 table#3 1-3550 1-3550 1-127 0-2 1-10 1-127 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 0-5 0-44 0-10 0-63 1-127 0-52 34-60 • table#3 table#3 table#6 table#5 1-127 0-10 0-3 1-10 0-1 0-44 0-10 0-63 1-127 0-52 34-60 1-127 0-10 0-3 1-10 • table#6 table#5 • MIDI Data Format No Parameter Range See Table 0-127 1-127 0-52 34-60 table#7 1-127 Control • 0-127 0-127 1-127 0-127 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 table#3 table#2 table#3 • 0-1 0-127 0-127 1-127 0-63 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 table#3 table#2 table#3 • 4-124 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 table#3 table#2 table#3 • Range ROTARY SPEAKER 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 LFO Depth 0~127 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 14 15 16 TREMOLO 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 AM Depth 0~127 3 PM Depth 0~127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 11 12 13 14 -180~+180deg 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 16 AUTO PAN 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 L/R Depth 0~127 3 F/R Depth 0~127 4 PAN Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Lturn, Rturn, L/R 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASER1, PHASER2 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 LFO Depth 0~127 3 Phase Shift 0~127 4 Feedback Level -63~+63 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 Stage 3~10 12 Diffusion Mono/Stereo 13 LFO Phase Di -180~+180deg 14 15 16 Value See Table 0-127 0-127 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 table#3 Control • table#3 0-127 0-127 0-127 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 • table#3 4-124 0-1 0-127 0-127 0-127 table#1 • 0-5 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 table#3 0-127 0-127 0-127 1-127 table#1 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 3-10 0-1 4-124 table#3 MIDI Data Format 0-127 0-127 0-127 No Parameter Appendix KARAOKE 1, 2, 3 1 Delay Time 0~127 2 Feedback Level -63~+63 3 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 5 6 7 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 14 15 16 CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4, CELESTE 1, 2, 3, 4 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 LFO PM Depth 0~127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 4 Delay Offset 0~127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 14 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 16 FLANGER 1, 2, 3 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 LFO Depth 0~127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 4 Delay Offset 0~63 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 15 16 SYMPHONIC 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 2 LFO Depth 0~127 3 Delay Offset 0~127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 12 13 14 15 16 Value table#3 • • : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3> See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table” A-39 MIDI Data Format No Parameter Range DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE 1 Drive 0~127 2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 5 Output Level 0~127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 12 13 14 15 16 GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR 1 Drive 0~127 2 AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 4 Output Level 0~127 5 6 7 8 9 10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D<W63 11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 12 13 14 15 16 3-BAND EQ 1 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 2 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 3 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 5 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Value 0-127 8-40 52-76 34-60 0-127 See Table Control • table#3 table#3 28-54 table#3 52-76 10-120 1-127 0-127 mild ~sharp 0-127 0-3 34-60 0-127 1-127 0-127 • table#3 mild ~sharp No Parameter 2-BAND EQ 1 EQ Low Frequency 2 EQ Low Gain 3 EQ High Frequency 4 EQ High Gain 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 EQ Mid Frequency 12 EQ Mid Gain 13 EQ Mid Width 14 15 16 AUTO WAH 1 LFO Frequency 2 LFO Depth 3 Cutoff Frequency 4 Resonance 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 7 EQ Low Gain 8 EQ High Frequency 9 EQ High Gain 10 Dry/Wet 11 12 13 14 15 16 52-76 28-54 table#3 52-76 10-120 52-76 8-40 table#3 28-58 table#3 • : Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) No.* : These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3> See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table” A-40 Range Value See Table 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 100Hz~10.0kHz -12~+12dB 1.0~12.0 14-54 table#3 52-76 10-120 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 0~127 1.0~12.0 0-127 table#1 0-127 0-127 10-120 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB D63>W~D=W~D<W63 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 Control table#3 table#3 table#3 • MIDI Data Format Effect Data Assign Table Table#2 Table#1 Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Value Data 0.00 43 0.04 44 0.08 45 0.13 46 0.17 47 0.21 48 0.25 49 0.29 50 0.34 51 0.38 52 0.42 53 0.46 54 0.51 55 0.55 56 0.59 57 0.63 58 0.67 59 0.72 60 0.76 61 0.80 62 0.84 63 0.88 64 0.93 65 0.97 66 1.01 67 1.05 68 1.09 69 1.14 70 1.18 71 1.22 72 1.26 73 1.30 74 1.35 75 1.39 76 1.43 77 1.47 78 1.51 79 1.56 80 1.60 81 1.64 82 1.68 83 1.72 84 1.77 85 Value Data 1.81 86 1.85 87 1.89 88 1.94 89 1.98 90 2.02 91 2.06 92 2.10 93 2.15 94 2.19 95 2.23 96 2.27 97 2.31 98 2.36 99 2.40 100 2.44 101 2.48 102 2.52 103 2.57 104 2.61 105 2.65 106 2.69 107 2.78 108 2.86 109 2.94 110 3.03 111 3.11 112 3.20 113 3.28 114 3.37 115 3.45 116 3.53 117 3.62 118 3.70 119 3.87 120 4.04 121 4.21 122 4.37 123 4.54 124 4.71 125 4.88 126 5.05 127 5.22 Value 5.38 5.55 5.72 6.06 6.39 6.73 7.07 7.40 7.74 8.08 8.41 8.75 9.08 9.42 9.76 10.10 10.80 11.40 12.10 12.80 13.50 14.10 14.80 15.50 16.20 16.80 17.50 18.20 19.50 20.90 22.20 23.60 24.90 26.20 27.60 28.90 30.30 31.60 33.00 34.30 37.00 39.70 Table#5 Value Data 0.0 43 0.1 44 0.2 45 0.3 46 0.4 47 0.5 48 0.6 49 0.7 50 0.8 51 0.9 52 1.0 53 1.1 54 1.2 55 1.3 56 1.4 57 1.5 58 1.6 59 1.7 60 1.8 61 1.9 62 2.0 63 2.1 64 2.2 65 2.3 66 2.4 67 2.5 68 2.6 69 2.7 70 2.8 71 2.9 72 3.0 73 3.1 74 3.2 75 3.3 76 3.4 77 3.5 78 3.6 79 3.7 80 3.8 81 3.9 82 4.0 83 4.1 84 4.2 85 Room Size (m) Data Value Data Value 0 0.1 43 6.8 1 0.3 44 7.0 2 0.4 3 0.6 4 0.7 5 0.9 6 1.0 7 1.2 8 1.4 9 1.5 10 1.7 11 1.8 12 2.0 13 2.1 14 2.3 15 2.5 16 2.6 17 2.8 18 2.9 19 3.1 20 3.2 21 3.4 22 3.5 23 3.7 24 3.9 25 4.0 26 4.2 27 4.3 28 4.5 29 4.6 30 4.8 31 5.0 32 5.1 33 5.3 34 5.4 35 5.6 36 5.7 37 5.9 38 6.1 39 6.2 40 6.4 41 6.5 42 6.7 Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Value THRU(20) 22 25 28 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 700 800 900 1.0k 1.1k 1.2k 1.4k 1.6k 1.8k 2.0k 2.2k 2.5k Data Value 43 2.8k 44 3.2k 45 3.6k 46 4.0k 47 4.5k 48 5.0k 49 5.6k 50 6.3k 51 7.0k 52 8.0k 53 9.0k 54 10.0k 55 11.0k 56 12.0k 57 14.0k 58 16.0k 59 18.0k 60 THRU(20.0k) Table#8 Table#7 Reverb Width; Depth; Height Delay Time (ms) Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Value Data 0.1 43 3.2 44 6.4 45 9.5 46 12.7 47 15.8 48 19.0 49 22.1 50 25.3 51 28.4 52 31.6 53 34.7 54 37.9 55 41.0 56 44.2 57 47.3 58 50.5 59 53.6 60 56.8 61 59.9 62 63.1 63 66.2 64 69.4 65 72.5 66 75.7 67 78.8 68 82.0 69 85.1 70 88.3 71 91.4 72 94.6 73 97.7 74 100.9 75 104.0 76 107.2 77 110.3 78 113.5 79 116.6 80 119.8 81 122.9 82 126.1 83 129.2 84 132.4 85 Data Value Data Value 0 0.3 43 4.6 1 0.4 44 4.7 2 0.5 45 4.8 3 0.6 46 4.9 4 0.7 47 5.0 5 0.8 48 5.5 6 0.9 49 6.0 7 1.0 50 6.5 8 1.1 51 7.0 9 1.2 52 7.5 10 1.3 53 8.0 11 1.4 54 8.5 12 1.5 55 9.0 13 1.6 56 9.5 14 1.7 57 10.0 15 1.8 58 11.0 16 1.9 59 12.0 17 2.0 60 13.0 18 2.1 61 14.0 19 2.2 62 15.0 20 2.3 63 16.0 21 2.4 64 17.0 22 2.5 65 18.0 23 2.6 66 19.0 24 2.7 67 20.0 25 2.8 68 25.0 26 2.9 69 30.0 27 3.0 28 3.1 29 3.2 30 3.3 31 3.4 32 3.5 33 3.6 34 3.7 35 3.8 36 3.9 37 4.0 38 4.1 39 4.2 40 4.3 41 4.4 42 4.5 Value Data 135.5 86 138.6 87 141.8 88 144.9 89 148.1 90 151.2 91 154.4 92 157.5 93 160.7 94 163.8 95 167.0 96 170.1 97 173.3 98 176.4 99 179.6 100 182.7 101 185.9 102 189.0 103 192.2 104 195.3 105 198.5 106 201.6 107 204.8 108 207.9 109 211.1 110 214.2 111 217.4 112 220.5 113 223.7 114 226.8 115 230.0 116 233.1 117 236.3 118 239.4 119 242.6 120 245.7 121 248.9 122 252.0 123 255.2 124 258.3 125 261.5 126 264.6 127 267.7 Value 270.9 274.0 277.2 280.3 283.5 286.6 289.8 292.9 296.1 299.2 302.4 305.5 308.7 311.8 315.0 318.1 321.3 324.4 327.6 330.7 333.9 337.0 340.2 343.3 346.5 349.6 352.8 355.9 359.1 362.2 365.4 368.5 371.7 374.8 378.0 381.1 384.3 387.4 390.6 393.7 396.9 400.0 Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.5 43 11.8 86 24.2 1 0.8 44 12.1 87 24.5 2 1.0 45 12.3 88 24.9 3 1.3 46 12.6 89 25.2 4 1.5 47 12.9 90 25.5 5 1.8 48 13.1 91 25.8 6 2.0 49 13.4 92 26.1 7 2.3 50 13.7 93 26.5 8 2.6 51 14.0 94 26.8 9 2.8 52 14.2 95 27.1 10 3.1 53 14.5 96 27.5 11 3.3 54 14.8 97 27.8 12 3.6 55 15.1 98 28.1 13 3.9 56 15.4 99 28.5 14 4.1 57 15.6 100 28.8 15 4.4 58 15.9 101 29.2 16 4.6 59 16.2 102 29.5 17 4.9 60 16.5 103 29.9 18 5.2 61 16.8 104 30.2 19 5.4 62 17.1 20 5.7 63 17.3 21 5.9 64 17.6 22 6.2 65 17.9 23 6.5 66 18.2 24 6.7 67 18.5 25 7.0 68 18.8 26 7.2 69 19.1 27 7.5 70 19.4 28 7.8 71 19.7 29 8.0 72 20.0 30 8.3 73 20.2 31 8.6 74 20.5 32 8.8 75 20.8 33 9.1 76 21.1 34 9.4 77 21.4 35 9.6 78 21.7 36 9.9 79 22.0 37 10.2 80 22.4 38 10.4 81 22.7 39 10.7 82 23.0 40 11.0 83 23.3 41 11.2 84 23.6 42 11.5 85 23.9 MIDI Data Format Value 135.5 137.0 138.6 140.2 141.8 143.3 144.9 146.5 148.1 149.6 151.2 152.8 154.4 155.9 157.5 159.1 160.6 162.2 163.8 165.4 166.9 168.5 170.1 171.7 173.2 174.8 176.4 178.0 179.5 181.1 182.7 184.3 185.8 187.4 189.0 190.6 192.1 193.7 195.3 196.9 198.4 200.0 Value 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.0 11.1 12.2 13.3 14.4 15.5 17.1 18.6 20.2 21.8 23.3 24.9 26.5 28.0 29.6 31.2 32.8 34.3 35.9 37.5 39.0 40.6 42.2 43.7 45.3 46.9 48.4 50.0 Appendix Value Data 67.8 86 69.4 87 70.9 88 72.5 89 74.1 90 75.7 91 77.2 92 78.8 93 80.4 94 81.9 95 83.5 96 85.1 97 86.7 98 88.2 99 89.8 100 91.4 101 93.0 102 94.5 103 96.1 104 97.7 105 99.3 106 100.8 107 102.4 108 104.0 109 105.6 110 107.1 111 108.7 112 110.3 113 111.9 114 113.4 115 115.0 116 116.6 117 118.2 118 119.7 119 121.3 120 122.9 121 124.4 122 126.0 123 127.6 124 129.2 125 130.7 126 132.3 127 133.9 Reverb Time (ms) EQ Frequency (Hz) Value Data 4.3 86 4.4 87 4.5 88 4.6 89 4.7 90 4.8 91 4.9 92 5.0 93 5.1 94 5.2 95 5.3 96 5.4 97 5.5 98 5.6 99 5.7 100 5.8 101 5.9 102 6.0 103 6.1 104 6.2 105 6.3 106 6.4 107 6.5 108 6.6 109 6.7 110 6.8 111 6.9 112 7.0 113 7.1 114 7.2 115 7.3 116 7.4 117 7.5 118 7.6 119 7.7 120 7.8 121 7.9 122 8.0 123 8.1 124 8.2 125 8.3 126 8.4 127 8.5 Table#6 Delay Time (ms) Data Value Data 0 0.1 43 1 1.7 44 2 3.2 45 3 4.8 46 4 6.4 47 5 8.0 48 6 9.5 49 7 11.1 50 8 12.7 51 9 14.3 52 10 15.8 53 11 17.4 54 12 19.0 55 13 20.6 56 14 22.1 57 15 23.7 58 16 25.3 59 17 26.9 60 18 28.4 61 19 30.0 62 20 31.6 63 21 33.2 64 22 34.7 65 23 36.3 66 24 37.9 67 25 39.5 68 26 41.0 69 27 42.6 70 28 44.2 71 29 45.7 72 30 47.3 73 31 48.9 74 32 50.5 75 33 52.0 76 34 53.6 77 35 55.2 78 36 56.8 79 37 58.3 80 38 59.9 81 39 61.5 82 40 63.1 83 41 64.6 84 42 66.2 85 Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Table#4 Table#3 Modulation Delay Offset (ms) LFO Frequency (Hz) A-41 Yamaha Disklavier Model: E3 MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART Function... Basic Channel Mode Default Transmitted Recognized 1-16 Changed 1-16 1-16 3 3 Messages × 3, 4 (m=1) Altered Note **************** × 0-127 0-127 **************** 0-127 Number : True voice Velocity Note ON 9nH, v=1-127 Note OFF 8nH, v=0-127 After Key s Touch Ch s Pitch Bend Remarks 1-16 Default Memorized *2, *3 v=1-127 *5 × *1, *2 × 0-24 semi 0, 32 *1, *2 *1, *2 7, 11 × *1, *2 6, 38 × *2 65 × *4 *2 Portament *2 Sostenuto 67 Soft (Shift) Pedal 71-74, 84 × *2 91, 93, 94 × *2 96-101 × Prog Change Effect Depth *1,*2 0-127 : True # Data Entry Hold1 (Sustain) 66 Change Bank Select *1 1, 5, 10 64 Control Date: 18-Mar-2011 Version: 1.00 0-127 *2 **************** System Exclusive Common : Song Pos × × : Song Sel × × : Tune × × System : Clock × × Real Time : Commands × × Aux : All Sound OFF (120, 126, 127) : Reset All Cntrls × : Local ON/OFF × (121) : All Notes OFF Messages : Active Sense : Reset Notes (123-125) × × *1 = Received (transmitted) if switch is on. *2 = Only ESBL Part can be recognized. *3 = m is always treated as 1 regardless of its value. *4 = Transmit if this model has a Sostenuto Pedal. Mode 1 : OMNI ON. POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF. POLY *5 = Applying further pressure on the key does not output key aftertouch information. Instead, key position is transmitted as additional information. Mode 2 : OMNI ON. MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF. MONO : YES × : NO-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
Yamaha E3 El manual del propietario
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha E3 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha E3 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha E3 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha E3 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha E3 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha E3 de handleiding
- português: Yamaha E3 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha E3 Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha E3 Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha E3 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha E3 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha E3 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha E3 Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha DKC-850 Manual de usuario
-
-
-
-
Yamaha DGC2E3 PE El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-